Digital PDFs

AA-DY51A-XV

October 1984

536 pages

Original

18MB

Document:	Rainbow MS-DOS Version 2.11 Documentation
Order Number:	AA-DY51A-XV
Revision:
Pages:	536
Original Filename:	http://bitsavers.org/pdf/dec/rainbow/ms-dos/AA-DY51A-XV_Rainbow_MS-DOS_Version_2.11_Documentation_Oct84.pdf

OCR Text

First Printing, October 1984
© Digital Equipment Corporation 1983, 1984. All Rights Reserved.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should
not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital
Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may
appear in this document.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license and may
only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such license.
No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on equipment
that is not supplied by DIGITAL or its affiliated companies.
CP/M is a registered trademark of Digital Research Inc. CP/M-80 and CP/M-86
are trademarks of Digital Research Inc.
8088 '" is a trademark of Intel Corporation.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

~D~DD~D'M
DEC
DECmate
DECsystem-10
DECSYSTEM-20
DECUS
DECwriter
DIBOL

GIGI
MASSBUS
PDP
P/OS
Professional
Rainbow
RSTS

RSX
UNIBUS
VAX
VMS

VT
Work Processor

The postage-prepaid READER'S COMMENTS form on the last page of this
document requests the user's critical evaluation to assist us in preparing future
documentation.

Printed in U.S.A.

©Digital Equipment Corporation 1984. All Rights Reserved.
Rainbow is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation.
Printed in U. S. A.

AV-EA01A-XV

TeChni~~tatiOn

Kits

Available Now
Rainbow 100 + /1008
Technical Documentation Kit
Order No. QV069-GZ

order by calling DECdirect ™ toll free

1-800-258-1710

Coming Soon
Rainbow MS ™- DOS V2.05
Technical Documentation Kit
and
Rainbow CP/M®-86/80 V2.0
Technical Documentation Kit
for ordering information call
\

1-603-884-7009

© Digital Equipment Corporation 1984. All Rights Reserved.
Rainbow is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation.
Printed in U.S.A.
AV-EA02A-XV

~D~DDmD'"

AA-DYS1A-XV

MSTM_DOS
Version 2.11
Documentation

digital equipment corporation

MSTM_DOS Version 2.11
Update Instructions
AV-EA04A-XV
October 1984

Use these instructions if you have been using the
Version 2.05 or Version 2.01 operating
system. If you are a first-time user of the MST~DOS
operating system, you can ignore these instructions and
go to the Rainbow MSTld_DOS Version 2.11 Getting
Started in this kit.
MST~DOS

Printed in U.S.A.
Rainbow is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation.
MS ™ is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
CP/M is a registered trademark of Digital Research Inc.
CP/M-80 and CP/M-86 are trademarks of Digital Research Inc.

Updating the MS-DOS Operating
System
These update instructions are for users of the MS-DOS operating system
that have been using the MS-DOS Version 2.05 or Version 2.01 operating
system. If you are a first-time user of the MS-DOS operating system, you
can ignore these instructions and go to the Rainbow MS-DOS Version 2.11
Getting Started in this kit.
You have to update the MS-DOS operating system if you have one of the
following combinations:
Table 1. Update Instructions
If you ...

Go to ...

Are a new user of the MS-DOS operating
system with the Rainbow Computer

Rainbow MS-DOS Version 2.11 Getting
Started in this kit

Use the MS-DOS Version 2.01 operating
system with diskettes that contain
application files

Page 2

Use the MS-DOS Version 2.05 operating
system with diskettes that contain
application files

Page 4

Use the MS-DOS Version 2.01 or Version
2.05 operating system with
copy-protected diskettes

Page 6

Use the MS-DOS Version 2.05 or Version
2.01 operating system with a hard disk

Page 9

IMPORTANT
You should make a copy of the master MS-DOS
Version 2.11 operating system diskette before you
use it. Store the original, master diskette in a safe
place.

Updating The MS-DOS Operating System

Updating Diskettes that Contain
The MS-DOS Version 2.01 Operating
System
To update a diskette that contains the MS-DOS Version 2.01 operating
system AND application files or other programs for the MS-DOS Version
2.11 operating system, you will:
• Copy MS-DOS system files from the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating
system diskette to a blank diskette.
• Copy application files or other programs from the MS-DOS Version
2.01 diskette to the diskette that contains the MS-DOS Version 2.11
operating system files.
Follow the instructions below:
1. Turn on the Rainbow computer and insert the MS-DOS Version 2.11

operating system diskette into drive A.
2. Insert

ablank diskette into drive B.

3. Press the A key to start the MS-DOS operating system.
4. Type the date and the time.
The computer displays the operating system prompt, A>.
5. Use the FORMAT program to prepare the blank diskette in drive B.
Type:
A>FORMAT B:/I/S( Return)

NOTE
To properly update the operating system, you
must use the FORMAT program to copy the
system files. DO NOT use the SYS program.

Updating The MS-DOS Operating System
When the FORMAT program is finished, MS-DOS displays the
operating system prompt. The diskette in drive B now contains two
hidden MS-DOS Version 2.11 system files and the file named
"COMMAND. COM" .
6. Use the COPY command to copy any MS-DOS Version 2.11 programs,
(DISKCOPY, FORMAT, and PRINT, for example) to the diskette in
drive B. Most of these programs are new versions and should be used
with the new version of the operating system files.
For example, to copy the PRINT program to the diskette in drive B,
type:
A>COPV PRINT.COM B:(R~um)

7. Use the COPY command to copy application files or other programs to
the diskette in drive B.
• Remove the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system diskette from
drive A.
• Insert the diskette that contains the MS-DOS Version 2.01
operating system diskette and the application files or other
programs into drive A.
• Type:
A>COPV filename.typ B:(R~m)

Where filename. typ is the name of the file you want to copy from
the MS-DOS Version 2.01 diskette in drive A to the updated
diskette in drive B.

IMPORTANT
Be sure that you DO NOT copy an old version of
"COMMAND. COM" or an old version of any
other MS-DOS operating system file to the
diskette in drive B.

Updating The MS-DOS Operating System

Your diskette in drive B is now ready to use with the MS-DOS Version
2.11 operating system. With this diskette, you can:
• Start and use the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system
• Run programs or applications

NOTE
When you format diskettes, the default drive must
be the drive that contains the MS-DOS Version
2.11 operating system diskette. This insures that
your diskettes are properly updated to the
MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system.

Updating Diskettes that Contain
The MS-DOS Version 2.05 Operating
System
To update the operating system on a diskette that contains the MS-DOS
Version 2.05 operating system AND other programs or files, you will:
•

Use the LDCOPY program to place the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system loader on the MS-DOS Version 2.05 diskette.

• Use the SYS program to copy the MS-DOS Version 2.11 system files
to the MS-DOS Version 2.05 diskette.
• Use the COPY command to copy the file COMMAND. COM to the
MS-DOS Version 2.05 diskette.
• Use the COPY command to copy the MS-DOS Version 2.11 programs,
(BACKUP, FORMAT, and DISKCOPY, for example) to the MS-DOS
Version 2.05 diskette.

Updating The MS-DOS Operating System

Follow the instructions below:
1. Turn on the Rainbow computer and insert the MS-DOS Version 2.11

operating system diskette into drive A.
2. Insert the diskette that contains the MS-DOS Version 2.05 operating
system into drive B.
3. Press the A key to start the MS-DOS operating system.
4. . Type the date and the time.
The computer displays the operating system prompt, A>.
5. Use the LDCOPY program to place the MS-DOS Version 2.11 loader
on the diskette that contains the MS-DOS Version 2.05 operating system in drive B. Type:
A>LDCOPY B:(Rewm)

When the LDCOPY program is finished, the computer displays the A>
prompt.
6. Use the SYS program to copy the MS-DOS Version 2.11 system files
from your new diskette to the MS-DOS Version 2.05 operating system
diskette in drive B. Type:
A>SYS B: (Retum )

When the SYS program is finished, the computer displays the A>
prompt.
7. Use the COPY command to copy the file named "COMMAND.COM"
from your new diskette to the diskette that contains the MS-DOS
Version 2.05 operating system in drive B. Type:
A>COPY COMMAND.COM B:(Rewm)

When the COPY command is complete, the computer displays the
A> prompt.

Updating The MS-DOS Operating System

8. Use the COPY command to copy any MS-DOS Version 2.11 programs,
(DISKCOPY, FORMAT, and BACKUP, for example) to the diskette in
drive B. Most of these programs are new versions and should be used
with the new version of the operating system.
For example, to copy the BACKUP program to the diskette in drive B,
type:
A>CDPV 8ACKUP.EXE 8: (Return)

Updating Diskettes that Contain MS-DOS Version 2.05 or
Version 2.01 Operating System and Are Copy-Protected
To update the operating system on a copy-protected diskette that contains
the MS-DOS Version 2.05 or MS-DOS Version 2.01 operating system, you
will:
• Copy the files on the copy-protected diskette to a blank, MS-DOS
formatted diskette
• Reformat the copy-protected diskette
• Copy the files back to the copy-protected diskette

Updating The MS-DOS Operating System

NOTE
If you want to put MS-DOS Version 2.11 on a
copy-protected diskette that does not contain
MS-DOS Version 2.05 or Version 2.01, you can
follow the instructions below. However, the copyprotected diskette MUST have 50,000 bytes of
free space.

Follow the instructions below:
1. Turn on the Rainbow computer and insert the MS-DOS Version 2.11
operating system diskette into drive A.

2. Insert a blank diskette into drive B. This diskette is referred to as the
"temporary holding diskette."
3. Press the A key to start the MS-DOS operating system.
4. Type the date and the time.
The computer displays the operating system prompt, A>.
5. Use the FORMAT program to prepare the blank diskette in drive B.
Type:
A>FORMAT B:/I(Rewm)

When the FORMAT program is finished, MS-DOS displays the
operating system prompt.
6. Remove the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system diskette from
drive A and insert the copy-protected diskette into drive A.
7. Use the COpy command to copy the files on the copy-protected
diskette in drive A to the blank, formatted diskette in drive B. Type:
A>COPV *.* B:(Rewm)

MS-DOS copies the files from the copy-protected diskette in drive A
to the temporary holding diskette in drive B.

Updating The MS-DOS Operating System

8. Use the DEL command to remove the file named "COMMAND. COM"
from the temporary holding diskette. Type:
A>DEL B:CDMMAHD.CDM(Rewm)

9. Change the current default drive to drive B by typing:
A>B: (Rewm )

10. Remove the temporary holding diskette from drive B and insert the
MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system diskette into the same drive.
11. Use the FORMAT program to copy the MS-DOS Version 2.11 system
files on the diskette in drive B to the diskette in drive A. Type:
B>FDRMAT A: /s ( Rewm )

IMPORTANT
DO NOT use the /1 switch with the above
FORMAT program.
When the FORMAT program is finished, the MS-DOS operating
system displays the operating system prompt. The diskette in drive A
now contains two hidden MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system files
and the file named "COMMAND.COM".
12. Remove the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system diskette from
drive B and insert the temporary holding diskette in the same drive.
13. Use the COPY command to copy the files from the temporary holding
diskette in drive B to the copy-protected diskette in drive A. Type:
B>CDPV *.* A: (RMum )

Updating The MS-DOS Operating System

NOTE
If you have any MS-DOS Version 2.05 or Version
2.01 programs (DISKCOPY and FORMAT, for
example) on the copy-protected diskette, you
should copy the new version of the program from
the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system
diskette to the copy-protected diskette.

You can now use your original copy-protected diskette to start the MS-DOS
Version 2.11 operating system.

Updating to MS-DOS Version 2.11 on a Hard Disk
The update instructions for a hard disk depend on whether you have a 10megabyte partition on your hard disk. To determine whether you have a
10-megabyte partition, follow the steps below:
1. Turn on the Rainbow computer and insert the MS-DOS Version 2.11

operating system diskette into drive A.
2. Press the A key to start the MS-DOS operating system.
If your screen looks like Screen 1, follow the instructions in the section
"Updating to MS-DOS Version 2.11 on a Hard Disk without a 10-Megabyte
Partition" .
If your screen looks like Screen 2, then follow the instructions in the section "Updating to MS-DOS Version 2.11 on a Hard Disk with a
10- Megabyte Partition".

Updating The MS-DOS Operating System

Cop,tright 1984 Digital E"ipIIent Corporation
"ierosoft JlS-IOS version 2.11
eap,right 1981,82,83 "icrosof't Corp.
CoMand v. 2.11

Current date is Sat 9-01-1984
Enter nev date:

Screen 1. MS-DOS Version 2.11 Start-Up Screen
without a 1a-Megabyte Partition

Updating The MS-DOS Operating System

CoP,tright 1984 Digital E"ipwent Corporatilll
"icrosoft ItS-DOS versilll 2.11
CoP,tright 1981,82,83 "icrosoft Corp.
IlARNINC: OnIS 8 IIBstes of the hard disk is usable.
Refer to the ItS-DOS installatilll instructions.
COIIIaIId v. 2.11
Current date is Sat 9-01-1984
Enter new date:

Screen 2. MS-DOS Version 2.11 Start-Up Screen
with a 10-Megabyte Partition

Updating The MS-DOS Operating System

Updating to MS-DOS Version 2.11 on a Hard Disk without a
10-Megabyte Partition. If your computer displays Screen I
when you start the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system, you do not
have a IO-megabyte partition on your hard disk. Follow the steps below to
copy the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system on your hard disk.

You will:
• Use the LDCOPY program to place the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system loader on the hard disk partition(s).
• Use the SYS program to copy the MS-DOS Version 2.11 system files
to the hard disk partition(s).
•

Use the COpy command to copy the file COMMAND. COM to the
hard disk partition(s).

• Use the COPY command to copy the MS-DOS Version 2.11 programs,
(BACKUP, FORMAT, and DISKCOPY, for example) to the MS-DOS
Version 2.05 hard disk partition(s).
Follow the instructions below:

NOTE
You must follow these steps for all MS-DOS partitions to properly update the operating system on
your hard disk.
1. Type the date and the time.

The computer displays the operating system prompt, A>.
2. Use the LDCOPY program to place the MS-DOS Version 2.11 loader
on your hard disk partition that contains the MS-DOS Version 2.05
operating system. Type:
A>LDCOPV E: (Return)

When the LDCOPY program is finished, the computer displays the A>
prompt.

Updating The MS-DOS Operating System

3. Use the SYS program to copy the MS-DOS Version 2.11 system files
from your new diskette to the hard disk partition. Type:
A>SYS E: (Return)

When the SYS program is finished, the computer displays the A>
prompt.
IMPORTANT
If the SYS program displays the message, "No
room for system on destination diskette," you do
not start the operating system from the hard disk
partition. You should ignore the message and
continue with step 4.

4. Use the COpy command to copy the file named "COMMAND.COM"
from your new diskette to the hard disk partition, (drive E:). Type:
A>COPY COMMAND.COM E: (Return)

When the COPY command is complete, the computer displays the the
A> prompt.
5. Use the COPY command to copy any MS-DOS Version 2.11 programs,
(DISKCOPY, FORMAT, and BACKUP, for example) to the hard disk
partition. Most of these programs are new versions and should be used
with the new version of the operating system.
For example, to copy the BACKUP program to the hard disk drive E,
type:
A>COPY BACKUP.EXE E: (R~urn)

Your hard disk partition is now ready to use with the MS-DOS Version
2.11 operating system.

Updating The MS-DOS Operating System
Updating to MS-DOS Version 2.11 on a Hard Disk with a
10-Megabyte Partition. If your computer displays Screen 2
when you start the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system,
you have a 10-megabyte partition. Follow the instructions below to
update the operating system on the hard disk. You will:

• Copy all the files from the hard disk to back-up diskettes.
• Re-initialize and re-partition the hard disk with the Winchester Utility
Program Version 2.0 diskette that is contained in this kit.
• Format the MS-DOS hard disk partition(s) and copy the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system files to the hard disk partition(s).
• Copy the files from the back-up diskettes back to the hard disk. You
will copy only those files that do not already exist on the hard disk
partition(s).
• Copy any MS-DOS programs (DISKCOPY and FORMAT, for example)
that you need from the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system diskette to the hard disk partition(s).
Follow the instructions below:
1. Type the date and the time.

The computer displays the operating system prompt, A>.
2. Insert a blank, formatted diskette into drive B.
3. Use the BACKUP program on the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating
system diskette to copy the contents of the MS-DOS hard disk partition to other diskettes. Type:
A>BACKUP E:\*.*/A TO B:(Retum}

Updating The MS-DOS Operating System

Where:
E:

Is the MS-DOS hard disk partition that you want to copy files
from

Is the diskette drive that contains the diskette that you will
copy the files to

Then follow the instructions at the bottom of the screen.
4. After you copy the files from the hard disk, find the Winchester Utility
Program Version 2.0 diskette contained in this kit. Use this diskette to
re-initialize and re-partition your hard disk.

NOTE
You should use this Winchester Utility Program
Version 2.0 diskette, instead of the Winchester
Utility Program Version 1.0 diskette whenever
you use this program in the future.
a. Remove the MS-DOS Version 2.11 diskette from drive A and
insert the Winchester Utility Program Version 2.0 diskette in the
drive A.
b. Reset the Rainbow computer by pressing:
~ ( Ctrl/Set-Up )

c. When the computer displays the Main System Menu, press the A
key.
The computer displays the Winchester Disk Utility Program Main
Screen.
d. Press the down arrow key once so the arrow points to the "Test
and initialize the hard disk" option. Then press:

Follow the instructions on the screen to test and initialize the hard
disk. When the testing is complete, the computer displays the
Winchester Disk Utility Program Main Screen again.
15

Updating The MS-DOS Operating System

e. Press the down arrow key twice so the arrow points to the "Repartition the hard disk" option. Then press:

The computer displays the operating system menu. Follow the
instructions on the screen to choose your partition arrangement.
IMPORTANT
We recommend that you divide the hard disk into
the 8-megabyte and the 2-megabyte partitions.
You can no longer choose a 10-megabyte partition.
The contents of your 10-megabyte partition can
be contained in the 8-megabyte partition of the
new arrangement. Even though you can repartition with any of the available combinations,
choosing the above combination insures that the
files can be easily restored.
After you select the new partition arrangement, the computer
returns to the Winchester Disk Utility Program Main Screen.
f. Remove the Winchester Utility Program Version 2.0 diskette from
drive A. Store it in a safe place in case you ever need to use it
again.
g. To leave the Winchester Utility Program, press:
~ ( Ctrl!Set·Up )

5. Insert the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system diskette into drive

A.
6. Press the A key to start the MS-DOS operating system.
7. Type the date and the time.
The computer displays the operating system prompt, A>.

Updating The MS-DOS Operating System

8. Use the FORMAT program on the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating
system diskette to reformat the MS-DOS hard disk partition(s). Type:
A>FORMAT E: IS (Return )

When the FORMAT program is complete, the computer displays the
operating system prompt.
9. Use the BACKUP program on the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating
system diskette to restore the files that you copied to the other
diskettes. Type:
A>BACKUP (Return )

The computer displays the Winchester Utility Program Main Screen.
a. Press the down arrow key twice so the arrow points to the
"Restore hard disk files from the backup diskettes." Then, press:

The computer displays the restore options.
b. Press the Next Screen key to select the advanced restore options.
The computer displays the Advanced User Restore Options.
c. Choose:
•

Source diskette drive

•

Destination hard disk drive

d. Press the down arrow key to move to the "Restore file specifier"
option.
e. Press the delete character key until the default entry is no longer
displayed.
f. Type:
\*.*/A

Updating The MS-DOS Operating System

g. Press the down arrow key to move the arrow to the "Restore over
existing files" option.
h. Press the left arrow key to select "No".
This tells the computer to copy (restore) all the files from your
back-up diskettes to the hard disk except files with the same name
as files that already exist on the hard disk drive. The files that
already exist on your hard disk are the MS-DOS system files that
the /S switch of the FORMAT program copied there. You DO NOT
want to copy over these files.
i. Press:

Then follow the instructions at the bottom of the screen to copy
(restore) the files to the specified hard disk partition.
10. To update the remaining MS-DOS programs that are on the MS-DOS
Version 2.11 operating system diskette, use the COPY command to
copy the new versions of the programs from the MS-DOS Version
2.11 operating system diskette to the hard disk partition(s). Most of
these programs are new versions and should be used with the new
version of the operating system files.
For example, to copy the BACKUP program to the hard disk drive E,
type:
A>COPV BACKUP.EXE E:{Rewrn)

Your hard disk partition is now ready to use with the MS-DOS Version
2.11 operating system.

AA-EAOSA-XV

Til

MSTM_DOS
Version 2.11
Getting Started

digital equipment corporation

FIrst Printing, October 1984

The-following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

~DmDDmDTM
DEC
DECmate
DECsystem-10
DECSYSTEM-20
DECUS
DECwriter
DIBOL

GIGI
MASSBUS
PDP
P/OS

Professional
Rainbow
RSTS

RSX
UNIBUS
VAX
VMS
VT
Work Processor

The postage-prepaid READER'S COMMENTS form on the last page of this
document requests the user's critical evaluation to assist us in preparing future
documentation.

Printed in U.S.A.

Contents

Preface

Welcome to the Rainbow Computer

Chapter 1. Starting and Stopping the Computer
Setting Up the Rainbow Computer 1-4
Turning On the Rainbow Computer 1-9
Finding the MS-DOS Master System Diskette
Starting the Operating System 1-15
Resetting the Rainbow Computer 1-23
Turning Off the Computer 1-26
What To Do Next 1-28

Chapter 2. Copying a Diskette

1-1

1-12

2-1

Why Copy a Diskette? 2-1
Making a Working Copy of the Master System Diskette
Looking at the Diskette Directory 2-9
What To Do Next 2-12

2-2

iii

.Contents

Appendix A. Getting Help A-1
Index 1-1

Preface

Welcome to the Rainbow Computer
We congratulate you on the purchase of the Rainbow personal computing
system. The Rainbow computer is today's most versatile system. It is the
only industry-standard computer built to DIGITAL's quality specifications
and backed by DIGITAL's commitment to service and support. The
Rainbow computer is a sound investment in personal productivity that you'll
enjoy using every day.
To get you started, we have prepared a set of easy-to-use documentation.
We welcome your comments, which you can record on the card in the back
.. of each manual. Please let us hear from you.
Remember that purchasing your first Rainbow computer is just the beginning of your relationship with Digital Equipment Corporation, the world's
leading manufacturer of minicomputers. Our dedication to quality manufacturing, our extensive availability of spare parts and accessories, and our
service organization of 16,000 representatives worldwide are your further
assurance of total DIGITAL quality. With the Rainbow computer and the
MS-DOS operating system, you have an investment that will grow in value
.
as you use it now and in the future.

1
Starting and Stopping
the Computer

This guide assumes you are a first-time user of Digital Equipment Corporation's Rainbow computer. The guide presents each procedure in a step-bystep manner. Therefore, it is important for you to follow each step in the
given sequence. If you attempt to follow steps out of sequence, some procedures may be confusing to you. Enjoy using the computer.
This guide is organized as follows:
• Chapter 1: Starting and stopping the Rainbow computer and the
MS-DOS operating system
• Chapter 2: Copying a diskette

,-,

Starting and Stopping the Computer
The following information is helpful for you to know in order to use the
computer:
•

In examples of dialog between you and the computer, characters the
computer displays on the screen are printed in black. Characters you
type from the keyboard are printed in color.

•

You can type these characters in either lowercase or uppercase. Use
the Shift or Lock key on the keyboard to produce uppercase characters. The illustration below shows these keys.

NOTE
You cannot use the Lock key to type characters
shown above numbers or other special characters
on the keyboard. For example, if you want to type
$, 0/0, *, (, :, ", ", ?, you must use the
Shift key. The Lock key only affects the alphabetic characters. When the Lock key is pressed
down, you can return to lowercase by pressing the
Lock key again.
• Be sure to type all spaces and punctuation marks exactly as they are
printed in this guide. In many cases, if you mistype a word or character, a message is displayed and you must retype the line.

1-2

Starting and Stopping the Computer

means to press the Return key.

•

( Return)

•

( Ctrl/C ) means to hold down the control key (labeled Ctrl on the
keyboard). While you are still holding the Ctrl key, press the C key
and then release both keys.

You cannot hurt the computer. Nothing that you type on the keyboard will
do any damage to the Rainbow computer.
The illustration below shows a Rainbow computer including a monitor
(video screen), keyboard, and system unit with two diskette drives.

SYSTEM UNIT

1-3

Starting and Stopping the Computer

Setting up the Rainbow Computer
If you need help at any time, call the
appropriate DIGITAL Customer Help Line
number listed at the end of this guide.
The instructions in this section assume that the computer has been installed
according to the Rainbow Installation Guide.

Opening the drive doors on a horizontal unit
1. Open drive A by pushing on the top of the drive door.
PUSH TO OPEN

1-4

Starting and Stopping the Computer

2. Open drive B by pushing on the bottom of the drive door.

PUSH TO OPEN

1-5

Starting and Stopping the Computer

Opening the drive doors on a vertical unit
1. Open drive A by pushing on the left edge of the drive door.

PUSH TO OPEN

1-6

Starting and Stopping the Computer

2. Open drive B by pushing on the right edge of the drive door.

PUSH TO OPEN

1-7

Starting and Stopping the Computer

Removing the protective card or diskette
1. Be sure the diskette drives are empty.

2. If the protective card was not removed as part of the installation
procedure, remove it now from drive A (and drive C if you have four
drives.) Also remove any diskettes that you find in the drives. Remove
these by grasping their outer edge and pulling gently.

HORIZONTAL
UNIT

The protective card prevents the drive components from moving during
shipment. Be sure to save it to use later if you move the computer.
1-8

Starting and Stopping the Computer

Turning on the Rainbow Computer
Turn on the computer by pressing the power switch to the 1 (on) position.

_~~~~QI' HORIZONTAL

VERTICAL
UNIT

After about 25 seconds, you will hear whirring sounds and a beep. Then the
Main System Menu is displayed as shown on the next page.

1-9

Starting and Stopping the Computer

q I 1

t I ri

Ra1nbow 100
Cop~rlght

V.r.lon 04.03L
(c) Dlglt.1 E~~Ip-.nt Corpor.tlon 1983
All Right. R••• rv.d

P~.I. A. 8. C. D. W. S, Dr T

A • • te .. t from Dr1ve A
• Itert fro. Drive 8
C • • t.rt fro. Drive C

D • • t.rt frOM Drlve D

W •• t.rt fro. Drive W
5 • • x.c~t. S.lf T•• t
T • en'er Ter.lnel Mode

Helpful Information
When you turn the computer on:
• It automatically runs a short self-test to check its components.

• The drive doors can be opened or closed.
• The version number of the computer is displayed above the copyright
notice in the Main System Menu. The number on your screen may be
different from the number shown in the sample above. H you ever
need to report a problem, your vendor may ask for your version
number.

1-10

Starting and Stopping the Computer

•

If you find a list of countries displayed on your screen, you have not
selected a language in which to communicate with the computer. To
make this selection, refer to the Rainbow Installation Guide.

• If the Main System Menu is too dim or too bright, or is not displayed
at all, adjust the brightness and contrast controls on the back of the
monitor as shown below.

1-11

Starting and Stopping the Computer

Contrary to the instructions in the Main System Menu, do not press any
keys at this time. Wait until you have followed the instructions for inserting
a diskette. If you accidentally press A, B, C, or D, the computer displays:
See Owner's Manual

- MESSAGE 21

- Drlve Not Ready

If you see this message, turn the computer off by pressing the power
switch to position o. Then turn it on again and start over.
If you see any other message, follow the instructions given in the message.

Finding the MS-DOS Master
System Diskette
1. Open the MS-DOS Operating System Kit and remove the diskette box.

DISKETTE BOX

MS -DOS
OPERATING SYSTEM
KIT

1-12

Starting and Stopping the Computer

2. Remove the MS-DOS master system diskette from the diskette box.

ft
SO wa re

MS-DOS BIN RX50

~D!DD~D

"'9B3 DIGITAL EOUIPMENT CORPORATION

software

1-1-3

Starting and Stopping the Computer

3. Remove the MS-DOS master system diskette from its protective paper
envelope.

WRITEPROTECT
TAB

DISKETTE
SURFACE
DO NOT
TOUCH
PROTECTIVE
ENVELOPE

Helpful Information
• Handle a diskette by its edges. Do not touch diskette surfaces that
show through in the center of the diskette cover.
• If you want more information about diskettes, refer, at your leisure, to
Appendix B in the Rainbow MS-DOS Version 2.11 User's Guide.

1-14

Starting and Stopping the Computer

Starting the Operating System
The Rainbow computer operates with a group of instructions called an
operating system that controls the overall functioning of the computer. You
are using an operating system known as MS-DOS.
When the Main System Menu, shown in the section called "Turning on the
Rainbow Computer," is displayed on the screen, you can start the operating
system. Proceed with the following instructions.

1-15

Starting and Stopping the Computer

Inserting the master system diskette
Into a horizontal unit
1. If the drive A door is closed, open it.

2. With the diskette label facing up and the write-protect tab on the left,
insert the diskette into drive A.

ALIGN ORANGE ARROW
ON DISKETTE WITH
THE ORANGE STRIPE
ON THE DISKETTE DRIVE

3. With the diskette securely in drive A, close the drive door by pushing
on the outside of the open door. If the door does not close easily,
make sure the diskette is fully inserted.
PUSH TO CLOSE

1-16

Starting and Stopping the Computer

Inserting the master system diskette
into a vertical unit
1. If the drive A door is closed, open it.

2. With the diskette label on the left and the write-protect tab facing
down, insert a diskette into drive A.

ALIGN ORANGE ARROW
ON DISKETTE WITH
THE ORANGE STRIPE
ON THE DISKETTE DRIVE

3. With the diskette securely in the drive, close the door by pushing on
the outside of the open door. If the door does not close easily,
make sure the diskette is fully inserted.

PUSH TO CLOSE

1-17

Starting and Stopping the Computer

On the keyboard, press:
A

in response to the Main System Menu.

Helpful Information
• Pressing A tells the computer which drive contains the system
diskette.
• You will hear clicking and whirring sounds from the drive.
• A small light beside the drives turns on briefly.
• You will see the following message:
Loading MS-DOS •..

1-18

Starting and Stopping the Computer

• Mter the clicking and whirring sounds stop, the operating system displays the start-up message as shown below.

Ccwi!lbt 1984 liSiul E,u,.nt Corporatilll
Nicrosoft lIS-DOS versilll 2.11
Copsri5ht 1981,82,83 Nkrosoft Corp.
eo.and v. 2.11
Current date is Sat Hl-l984
Enter III!U date:

• The version number of the operating system is displayed along with
the copyright date. The numbers on your screen may be different
from the numbers shown in the previous illustration.
• If the entire start-up message is not displayed as shown, follow the
instructions in the message at the top of the screen.

1-19

Starting and Stopping the Computer

Setting the Date and Time
Notice that the last symbol displayed on your screen is a blinking rectangle.
This symbol is called a cursor. The cursor shows you where the next character you type will be displayed on the screen. The cursor is showing you
where to enter today's date.
After you enter the date and the time, press the Return key to send those
instructions to the computer. If you discover a typing error before you
press the Return key, use the delete character key or the backspace key to
erase one letter at a time. The delete character key is located above the
Return key and is marked with an X. The backspace key is labeled BS on
the keyboard label strip. These keys are shown in the illustration below.
Delete

1. Enter today's date using the following format:

mm-dd-yy
For example, you would enter November 24, 1983 as:
11-24-83

Type in the current date and press the Return key.
The MS-DOS operating system displays the current time and asks you:
Enter new t 1me:

1-20

Starting and Stopping the Computer

2. Enter the current time using the following format:
hh:mm
Note that the operating system uses a twenty-four hour clock. For
example, 7:30 a.m. is typed as:
7:30

and 7:30 p.m. is typed as:
19:30

3. When you have entered the correct time, press the Return key. You
will see:
A)

Congratulations! You have now successfully
started the MS-DOS operating system.
The last symbol displayed on the left side of the screen, A), is called the
operating system prompt or prompt. The computer displays this prompt to
indicate that it is waiting (or prompting) for instructions from you. The
prompt consists of the name of the drive the operating system is currently
accessing (A, B, C, or D) and a right angle bracket. The drive that is
currently being accessed is also known as the active or the default drive.

1-21

Starting and Stopping the Computer

Messages
While you are using the computer, unexpected messages could display on
the screen. There are many possible reasons for these messages. For
example, the computer could find a problem while you are running a program. (A program is a collection of instructions to the computer.) If you see
a message that begins with
See Owner's Manual -

refer to the messages section of the Rainbow Owner's Manual. For all
other messages, refer to the Rainbow MS-DOS Version 2.11 User's Guide.
The illustration below shows an example of a message. You see this message if you have inserted a diskette incorrectly.

• 1 •••••
Rainbow 100
Ver'Hon 04.03L
Copyrlg"t (c) Digital EquipMent Corporatlon 1983
AJ 1 IUghh ~e!le,.ved

Press A, B. C, D, W. S. or T
A • st."t from Drive A
B • st.,.t froll'l Drive B
C • st."t from Drive C
D • sta,.t from Drive D
w • st."t from O,.!VI!: W
S • execute Self Test
T • enter Ter-mthal Mode

The Rainbow MS-DOS Version 2.11 User's Guide lists all operating system
messages in alphabetical order and explains how to solve the problem that
causes each message.

1-22

Starting and Stopping the Computer

Resetting the Rainbow Computer
Resetting the computer is like turning it off and then on again without
pressing the power switch. It allows you to start over without having to
remove the diskettes. When you reset the computer, it acts as though it
were just turned on, and displays the Main System Menu.

Helpful Information
•

You may need to begin again if the computer does not respond as
expected. For example, if the Main System Menu is not displayed
after you turn the power on, simply reset the computer.

• Resetting works only when the computer is already turned on.

How to Reset the Computer
Practice resetting the computer now by following the instructions below:
1. Press the Set-Up key shown in the illustration below.
Set-Up

LJEJLJEl

[][J[J[]
[][][JO

D[][JO""'·
E::::::JD
Ctrl

1-23

Starting and Stopping the Computer

Then the text on your screen should look like the screen below.

SET-UP

IO EXIT PRESS ·SET-UP·
PRESS ·HELp·
IO RESET TYPE <CTRL/SET-UP>

05.0JA
&4OK

JAIlS
IT
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
]
123456789OfM a.-2345678@Ml111234567MMP',t23456789OfPfliMl

2. Hold down the Ctrl key. While you are still holding the Ctrl key, press
the Set-Up key again. Then release both keys gently.
The illustration on the previous page shows you the location of these
keys.
You can reset the computer with or without diskettes inserted in the
drives.

1-24

Starting and Stopping the Computer

The computer displays:
1•••11'4

In about eight seconds, the computer again displays the Main System
Menu.

1-25

Starting and Stopping the Computer

Turning off the Computer
This section describes how to turn the computer off. However, if you are
using the computer for the first time, leave it on with the master system
diskette in drive A, and proceed to the section called "What To Do Next"
on page 28.
To end an operating session, remove all diskettes before turning the
computer off. Then turn the computer off by pressing the power switch
to O.

1-26

Starting and Stopping the Computer

IMPORTANT
Do not remove a diskette from its drive while the
operating system is accessing information on it.
This activity is easy to detect because the small
lights beside each drive are lit when the operating
system writes to or reads from a diskette. The
illustrations below and on the following page show
the location of these lights.

DRIVE LIGHT A
DRIVE LIGHT 8

1-27

Starting and Stopping the Computer

DRIVE LIGHT A
DRIVE LIGHT B

IMPORTANT
Always place diskettes in their protective paper
envelopes and store them in a safe place. Keep
diskettes in close-fitting, dust-tight boxes. Store
these boxes in rooms with consistent temperature,
humidity, and cleanliness. For a full description of
the handling and care of diskettes, refer to Appendix B of the Rainbow MS-DOS Version 2.11 User's
Guide.

What To Do Next
Press A to start the MS-DOS operating system. Then read Chapter 2 and
follow the instructions to make a copy of the MS-DOS master system diskette that is currently inserted in drive A.

1-28

2
Copying a Diskette

This chapter explains how to format and copy a diskette. As an example,
the chapter describes how to make a copy of the MS-DOS master system
diskette that is currently inserted in drive A.

Why Copy a Diskette?
It is important to copy or back up all diskettes because a diskette can be
accidentally damaged or lost. By making copies of your diskettes, you generate working copies and can store the original, master diskettes. The
stored diskettes can then be used to make copies, if necessary.
You should back up all your diskettes regularly. To do this use the
FORMAT and DISKCOPY programs. The FORMAT program gives a
diskette a format or organization that the MS-DOS operating system
understands. The DISKCOPY program copies the entire contents of one
diskette onto another diskette.

2-1

Copying a Diskette

Making a Working Copy of the
Master System Diskette
To copy the files from the MS-DOS master system diskette in drive A, you
must first insert a blank diskette into drive B and format that diskette for
MS-DOS. You copy the MS-DOS master system diskette onto this new
diskette.

Preparing the Blank Diskette
Before you use a blank diskette, you must use the FORMAT program to
prepare it. This ensures that the diskette is compatible with the MS-DOS
operating system on the Rainbow computer. To format the blank diskette,
follow the steps below:
1. Remove the diskette from its protective paper envelope.

WRITE·PROTECT
NOTCH
DISKETTE
SURFACE
0.-+"""'00 NOT
TOUCH
PROTECTIVE
ENVELOPE

2-2

Copying a Diskette

2. Open drive B and insert the diskette. Be sure there is no tab protecting the write-protect notch. If there is, remove it. Otherwise, you will
not be able to copy the diskette.

• Horizontal unit
With the label facing down and the write-protect notch on the
right, insert the diskette into drive B.
NOTE
Your blank diskette might not have a label.
INSERT DISKETTE
"UPSIDE DOWN"
IN DRIVE B

2-3

Copying a Diskette

• Vertical unit
With the label on the right and the write-protect notch facing up,
insert the diskette into drive B.
NOTE
Your blank diskette might not have a label.

2-4

Copying a Diskette

3. Close drive B by pushing on the outside of the open door.
4. In response to the A> prompt, type:
A)FORMAT B:/I(Rewm)

Remember that (Retum) means to press the Return key.
IMPORTANT
When using the FORMAT program, you must
include the name of the drive that contains the
blank diskette. If you do not include the name of
the drive, the MS-DOS operating system displays
a message. If this happens, see the messages section in the Rainbow MS-DOS Version 2.11 User's
Guide.

The MS-DOS operating system displays a message similar to the
following:
Rainbow Disk Formatter Version 2.7
WARNING!!!
This program will destroy any data
currently on your disk.
Type <CtrI/C) to stop.
Insert new diskette in drive B:
and strike any key when ready

5. Since your blank diskette is already in drive B, press any key on the
keyboard to tell the MS-DOS operating system you are ready.
Mter you press a key, the operating system displays:
Volume label (11 characters, <Return) for none)?

Volume labels are used to identify diskettes; they are like name tags
for each diskette.

2-5

Copying a Diskette

6. If you want to use a volume label to name the diskette, after the
question mark, type:
Volume label (11 characters, <Return) for

none)?MYDISKETTE(~)

This gives your diskette the volume label, MYDISKETTE.

If you do not want to assign a label, press the Return key. You will
see a message on your screen similar to:
393216 bytes total disk space
393216 bytes available on disk
Format another (YIN)?

7. To end the FORMAT program, type:
Format another (Y/N)?N

The MS-DOS operating system then displays the system prompt:

2-6

Copying a Diskette

Copying the Master System Diskette
The D[SKCOPY program copies the contents of one diskette to a different
diskette. [n the example below, you will copy the contents of the MS-DOS
master system diskette in drive A to the new diskette in drive B.
The D[SKCOPY program takes a few minutes to complete.
1. Mter the A>, type:
A>DISKCDPV A: B:( . . . )

Remember that ( ........ ) means to press the Return key.
The screen displays the text shown below:

A>DISKID'Y A: B:

Insert source diskette in drive A:
Insert foraatted target diskette in drive B:
Strike iII!I kes - read!! I

2-7

Copying a Diskette

2. Because you already have the correct diskettes in drive A and drive B,
press any key as indicated on the screen. The MS-DOS operating
system begins copying the master diskette and displays the message:
Copying •..•

Mter the operating system has copied the diskette, DISKCOPY asks
you:
Copy another (YIN)?

IMPORTANT
If you see any messages while you are copying,
refer to the discussion of the DISKCOPY command in the Rainbow MS-DOS Version 2.11 User's

Guide.
3. To end the DISKCOPY program, after the question mark type:
Copy another (YIN)? H

The system prompt, A>, is then displayed.

Congratulations! You have now successfully
created a copy of the MS-DOS master
system diskette.

2-8

Copying a Diskette

Removing and Storing the Moster
System Diskette
To end this copying session:
1. Open the drive A door and remove the MS-DOS master system
diskette.

2. Return this diskette to its protective envelope and store it in a safe
place. By storing this master diskette, you are preserving a reliable
diskette from which to make future copies of the operating system if
the diskette you use daily is damaged or lost.
3. Open the drive B door and remove the newly copied diskette.
4. On a spare label, write "MS-DOS Working" with a felt-tip pen.

IMPORTANT
If the label is attached to the diskette, do not use
a ball-point pen or a pencil as these can damage
the diskette.
5. Attach the label to the front of the diskette. Use this "working" copy
for your everyday operations.

Looking at the Diskette Directory
Each diskette contains files, which are collections of information. Each diskette also contains a list of all files called a directory, which is similar to a
book's table of contents. The directory lists the files stored on the diskette.
To display the names of files that are stored in the MS-DOS diskette:
1. Insert your diskette with the working copy of the MS-DOS operating
system into drive A.

2-9

Copying a Diskette

2. Mter the A>, type:
A>DIR(Retum)

The operating system displays the following message:
Volume in drive A i5 MS-DOS V2.11
Directory of A:\

Mter this message, a list of file names similar to those on the screen
below appears.

CIIIWIII COl
C1JFI' SYS
IIIIRlVE SYS
IIIIRlVE COl
CIIDSJ: COl
FIllllAT COl
DISKCII'Y CIIt
PRINT COl
EDLIN CIIt
FIND
EX[
FC
EX[
SYS
CIIt
RECOVER COl
IDlE
C1I!
LIlt:
EXE
IIEBIJG COl
IOIACIt: EXE
RDCPII· EX[

8-10-84 1:051'
8-29-84 12:27a
9-27-83 II: 4Iip
9-27-83 IO:38p
64QI 1G-I9-83 7:51p
19414 B-G9-84 1:44p
1409 1G-I9-83 7:51p
380B 8-03-84 9: 35a
BOBO 1G-I9-83 7:51p
6331 lG-19-83 7:51p
25B5 lG-19-83 7:51p
922 1G-I9-83 7:51p
2295 10-19-83 7:51p
4384 lG-19-83 7:51p
423GB 1-06-83 4:3Gp
12223 10-19-83 7:52p
1396 10-10-83 9:25a
9194 lG-14-83 9:45a
IIACKII': EXE 71146 8-13-84 4:56p
CREF . EXE 13824 1G-I9-83 7:52p
"AS"
EXE 81266 HI-84 12:05a
SETPIIIT EXE l4804 2-17-84 4: Olp
EXE2BIN EXE
1649 10-19-83 7:51p
SIRT
EXE
1632 8-08-84 12:21a
ItOIE
COft
1056 9-26-84 1:42p
XATTACH COlI
1388 9-26-84 1:27p
XDETACH CIIt
1302 9-26-84 1:59p
l.IICOPY C1I!
58B8 10-01-84 8: fOp
28 File(s)
11284 bstes free

2-10

15973
17
95J
873

Copying a Diskette

Helpful Information
• The names on your screen may not be the same, but they should be
similar to the examples on this screen.
• Remember that nothing you type on the keyboard will damage the
computer.
• You can type instructions to the operating system in lowercase or
uppercase characters. To produce uppercase characters, use the Shift
or Lock keys.
• If you make a typing mistake, but have not yet pressed the Return
key, you can correct it by using the delete character or the backspace
keys. The delete character key is located above the Return key,
marked with an X. The backspace key is labeled BS on the labelstrip.
If you made a mistake but already pressed the Return key, the operating system displays the message:
Bad command or file name

followed by the system prompt, A>. For example, if you type:

the operating system responds with:
Bad command or file name

When the MS-DOS operating system displays the prompt, A>, you can
type the correct instruction to the operating system.

2-11

Copying a Diskette

What to Do Next
At this point, you are ready to begin working with the computer. You may
wish to do any of the following:
• Make a copy of an application diskette.
• Create and edit a document using a word processing program.
• Run an application program.
• Make a single diskette with both the system programs and the application programs on it.
• Read the Rainbow MS-DOS Version 2.11 User's Guide for information
about:
- Using MS-DOS commands
- Creating and editing a document using the MS-DOS text editor,
EDLIN and the special editing keys
- End the session by removing all diskettes and turning the power
switch to position O.
• Read the Rainbow Using the Hard Disk to install and use the hard
disk with the MS-DOS operating system.

2-12

A
Getting Help

Help Line Phone Numbers
country

Phone Number

U.S.A.
Canada
United Kingdom
Belgium
West Germany
Italy
Japan
Denmark
Spain
Finland
Holland
Switzerland
Sweden
Norway
France
Austria
Australia
Sydney
All other areas

(800) DEC-8000
(800) 267-5251
(0256) 59 200
(02)-24 26 790
(089) 95 91 66 44
(02)-617 53 81 or 617 53 82
(0424) 64-3302
(04)-30 10 05
(1)-73 34 307
(90)-42 33 32
(1820)-31 100
(01)"810 51 21
(08)-98 88 35
(02)-25 64 22
(1)-687 31 52
(222)-67 76 41 extension 444
(02) 412-5555
(008) 226377

A-l

Index
c
Computer
ending an operating session 1-26
resetting 1-23
setting up 1-4
turning on 1-9
version number 1-10
Copying master system diskette 2-1

o
DISKCOPY
program 2-1
Diskette
backup 2-6
box 1-12
handling 1-14
master system 1-12
system 1-13
working copy 2-7
Diskettes
preparing 2-5
removing 1-8
Displaying file names 2-10
Displaying Main System Menu 1-23
Drive
lights 1-27
opening 1-4

1-1

Index

E
Ending an operating session 1-26

F
File 2-10
File names
displaying a list 2-10
FORMAT
program 2-1, 2-5

H
Handling diskettes 1-14
Hard disk 2-12

K
Key 2-11
Ctrl 1-23
delete character 2-11
Lock 2-11
Set-Up 1-23
Shift 2-11

L
Labels
volume 2-5

M
Main System Menu 1-10
Making backup diskettes 2-6
Master System diskette Page Index-2
making a copy 2-2
MS-DOS
starting 1-15
MS-DOS master system diskette
copying 2-1, 2-7

1-2

Index

o
Opening drive 1-4
Operating system
kit 1-12
start-up message 1-19
version number 2-11

p
Preparing a diskette 2-5
Program
DISKCOPY 2-6
FORMAT 2-5
Protective card
removing 1-8

R
Removing diskettes 1-8
Removing protective card 1-8
Resetting the computer 1-23

5
Self-test 1-10
Set-Up <Ctrl/Set-Up> 1-24
Set-Up display 1-24
Start-up message 1-19
Starting MS-DOS 1-15
System
turning off 2-11

T
Turning system off 2-11
Turning the computer on 1-9

1-3

Index

V
Volume labels 2-5

W
Working diskette 2-7, 2-9

1-4

Rainbow™

MSTM-OOS
Version 2.11
Getting Started
AA-EAOSA-XV

READER'S COMMENTS
Did you find this manual understandable, usable, and well-organized? Please
make suggestions for improvement.

Did you find errors in this manual? If so, specify the error and the page number.

Please indicate the type of reader that you most nearly represent.

o First-time computer user
o Experienced computer user
o Application package user
Programmer
oo Other
(please specify),_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Name'_________________________________________
0&8____________________________________________________

Organization___________________________________________
Streetl.._______________________________________________
City_________________________________________________________________________________
State~

___________________________

Zip Code
orCount~------------------------------

I
I

ffl-IJr ------~~~~~ --

II,aDo•.NotaTeaa "a-'" T... ---------------------r

- FOald

-;:1

if Mailed in the
United States
I

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 33 MAYNARD MASS.
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

SOFTWARE PUBLICATIONS

200 FOREST STREET MR01-2/L 12
MARLBOROUGH, MA 01752

-- - -

Do Not Tear - Fold Here and Tape

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --

I
I
I
I

:1...1.5
1"2

I:::
1 0

I!'
1<

1.2

I';;
1\.1

AA-EA06A-XV

MSTM_DOS
Version 2.11
Using the Hard Disk

digital equipment corporation

First Printing, October 1984

© Digital Equipment Corporation 1984. All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should
not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital
Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may
appear in this document.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license and may
only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such license.
No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on equipment
that is not supplied by DIGITAL or its affiliated companies.
MS'M-DOS is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
CP/M is a registered trademark of Digital Research Inc. CP/M-80 and CP/M-86
are trademarks of Digital Research Inc.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

~D~DD~D'M
DEC
DECmate
DECsystem-10
DECSYSTEM-20
DECUS
DECwriter
DIBOL

GIGI
MASSBUS
PDP
P/OS
Professional
Rainbow
RSTS

RSX
UNIBUS
VAX
VMS
VT
Work Processor

The postage-prepaid READER'S COMMENTS form on the last page of this
document requests the user's critical evaluation to assist us in preparing future
documentation.

Printed in U.S.A.

Contents

Preface

Welcome to the Rainbow Winchester Disk Option
Intended Reader v
Guide Organization vi
Conventions Used vi

Chapter 1. Hard Disk Uses

1-1

What is the Hard Disk 1-1
What You Can Do with the Hard Disk

1-3

Chapter 2. Setting Up the Hard Disk

2-1

Using the Hard Disk with the MS-DOS Operating System
What to Do Next 2-8

2-1

Chapter 3. Starting MS-DOS From the Hard Disk

3-1

Manual Start Versus Automatic Start 3-2
Manually Starting MS-DOS from the Hard Disk 3-2
Automatically Starting MS-DOS from the Hard Disk 3-7

iii

Contents

Chapter 4. Correcting Winchester Disk Problems 4-1
Winchester Disk Messages 4-1
Solving Winchester Disk Problems

4-6

Chapter 5. The Hard Disk Arrangement

5-1

Changing the Partition Arrangement on the Hard Disk

Appendix A. Getting Help

5-1

A-1

Index 1-1
Figures
Figure 1-1. The Hard Disk and the Rainbow Computer 1-2
Figure 3-1. Manually Starting the Operating System from the Hard
Disk 3-5
Figure 3-2. The Computer Chooses the Drive and the Partition 3-7
Figure 3-3. You Only Choose the Drive 3-8
Figure 3-4. You Only Choose the Partition 3-9

Screens
Screen 2-1. Winchester Utility Program's Main Screen 2-4
Screen 2-2. Winchester Disk Utility Program Operating System
Menu 2-5
Screen 3-1. AUTO-BOOT Set-Up Screen 3-3
Screen 3-2. A Partition Arrangement 3-6
Screen 3-3. Winchester Utility Program's Main Screen 3-11
Screen 3-4. AUTO-BOOT Set-Up Screen 3-13
Screen 3-5. Winchester Utility Program's Main Screen 3-14
Screen 3-6. AUTO-BOOT Set-Up Screen 3-17
Screen 4-1. Winchester Utility Program's Main Screen 4-7
Screen 4-2. End of a Successful Diagnostic Test 4-8
Screen 4-3. Winchester Utility Program's Main Screen 4-10
Screen 4-4. Complete Initialization Procedure 4-11
Screen 5-1. Winchester Utility Program's Main Screen 5-2
Screen 5-2. Operating System Menu 5-4
Screen 5-3. CP/M-86/80 & MS-DOS Partition Menu (Part 1) 5-5
Screen 5-4. CP/M-86/80 & MS-DOS Partition Menu (Part 2) 5-6
Screen 5-5. Re-partitioned Disk Status 5-7
iv

Preface

Welcome to the Rainbow
Winchester Disk Option
We congratulate you on the purchase of the Rainbow personal computer
and the Rainbow Winchester disk option. The Rainbow Winchester disk is a
hard disk that you install in your personal computer.
The hard disk provides space for 10 million characters (about 3,750 pages).
You can store data from 25 or more diskettes on the hard disk.

Intended Reader
This guide is intended for Rainbow computer users who have purchased the
Rainbow Winchester disk option and plan to use it with the MS-DOS operating system. The purpose of this guide is to provide you with detailed
information about how to use the hard disk.

Preface
This guide assumes that you have:
1. Installed the Rainbow computer according to the instructions in the

Rainbow Installation Guide.
2. Installed and tested the Rainbow Winchester disk according to the
instructions in the Rainbow Winchester Disk Option Installation

Guide.
3. Read the Rainbow MS-DOS Version 2.11 Getting Started.

Guide Organization
The Rainbow MS-DOS Version 2.11 Using the Hard Disk manual is
organized as follows:
Chapter 1

Introduces the hard disk and describes its uses.

Chapter 2

Discusses how to add an MS-DOS part (called
"partition") to the hard disk.

Chapter 3

Discusses the four ways of starting the
MS-DOS operating system from the hard disk.

Chapter 4

Tells you how you can correct hard disk
problems.

Chapter 5

Discusses how you can change the arrangement
of the internal storage areas on the hard disk.

Appendix A

Lists the international DIGITAL Help Line
telephone numbers.

Conventions Used
Follow the conventions listed below while using this guide.
• In examples of dialog between you and the computer, what the com- '
puter displays on the screen is shown in black. The characters you
type from the keyboard are shown in color.
• You can type these characters in either lower- or uppercase characters. Use the Shift or Lock key on the keyboard to enable uppercase
characters.
vi

(

Preface

IMPORTANT
The Lock key does not enable you to type the
numeric and special symbol keys. For example, if
you want to type $, %, *, (, :, ? you must
use the Shift key. The Lock key only affects the
alphabetic characters.

• Make sure to type all spaces and punctuation marks exactly as they
are printed.
• When you see (Return), press the Return key on the keyboard.
• When you see (Ctrl/C), hold down the control key. While you are still
holding the Ctrl key, press the C key and then release both keys.
• The optional portions of a command syntax are enclosed in a pair of
square brackets ([ D.
• Braces ({ }) indicate that you have a choice between two or more
entries. You must select at least one unless the entries are optional.

vii

1
Hard Disk Uses

What is the Hard Disk
The hard disk (called a Winchester disk) can be added onto the Rainbow
computer. This disk enables you to store large files or many small files, and
access the files very rapidly.
The hard disk's storage capacity is defined in megabytes. A byte is equal to
one character, and a megabyte is equal to a million characters. The hard
disk contains ten megabytes of storage space, which is equivalent to 25
times the storage capacity of a single diskette.
In terms of type-written pages, a diskette stores about 150 pages of text;
the 10-megabyte hard disk stores about 3750 pages; the 5-megabyte hard
disk stores about 1875 pages.
The disk can simulate up to four diskette drives, each with a much larger
capacity than a single diskette.

1-1

Hard Disk Uses

Because of its speed and large working capacity, you may want to use the
hard disk to store the programs and files you use daily, and use diskettes
for storing less-used files. If you are using an application program, we
recommend that you store it on the hard disk and store data files on
diskettes.
Figure 1-1 shows where the hard disk fits into the Rainbow computer.

MR-11156

Figure 1-1. The Hard Disk and the Rainbow Computer

For a description of installation procedures, refer to the Rainbow
Winchester Disk Option Installation Guide.

1-2

Hard Disk Uses

What You Can Do with the Hard
Disk
You can use the hard disk to:
• Store application programs or data files.
• Automatically start your operating system from the hard disk by simply turning on the power switch if you have a Rainbow 100B or
Rainbow 100+ computer.
For detailed instructions on how to accomplish the above tasks and for
more information on the hard disk, read the remaining chapters in this
manual.

1-3

2
Setting Up the Hard Disk

Before you can use the hard disk with the MS-DOS operating system, you
must have:
1. Installed the Rainbow computer according to the instructions in the

Rainbow Installation Guide.
2. Installed and tested the hard disk according to the directions in the
Rainbow Winchester Disk Option Installation Guide.
To set up the hard disk to use it with the MS-DOS operating system, read
the rest of this chapter.

Using the Hard Disk with the
MS-DOS Operating System
When you used the Winchester Utility Program to test and initialize (prepare) the hard disk, it was automatically divided into two CP/M-86/80 parts
of equal size. That is, it was set up for use with the CP/M-86/80 operating
system.

2-1

Setting Up the Hard Disk

You must now set it up to use with the MS-DOS operating system by:
1. Setting aside an MS-DOS part on the hard disk

This step sets aside an area of the hard disk for the MS-DOS operating system so you can read and write MS-DOS files to the hard disk.
This is called "partitioning" the hard disk.
2. Preparing and copying the MS-DOS operating system files to the
MS-DOS part
This step prepares the MS-DOS part of the hard disk that you set
aside and then copies the operating system files to that part.

A Hard Disk Partition
This section tells you about the internal storage areas that the hard disk is
divided into. Each of these areas or "parts" are called partitions.
A hard disk can be divided into two, three or four internal storage areas,
each with a much larger capacity than a single diskette. Each of these
internal storage areas is called a hard disk partition. You can divide (or
partition) the internal storage areas to use the space in a way that best fits
your needs. For example, if you are using more than one operating system,
you may need to have one five-megabyte partition for one operating system, and two 2.5 megabyte partitions for the other operating system.

NOTE
If you have a disk with a five megabyte storage

capacity, the partition sizes are different.
The Winchester Utility Program Version 2.0 allows you to divide (or partition) your hard disk in anyone of the following arrangements:
1. Two or four partitions of the CP/M-86/80 operating system only.

2. Two or four partitions of the MS-DOS operating system only.
3. One or two partitions for the CP/M-86/80 operating system, plus one
or two partitions for the MS-DOS operating system.

2-2

Setting Up the Hard Disk

To use the hard disk with the MS-DOS operating system, you must set
aside at least one MS-DOS partition.

Setting Aside an MS-DOS Partition
This section tells you how to set aside a partition(s) for the MS-DOS operating system. To do this you will:
• Start the Winchester Utility Program Version 2.0
• Choose option 2 to re-partition the hard disk
• Choose which partition arrangement you want to divide your hard disk
into
• Choose the size of the partitions depending on which arrangement you
choose
NOTE
Changing the partitions destroys ALL existing
data on ALL hard disk partitions. Therefore, if
you are currently storing files on the hard disk, be
sure to copy all files on all partitions that you
want to save before changing the partition
arrangement. The Rainbow MS-DOS Version 2.11
User's Guide explains how to copy files from the
hard disk.
Starting the Winchester Utility Program. To start the Winchester
Utility Program Version 2.0:

1. Turn on the Rainbow computer, if you haven't done so already.
2. Find the Winchester Utility Program Version 2.0 diskette contained in
this kit. Insert the diskette into drive A.
IMPORTANT
You should use the Winchester Utility Program
diskette contained in this kit, rather than any
other Winchester Utility Program diskette that
you may already have.
2-3

Setting Up the Hard Disk

3. In response to the Rainbow computer's Main System Menu, type:
A

The computer displays the Winchester Utility Program's Main Screen.

Rairb Hard Disk Utilits Progra. (Yl!rsion 2.0)
llain Sel'l!l!ll
-)

1. TI!st and ini tializl! till! hard disk

2. Re-parti tion till! hard disk
3. Show hard disk status

4. Run till! hard disk diagnostic

5. Rl!""initializl! till! hard disk
6. 51! il!Ct auto-tJoot partition

To point to a 51!il!Ction, PI'l!5S till! up ar1'Oll kl!9, down ar1'Oll kl!9
or a IIIIIIbI!r kl!9.
On iII1!I lilli!, pl'l!55 <HI!ip) for IIOre infomtion.
To bl!gin till! 51!il!Ctl!d action, pl'l!55 (10).
Ih!n finished lIith this progra., insert a S9stl!ll diskl!ttl! into DriYl! A
iIId pl'l!55 <Set~) folllllll!d II!! <CtrIlSet~).

Screen 2-1. Winchester Utility Program's Main Screen

Choosing the "Re-Partition" Option.
1. Press one of the following to select option 2:

• The up or down arrow keys until the arrow points to option 2
• The 2 key
2. Press:

2-4

Setting Up the Hard Disk

The computer displays the Operating System Menu shown in Screen 2-2.

Rairm. Hard Disk Utilits Progrilll (Version 2.0)
llperat ing !isstetl Itenu
Please select the operating ssstl!ll5 to be used lIith the hard disk:
-}

1. CP/II-II6/80 onlS

2. lIS-DOS onlS
3. Both CP111-86/80 and lIS-DOS

For lION infOl'lliltion, press <He 11').
To point to a selection, press the up arl'Dll kes, doun arl'Dll kes
or a IlUlber kes.
After pointing to a selection, press <Do) to advance to the next III!OO.
To -.uit alii return to the llain Screen, press <!lain Screen (F9)}.

Screen 2-2. Winchester Disk Utility Program Operating System Menu

Choosing Your Partition Arrangement.
1. To set aside an MS-DOS partition(s) you must select either option 2
or option 3 shown in Screen 2-2. Choose option 2 or option 3 depending on your plans for the hard disk as described below:

Option 2

Select this option if you plan to use ONLY the
MS-DOS operating system with the hard disk. If you
select this option, the computer displays the
MS-DOS Partition Menu, which asks you to select
the partition arrangement.

2-5

Setting Up the Hard Disk

Option 3

Select this option if you plan to use BOTH the
MS-DOS and CP/M-86/80 operating systems with the
hard disk. The available space is divided equally
between the two operating systems. If you select
this option, the computer displays two menus, which
ask you to select the number of partitions for each
operating system.

2. To select an option, press one of the following:
• The 2 key
• The 3 key
3. Press:

The computer displays the screen for the option you selected.

Choosing the Size Arrangement.
1. After you have chosen the partition arrangement, you must now select

the number of partitions from the menu.
2. To begin the re-partitioning process, press:

The computer displays the following warning twice:
WARNING: ALL DATA ON THE HARD DISK WILL BE DESTROYED

3. To continue, press:
( Resume)

The program displays:
Re-partitioning i5 in progre55.

2-6

Setting Up the Hard Disk

4. When the program is finished, it displays:
• A message that the partitioning is complete
• The new partition arrangement
5. To leave the Winchester Utility Program and return to the Rainbow
computer's Main System Menu, press:
~ (Ctrl/Set-up )

Preparing the MS-DOS Partition and
Copying the Operating System
Before you can use the partition with the operating system, you must first
prepare the partition and copy the operating system files onto the hard
disk. To do this, usethe FORMAT command. This command:
• Sets up the partition for the MS-DOS files that allow you to start the
operating system from the hard disk.
• Copies some files so you can start the operating system from the new
partition.
To prepare the MS-DOS partition and copy the operating system to it,
follow the steps below:
1. Insert the MS-DOS operating system diskette into drive A.
2. In response to the Rainbow computer's Main System Menu, press:
A

3. Enter the date and the time.

2-7

Setting Up the Hard Disk

4. When MS-DOS displays the A> prompt, type:
A>FORMAT E: IS ( Return )

When the FORMAT program is complete, the computer displays the
operating system prompt, A>.
5. To return to the Rainbow computer's Main System Menu, press:
~ ( CtrI/Set-Up )

What to Do Next
Now the partition is ready to use with the MS-DOS operating system. You
can now:
• Use the COPY command to copy the remainder of the MS-DOS programs to the hard disk partition. See the Rainbow MS-DOS Version
2.11 User's Guide for instructions on how to use the COPY command.
• Copy or install application files on the hard disk partition. To copy
files, see the COpy command in the Rainbow MS-DOS Version 2.11
User's Guide. To install an application on the hard disk partition, see
the appropriate manual for the application.
• Start the operating system from the hard disk by pressing a series of
keys, (manual start), if you have a Rainbow 100B or Rainbow 100+
computer. See Chapter 3 of this book.
• Set up the hard disk partition so you can automatically start the operating system from it, if you have a Rainbow 100B or Rainbow 100+
computer. See Chapter 3 of this book.

2-8

3
Starting MS-DOS From
the Hard Disk

You can start the MS-DOS operating system from the hard disk in several
ways. This chapter describes these ways and helps you decide which
method is best for you.
Before you can choose a method to start the operating system, you must
have:
1. Installed the hard disk according to the instructions in the Rainbow

Winchester Disk Option Installation Guide.

2. Tested the hard disk according to the instructions in the Rainbow
Winchester Disk Option Installation Guide.
3. Set aside at least one MS-DOS partition and copied the MS-DOS operating system to it according to the instructions in Chapter 2 of this
book.

3-1

Starting MS-DOS From the Hard Disk

Manual Start Versus Automatic Start
You can start the MS-DOS operating system from the hard disk either:
• Manually
• Automatically

Manually means that you have to select the drive and the partition every
time you start the operating system; that is, you must press a key to select
a drive and a hard disk partition.
Automatically means that you can set the computer to select the drive
and/or partition; that is, you do not have to press any keys.

NOTE
If the W option is not displayed on your Rainbow
computer's Main System Menu, you cannot start
the operating system from the hard disk. You can,
however, use the hard disk to store and work with
files.

Manually Starting MS-DOS from
the Hard Disk
You must first set up the computer to manually start the MS-DOS operating system from the hard disk. To do this:
1. With the Rainbow computer's Main System Menu displayed, enter the
Set-Up program by pressing:

The computer displays the main Set-Up screen.

3-2

Starting MS-DOS From the Hard Disk

2. Press:
( PreY Screen)

The computer displays Set-Up's "AUTO-BOOT" screen shown in
Screen 3-1.

NOTE
"AUTO-BOOT" is the name of the option that
allows you to choose a specific drive to start the
operating system from. If you choose a letter (A,
B, C, D, W), the computer goes to that drive
every time you turn on the computer. If you
choose? (question mark), the computer displays
the Rainbow Main System Menu when you turn
on the computer.

SET-UP
TO EXIT PRESS ·SET-Up·

PRESS ·HELp·
TO RESET TYPE <CTRL/SET-UP>
OS.OlA
6-401(

IlII
auIO:BIIIII
tDRIVE

Screen 3-1. AUTO-BOOT Set-Up Screen

3-3

Starting MS-DOS From the Hard Disk

3. Press the up arrow key until the computer displays:
?=DRIVE

NOTE
If the computer already displays the ?, you can
skip step 4.
4. To save the change you have made to the Set-Up program, press:

5. To leave the Set-Up program, press:

The computer displays the Rainbow computer's Main System Menu.
The next time you use the Rainbow computer, you can start the MS-DOS
operating system manually from the hard disk. (That is, you must type keys
on the keyboard to indicate the drive and partition.)

3-4

Starting MS-DOS From the Hard Disk
Turn on the
Rainbow computer.

Press the W key
to select the
Winchester drive.

=.IILM
Rainbow 100
PrtssA,I,C,I,II,SOI'T

A" start hlti'l!A
B"start ". ...i_ I
C" sliM t,.lrivtC
t"st.t "..,i", I
lI"silrt ",.,i_1I
S=l!IKIteStlfTat

l· . . . TIIIinII ....

+
...
,. ...,
,. ....,
....,
.. ....,
Pattition

Drive

""'........,

Press the number
of the partition that
you want to start
the operating system frotTI.

O'/IHIIIO
0'1IHII8I

.....

IHIS

""'keI
ar ....... "'tapaint to
I 5tlledilll, u.."..
to nai " . ttl! .IICW ,..titillll.
~tIIt ........ _.

(II)

.......... lItital _ _.....

The MS-DOS operating
system is ready to use .

IIiCNIIft .... VIII'5iIIIMI

flnri... 'I11.....,m..........

c:.n,,2.ll
Carrefttlil\eisSRIHI-IE

BIter_lIIte:1

Figure 3-1.' Manually Starting the Operating System from the Hard Disk

3-5

Starting MS-DOS From the Hard Disk

To do this:
1. Turn on the computer, and press W when you see the Rainbow

computer's Main System Menu.
The computer displays a screen with choices of partitions. The choices
depend on the partition arrangement you have selected. Screen 3-2
displays an example of a screen with choices of partitions.

Rainbal Hard Disk Start-llp _
The hard disk is installed lIith the 'olllllling pariitilllS.

Please select a partitilll '1'01 which to start the S9stl!ll.
PartitiOl!
Mille

Drive

Operating
Ssstl!ll

CPII-l

CP111-86/80

IISDOS-l

lIS-DOS

1ISDIIS-2

lIS-DOS

Press the up arrIJII kes, doIIn arrIJII kes or a IMUIber kes to point to
a selectilll, then press <Do> to start fI'DI the selected partitilll.

Screen 3-2. A Partition Arrangement

2. Select the MS-DOS partition that you prepared in the previous section
by pressing the up or down arrow keys until the arrow points to the
partition. Then press:

The computer then starts the MS-DOS operating system.
3-6

Starting MS-DOS From the Hard Disk

Automatically Starting MS-DOS
from the Hard Disk
When you automatically start the operating system from the hard disk, you
can choose the drive, the partition, or neither. There are three different
ways to automatically start the operating system from the hard disk. You
can:
1. Turn on the computer and the computer automatically starts the oper-

ating system. This means that you do not have to press any keys.
Turn on the
Rainbow computer.

~iCl'1l5ltft 115-1115 ¥mill! 2.11
Ca,Jrif\'t 1!IBU2.8JIti~l'OSOftem,.,

The MS-DOS
operating system
is ready to use.

ec-nv.2.11
CumntditeisSitIHt-19B'3
Entrl'lI!IIdite:t

Figure 3-2. The Computer Chooses the Drive and the Partition

Select this way if you always want to start one operating system from
one partition on the hard disk. With this way, every time you turn on
the computer, the operating system starts from a specific partition on
the hard disk.

3-7

Starting MS-DOS From the Hard Disk

2. Turn on the computer, select W for the hard disk and then the computer automatically starts the operating system. This means that you
only have to press the W key when you see the Rainbow computer's
Main System Menu. You do not have to press a key to select a
partition.
Turn on
the Rainbow computer.

+
Rainbow 100

Press the W
key to select
the Winchester drive.

YmiIl105.0JA
Clftri!hl (f) lifibl E.i,.m Carpafltian 19BJ
1\IIIIithtslltseMrd

f'1oesi\,I,C,I,II,SorT
A=startfrcalriveA
a: start rn. Drift I
C=.. tift fl'llllrivw C
t=stil'th'lltlriftl
II" s\a1 h'IIIlri .... 1I
S=.m.StIfTlSt
1 " tilt!!' Tninll ,..

Clfttiflt n•• li,ital [.~ c:or,.riti..
"i~tllHllS'l!fSi.. 2.11

Ctftritld 18I1,82.Ullim:l5Df'tCarp.

The MS-DOS
operating system
is ready to use.

CIIN'III¥.2.11

Cmtnt dnr is Sit IHHHl
.,Enter-new Rt,: t

Figure 3-3. You Only Choose the Drive

3-8

Starting MS-DOS From the Hard Disk

Select this way if you always want to start the operating system from
a specific partition when you start from the hard disk. This way allows
you to choose a drive to start the operating system from. Every time
you choose drive W, the operating system starts from a specified
partition.
3. Turn on the computer and the computer automatically selects W for
the hard disk. You select a hard disk partition and then the operating
system starts. This means that you only have to press the key to
specify the partition and the Do key.
Turn on
the Rainbow computer.

+
Thfltm4lisk is installed lUll thr rollllli" jlil'tltians.

PIN5f select i ,.nIhil! ,,. IItlell to st.-t thr SIS'''-

...

P..rtitiOll

Il!orr~i~

Driw

~st'"

Press the number
of the partition that
you want to start the
operating system from.

---)

CfII-I

~/lI-"'"

CfII-I

CPIII-llli,.

'••0 ...

IIS-OIS

IISIOS-I

IIS-. .

,ms <Ia> to

!'ressttll!'''''''IIII~,_;P"l'OIIkf!ora~k"t\lpointto

a selKtilll, the!

shri t,. thr selKbd ,mitiOll.

Clftri~l.litilll[,.ifMltClr,.afnilll

lIicrosoftllS-JUSWI'5iG'll,1I
eo"rlf\tI!l8I.8UJlliC'l'GSOftCatp,

The MS-DOS operating
system is ready to
use.

CQIIMIIIv.2.U
CuM'tlltditeisSltIHI-ISIlJ
W",neudit,:1

Figure 3-4. You Only Choose the Partition

3-9

Starting MS-DOS From the Hard Disk

Select this way if you always want to start the operating system from
the hard disk, but not from one specific partition. With this way, the
computer automatically chooses drive W. You can then choose which
partition to start the operating system from.

The Computer Chooses the Drive and
the Partition
To set up the computer so you only have to turn on the Rainbow computer
and your operating system automatically starts without pressing any keys:
1. Locate the Rainbow Winchester Utility Program Version 2.0 diskette
that comes in this kit. Insert this diskette into drive A.

2. From the Rainbow computer's Main System Menu that is displayed,
press:
A

Screen 3-3 shows the Winchester Utility Program's Main Screen.

3-10

Starting MS-DOS From the Hard Disk

lIainbow Hard Disk Utilit9 Progrilll (VersiDII 2.0)
"ain Screen

--:::.

1. Test and initial iZI! the hard disk

2. RI!-parti tion the hard dis~.
3. Show hard disk status

4. Run the hard disk diagnostic

5. Re-initializl! the hard disk
6. Select auto-boot partitiDII
To point to a selectiDII, press the up arrow k.1!9, doIIn arrow k.1!9
or a I1UIIber k.1!9.
On iIII!I line, press <Help> for lIOn! infol'lliltiDII.
To begin the selected actiDII, press <Do>.
IIII!n finished lIith this pl'lJ!ll'iIII, insert a S9stl!ll diskl!ttl! into Drive A
and press (Set-lf> follDlll!d 119 {Ctr IISet-lf>.

Screen 3-3. Winchester Utility Program's Main Screen

3. From the Winchester Utility Program's Main Screen, choose Option
6: Select auto-boot partition by pressing one of the following:
• The down arrow key
• The 6 key
4. Press:

3-11

Starting MS~DOS From the Hard Disk
5~

You must then choose the partition from which you want the operating
system to start the next time you turn on the computer. The choices
depend on the partition arrangement you have selected.
Choose the partition by:
• Pointing to it with the up or down arrow key
• Pressing the Do key
After you make a selection, the asterisk (*) moves to that selection.

6. 'Press:
~ (Ctrl/Set-Up )

The computer displays the Rainbow computer's Main System Menu.
7. When you see the Main System Menu, press:

8. Press:
( Prev ScfMII )

The computer displays Set~Up's "AUTO~BOOT" screen shown in
Screen 3~4.

3-12

Starting MS-DOS From the Hard Disk

SET-UP

TO EXIT PRESS "SET-UPPRESS -HELP"
TO RESET TYPE <CTRL/SET-UP>

05.0311
640K

Screen 3-4. AUTO-BOOT Set-Up Screen

9. Press the up arrow key until the computer displays:
W=DRIVE

NOTE
If the computer already displays the W, you can

skip Step 10.
10. To save the change you have made to the Set-Up program, press:

11. To leave the Set-Up program, press:

The computer displays the Rainbow computer's Main System Menu.
3-13

Starting MS-DOS From the Hard Disk

The next time you turn on the computer, the operating system
automatically starts from the specified partition on the hard disk. You do
not have to press any keys.

You Only Choose the Drive
To set up the computer so you only have to turn on the computer and
choose the drive to automatically start the operating system:
1. Locate the Rainbow Winchester Utility Program Version 2.0 diskette
that comes in this kit. Insert this diskette into drive A.

2. From the Rainbow computer's Main System Menu that is displayed,
press:
A

Screen 3-5 shows the Winchester Utility Program's Main Screen.

Rai_ liard Disk Dtilit9 I'ro!frill (Version 2.0)
llain Screen
-}

1. Tl!5t iIId "initialize till! hard disk
2. Re-partition till! hard disk
3. Sholl hard disk status
4. Run till! hard disk diagnostic

5. Im-initialize till! hard disk
6. Select autrioot partition

To point to a selection, press till! up arl'Dll kes, _

arl'Dll kes

or a IUIber kes.
1m iIII!I line, press <Help> for IIIII't! infol'lliltion.
To beSin till! selected action, press <10>.
!lien finished lIitli this f'I'IISI'iII, insert a S9sta diskette into Drive A
.. press <Set-u,> foill•• lis <ctrllSet~>.

Screen 3-5. Winchester Utility Program's Main Screen
3-14

Starting MS-DOS From the Hard Disk

3. From the Winchester Utility Program's Main Screen, choose Option
6: Select auto-boot partition by pressing one of the following:
• The down arrow key six times until the arrow points to option 6
• The 6 key
4. Press:

5. You must then choose the partition from which you want the operating
system to start the next time you turn on the computer. The choices
depend on the partition arrangement you have selected.
Choose the partition by:
• Pointing to it with the up or down arrow key
• Pressing the Do key
After you make a selection, the asterisk (*) moves to that selection.
6. Press:
~ ( Ctrl/Set·Up )

The computer displays the Raintow computer's Main System Menu.
The next time you turn on the computer you need only select drive W
when you see the Rainbow computer's Main System Menu. The computer
then automatically starts the operating system from the partition you
selected in the above instructions.

3-15

Starting MS-DOS From the Hard Disk

You Only Choose the Partition
To set up the computer so you only have to turn on the computer and
choose the hard disk partition to automatically start the operating system:
1. With the Rainbow computer's Main System Menu displayed on the

screen, press:

2. Press:
( Prey Screen)

The computer displays Set-Up's "AUre-BOOT" screen shown in
screen 3-6.

3-16

Starting MS-DOS From the Hard Disk

SET-UP
TO EXIT PRESS ·SET-UP·
PRESS "HELp·
TO RESET TYpE <CTRL/SET-UP>

05.03A
J8.4K

i\lIIl1::.BOOI
tDRIVE

Screen 3-6. AUTO-BOOT Set-Up Screen

3. Press the up arrow key until the computer displays:
W=DRIVE

NOTE
If the computer already displays the W, you can
skip Step 4.

4. To save the change you have made to the Set-Up program, press:

5. To leave the Set-up program and return to the Rainbow computer's
Main System Menu, press:

3-17

Starting MS-DOS From the Hard Disk

The next time you turn on the computer, it automatically displays the hard
disk partitions. You can then select a hard disk partition from which to start
the operating system.

3-18

4
Correcting Winchester Disk
Problems

This chapter describes problems you might encounter while using the
Winchester Disk Utility Program. The first part of the chapter lists the
Winchester Disk messages in alphabetic order. The second part of the chapter discusses option 4 and option 5 of the Winchester Utility Program. You
can use these options to correct some Winchester Disk problems.

Winchester Disk Messages
When you are using the Winchester Utility Program, problems can arise
while you are initializing, testing, or setting the auto-boot partition.
If a problem arises, the Winchester Utility Program can display any of the
following messages:
ERROR IN PARTITION dry:
Initialization data could not be written.

The operating system requires certain data to be written to the first two
sectors of the partition. This message can occur if some of that data could
not be written for any reason. The specified partition is unusable.
4-1

Correcting Winchester Disk Problems

Press the Resume key to advance to other partitions; others are still
usable.
To make the partition usable again, you must return to the Winchester
Utility Program's Main Screen and select option 4 to run the hard disk
diagnostic. The diagnostic is a test that checks for problems. If a bad sector
(portion of the hard disk) is found, the program displays the following message when the test is complete:
n HEW BAD SECTORS DETECTED
SELECT THE RE-IHITIALIZE OPTIOH

You should copy the files on ALL hard disk partitions to back-up diskettes,
if you haven't already. Then use the Winchester Utility Program option 5
to re-initialize the hard disk. After the hard disk is re-initialized, you can repartition and restore the files to the hard disk. You should then be able to
use the partition that contained the bad sector again.
ERROR IN PARTITION dry:

Insufficient number of alternate sectors.

This message can occur while running the Winchester Utility Program if
there were not enough alternate sectors available to assign to the bad
sectors within the partition. The specified partition is unusable.
Press the Resume key to advance to other partitions; others are still
usable.
If you have three or less partitions on the hard disk, you can re-partition to
try to make the bad sectors of the hard disk occupy a smaller partition. For
example, if you have two MS-DOS partitions, one of which displays this
message, you can try to re-partition the hard disk into four MS-DOS partitions. The bad sector may only ruin one of the four partitions and you can
use the three remaining partitions.

4-2

Correcting Winchester Disk Problems
ERROR IN PARTITION dry:
Directory area could not be Initialized.

The directory area on the partition could not be initialized with the data
required by the MS-DOS operating system. The specified partition is
unusable.
Press the Resume key to advance to other partitions; others are still
usable.
To make the partition usable again, you must return to the Winchester
Utility Program's Main Screen and select option 4 to run the hard disk
diagnostic. The diagnostic is a test that checks for problems. If a bad sector
(portion of the hard disk) is found, the program displays the following message when the test is complete:
n NEW BAD SECTORS DETECTED
SELECT THE RE-INITIALIZE OPTION

You should copy the files on ALL hard disk partitions to back-up diskettes,
if you haven't already. Then use the Winchester Utility Program option 5
to re-initialize the hard disk. Mter the hard disk is re-initialized, you can repartition and restore the files to the hard disk. You should then be able to
use the partition that contained the bad sector again.
FATAL ERROR
Hard disk does not respond.

This message can occur if the hard disk did not indicate that it had completed a procedure.
Return to the Winchester Utility Program's Main Screen and run option 4,
the diagnostic test to obtain more information about the failure.
FATAL ERROR
Hardware failure detected during testing.

This message can occur during the initialization procedure of your hard disk
when either the disk controller board or the drive is faulty.

4-3

Correcting Winchester Disk Problems'

Refer to the Rainbow Winchester Disk Option Installation Guide for more
information about installing the hard disk.
Return to the Winchester Utility Program's Main ~creen and run option 4,
the hard disk diagnostic to obtain more information about the failure.
FATAL ERROR
Initialization data could not be read back from hard disk.

This message can occur while using the hard disk if the utility program
cannot read back some of the data that it previously wrote onto the hard
disk.
Return to the Winchester Utility Program's Main Screen and run option 4,
the hard disk diagnostic to obtain more information about the failure.
FATAL ERROR
Initialization data could not be written on hard disk.

This message can occur while using the hard disk if the utility program was
not able to write some of the data that the operating system needs to read
at a later time.
Return to the Winchester Utility Program's Main Screen and run option 4,
the hard disk diagnostic to obtain more information about the failure.
FATAL ERROR
No hard disk diagnostic program.

This message can occur when the file DEX16UTL.CMD is not found on the
Winchester Utility Program diskette provided with the hard disk.
Make a new copy of the Winchester Utility Program diskette from the
master copy.
FATAL ERROR
No pre-boot program.

This message is rare, but can occur if the file containing the pre-boot
program could not be found on the utility diskette.

4-4

Correcting Winchester Disk Problems

Make a new copy of the Winchester Utility Program diskette from the
master copy.
FATAL ERROR

No secondary boot program.

This message is rare, but can occur if the file containing the secondary
boot program could not be found on the utility diskette.
Make a new copy of the Winchester Utility Program diskette from the
master copy.
FATAL ERROR

Programming error occurred.

This message is very rare but can occur if the Winchester Utility Program
detects a problem with the program code.
If this message is displayed, report the problem to the DIGITAL Help Line.
For the phone number of the office nearest you, look on the bottom of your
keyboard or refer to Appendix A of this guide.
FATAL ERROR

Secondary boot program is too big.

This message is rare, but can occur if the secondary boot program does not
fit into the allocated space on the hard disk. This can only occur if the file
was somehow overwritten or changed.
Make a new copy of the Winchester Utility Program diskette from the
master copy.
Hard disk option is not connected.

This message can occur if the Winchester Utility Program did not find the
hard disk controller board.
Refer to the Rainbow Winchester Disk Option Installation Guide for more
information about the hard disk controller board.
Recheck the connections of the controller board and try the procedure
agam.
4-5

Correcting Winchester Disk Problems

Solving Winchester Disk Problems
The Winchester Utility Program has two options that you can use when you
encounter some of the messages described earlier in this chapter. The
options are:
• Option 4. Run the hard disk diagnostic
• Option 5. Re-initialize the hard disk

NOTE
See the description of the message in the preceding section to determine if you can use these
options with the message displayed on your
screen.
These options are explained in the following sections.

Option 4: Run the hard disk diagnostic
The hard disk diagnostic is a program that "tests" your hard disk to see if
it has any problems.
You should use the hard disk diagnostic (option 4) if you encounter
problems while:
• Initializing the hard disk
• Partitioning the hard disk
• Setting the auto-boot partition
To use the hard disk diagnostics:
1. Find the Winchester Utility Program Version 2.0 diskette in this kit.

Insert this diskette into drive A.
2. Turn on the Rainbow computer. From the Main System Menu, type:
A

Screen 4-1 displays the Winchester Utility Program's Main Screen.
4-6

Correcting Winchestef' Disk Problems

Rairilow Hard Disk utilits Progrilll (Vl!rSion 2.0)
"ain Screen
-)

1. Test and initialize the hard disk
2. Re-parti tion the hard disK

3. Sholl hard disk status
4. Run the hard disk diagnostic

5. Re-initialize the hard disk
6. Select auto-boot partition

To point to a selection, press the up iII'l'OII kt!!l, duIIn arl'llll kt!!l
or a IIWIber kt!!l.
IkI iIII!I line, press <Help) for IIOre infOl'lliltion.
To beSin the selected action, press <Do>.
IIten finished lIith this profI'iIII, insert a §!steII diskette into Drive A
and press <Set~) follOlied lI!I <CtrIlSet~).

Screen 4-1. Winchester Utility Program's Main Screen

3. Choose option 4, run the hard disk diagnostic by pressing one of the
following:
• The down arrow key four times until the arrow points to option 4
• The 4 key
4. Then press:

Option 4 displays detailed messages as it runs eight subtests. As each
subtest runs, the program displays either:
PASSED

or
FAILED

4-7

Correcting Winchester Disk Problems

5. If the hard disk diagnostic finishes, Screen 4-2 displays:

Rainbou Hard Disk utilits Progrill (Yl!l'Silll 2.0)
\WID DISK IPTI!It DIAGIIISTIC

REV 2.1

PASS QOOO
SUBTEST 17:

SUBTEST 18:
IH

READ All SECTORS
illITE SECTORS TEST
IIflIED SEEK(IIIITE)
BASIC illITE TEST 1
BASIC illITE TEST 2
BASIC illITE TEST 3
illITE FIllllAT TESTS

DIAGIIISTIC CIIfl.£TE

PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED

PRESS <JIE11IIN) TO II£IlIIN TO ItAIN IIJII

Screen 4-2. End of a Successful Diagnostic Test

The bottom of the screen could also display:
n HEW BAD SECTORS DETECTED
SELECT THE RE-IHITIALIZE OPTIOH

If the bottom of the screen displays this message, you should press
the Return key to return to the Winchester Utility Program's Main
Screen. You should copy the files on ALL hard disk partitions to backup diskettes, if you haven't already. Then, use the Winchester Utility
Program option 5 to re-initialize the hard disk.
If the bottom of the screen does not display this message, you can use
your hard disk. To leave the hard disk diagnostics, press the Return
key. Then press:
~ ( CtrllSet-Up )

4-8

Correcting Winchester Disk Problems

6. If the hard disk diagnostic does not finish, the hard disk has failed a
subtest. If the hard disk fails a subtest, you should report the problem
to the DIGITAL Help Line. For the phone number of the office
nearest you, look at the bottom of your keyboard or refer to Appendix
A of this guide.

Option 5: Re-initialize the hard disk
You should re-initialize the hard disk (option 5) if the hard disk diagnostic
found new bad sectors. Re-initializing the hard disk is like starting again
with a new disk. If any information is currently stored on the disk, it will be
erased.
To re-initialize the hard disk, follow the steps below to start the Winchester
Utility Program, if you haven't already.
1. Find the Winchester Utility Program Version 2.0 diskette in this kit.

Insert this diskette into drive A.
2. Turn on the Rainbow computer. From the Rainbow computer's Main
System Menu, press:
A

Screen 4-3 displays the Winchester Utility Program's Main Screen.

4-9

Correcting Winchester Disk Problems

Rai. Hard Disk Utilit9 Progr_ (Version 2.0)
llain Screen
-)

1. Test and ini tia lize the hard disk

2. Re-parti hon the hard disk
3. Show hard disk status

4- Run the hard disk diagnostic

5. Re-initialize the hard disk
6. Se lect auto-boot parti hon
To point to a selection, press the up ar1'Oll Ill!!, doIIn ar1'Oll Ill!!
or a nuber Ill!!.
1m iIII!I line, press <Help> for IIOI't! infol'llation.
TD begin the selected action, press <110>.
Ih!n finished with this progr_, insert a S9sta diskette .into Drive A
and press (Set,"",> follOiled II!! (CtrIlSet'""'>.

Screen 4-3. Winchester Utility Program's Main Screen

3. Choose option 5, re-initialize the ha,rd disk, by pressing one of the
following:
• The up or down arrow key until the arrow points to option 5
• The 5 key
4. Then, press:

The program displays two messages to warn you that all data on the
hard disk will be destroyed.

4-10

Correcting Winchester Disk Problems

5. To start the re-initialize procedure, press:

Screen 4-4 is displayed when the re-initialization is complete.

Rai_ Hard Disk utilit9 Progrilll (Version 2.0)

Re-initialization is COIIpleted.
The hard disk is re-initialized with the follOliing partitions:

Partition
NiIIII!

DriYl!

CPft-l
CPft-2

Operating
Ssstl!ll

Size

CP111-86/80
CP111-86/80

4.89IIIIlI
4.89IIIIlI

To peri'Dl'II additional actions, press <!lain Scl'l!l!ll (F9l> to
retum to the llain Scl'l!l!ll.
If finished with this prog!'iIII, insert a 59stl!ll diskette into DriYl! A
and press <Set'""> follOlll!d II! {Ctr l/Set'"">.

Screen 4-4. Complete Initialization Procedure

The hard disk is now set up with two CP/M-86/80 partitions. If you
want to change the partition arrangement, see Chapter 5 of this guide.
Otherwise, you can start using the hard disk.

4-11

5
The Hard Disk Arrangement

This chapter tells you how to change the arrangement of your hard disk,
(called re-partitioning). You may want to do this at a later time, when
another partition arrangement may better fit your needs. For example, if
you have only one operating system on your hard disk and you want to add
another, you must re-partition the hard disk.

Changing the Partition
Arrangement on the Hard Disk
To change the arrangement (or re-partition) the hard disk:
1. Turn on the Rainbow computer.
CAUTION

Changing the partition arrangement destroys any
existing data on the hard disk. Therefore, if you
have files stored on the disk, be sure to copy all
files on all partitions that you want to save to a
back-up diskette save before making a change.
5-1

The Hard Disk Arrangement

2. Find the Winchester Utility Program Version 2.0 diskette in this kit.
Insert the diskette into drive A.
3. When you see the Rainbow computer's Main System Menu, type:
A

The Winchester Utility Program's Main Screen is then displayed. (See
Screen 5-1.)

Rainboll Hard Disk utilits Progrilll (Version 2.0)
Main Screen
--}

1. Test and initialize the hard disk

2. Rel'art it ion the hard disk
3. ShOll hard disk status

4. Run the hard disk diagnostic
5. Re-initialize the hard disk
6. Select auto-boot partition

To point to a selection, press the up ar1'llll kes, down ar1'llll kes
or a OOIIber kes.
lin ans lilli!, press <Help> for IIOl'I! infol'llition.
To begin the selected action, press <110>,
Ih!n finished lIith this progrilll, insert a ssstl!ll diskette into DriYl! II
and press <Set~> follOlled bs {Ctrl/Set~>,

Screen 5-1. Winchester Utility Program's Main Screen

The Hard Disk Arrangement

NOTE
If you are not sure what your current hard disk
partition arrangement is, you can select Option 3:
Show hard disk status. Then return to the
Winchester Utility Program's Main Screen.

4. Choose Option 2: Re-partition the hard disk, by pressing one of the
following:
• The up or down arrow key until the arrow points to option 2
• The number 2
5. Press:

Mter you choose option 2, you are given a choice of which operating
system(s) you want to use. (See Screen 5-2.)

NOTE
This example will divide the space on the hard
disk equally between the MS-DOS operating
system and the CP/M-86/80 operating system.

5-3

The Hard Disk Arrangement

Rainbow Hard Disk utilits Progral (Version 2.0)
Operatill!J Ssstl!l IIenu
Please sl!lect the IIflI!ratill!J S9stl!lS to be U5I!d with the hard disk:
-)

1. CP11I-1IG/80 onl9

2. lIS-DOS onlS
3. Both CP1II-1IG/80 and lIS-DOS

For 1IOr!! infol'llation, press <Help>.
To point to a selection, press the up arl'llll kl!9, doIIn arl'llll kl!9
Dr a ruber kl!9.
After pointill!J to a selectioo, press <Do> to advanc:e to the next II!I\U.
To .,ut ifId return to the !lain Scl'l!l!ll, press <Itain 5cI'I!I!II (FS».

Screen 5-2. Operating System Menu

6. To choose the CP/M-86/80 operating system and the MS-DOS
operating system, press one of the following:
• The down arrow key three times until the arrow points to option 3
• The 3 key
7. Then, press:

The computer displays the CP/M-86/80 and MS-DOS Partition Menu.
(See Screen 5-3.)

5-4

The Hard Disk Arrangement

Rainbow Hard Disk utilitS Progrill (Yersillll 2.0)
CP111-86/80 & lIS-DOS Parti t illll m (Part 1)
Please select one of tIM! follOliing partitillll plans for tIM!
CP/II-a6/80 half of tIM! hard disk:
---)

1. One partition: 5 IIIIstes,

2. TWD partitions: 2.5 IIIIstes each

For IIOre int'ol'tlatillll, press <Help).
To point to a selectillll, press tIM! up arrOll kl!!l, diM! arrOll kl!!l
or a IKJIIber kl!!l.
After pointing to a selectillll, press <Do) to advilllCl! to tIM! III!xt III!III.
To '!'lit and retum to tIM! pmious III!III, press <Pl't!Y Screen).
To '!'lit and retum to tIM! llain Screen, press <!lain Screen (F9».

Screen 5-3. CPjM-86j80 & MS-DOS Partition Menu (Part 1)

NOTE
If you have a disk with five megabytes instead of
ten, the partition sizes shown on the screen are
different.

To choose the arrangement for the CP/M-B6jBO operating system,
press one of the following:
• The down arrow key
• The 1 or 2 key

B. Then press:

The second partition menu is then displayed. (See Screen 5-4.)

5-5

The Hard Disk Arrangement

Rainboll Hard Disk utilit9 Progrilll (Version 2.0)
CP!II-86/80 & lIS-DOS Partition IIt!nu (Part 2)

Plea5l! Sl!lect DIll! of thl! follOliing partition plillS for thl!
lIS-DOS ha If of thl! hard disk:
-)

1. One partition: 5 IIB!ttes,
2. Two partitions: 2.5 IIB!ttes each

For IIOre inforwation, press <HI!lp).
To point to a Sl!lection, press thl! up arrow ~1!9, dOIIn arrow ~1!9
or a IlUllber kl!9.
Mter pointing to a Sl!lection, press <Do) to begin re-partitioning.
To ",it and return to thl! pl'l!Yious III!IIII, press <Prev SCI'l!l!ll>.
To ~t and return to thl! llain Scrt!t!n, press <JIain Screen (F9l>.

Screen 5-4. CP/M-86/80 & MS-DOS Partition Menu (Part 2)

To choose the arrangement for the MS-DOS operating system, press
one of the following:
• The down arrow key
• The 1 or 2 key
9. Then, press:

10. After you press the Do key, two messages are displayed:
WARNING: ALL DATA ON THE HARD DISK WILL BE DESTROYED

5-6

The Hard Disk Arrangement

11. To begin the re-partitioning procedure, press:
(Resume)

The program displays:
Re-partitioning is in progress

12. When the program is finished, it displays:
• A message that the partitioning is complete
• The new partition arrangement
See screen 5-5.

RUlllllIIird lisk Dtiliq I'rafraI (Versitll 2.0)

lle-partitilllinf is Cllllpleted.
Thehird disk I11III has the folllllinf piriitions:

Partnilll
he

Drive

Size

CPII-l
II!iIOS-l
1I!iIOS-2

E
E
F

4.8911
2.44911
2.44911

To perf'onI additional aclilllS, press <JIain Screen (F9) to
return to the !lain Screen.
If finished lith this ,...., insert a . . disUtte into Irive A
iIIIII press <SIt,"",) foU_ II! <CtrIJSR~.

Screen 5-5. Re-partitioned Disk Status

5-7

The Hard Disk Arrangement

NOTE
If you have a disk with five megabytes instead of
ten, the partition sizes shown on the screen are
different.
13. To leave the Winchester Utility Program, press:
~ (C1rI!Set-Up )

The computer displays the Rainbow computer's Main System Menu.

5-8

A
Getting Help

Help Line Phone Numbers
country

Phone Number

U.S.A.
Canada
United Kingdom
Belgium
West Germany
Italy
Japan
Denmark
Spain
Finland
Holland
Switzerland
Sweden
Norway
France
Austria
Australia
Sydney
All other areas

(800) DEC-8000
(800) 267-5251
(0256) 59 200
(02)-24 26 790
(089) 95 91 66 44
(02)-617 53 81 or 617 5382
(0424) 64-3302
(04)-30 10 05
(1)-73 34 307
(90)-42 33 32
(1820)-31 100
«()1)~810 51 21
(08)-98 88 35
(02)-25 64 22
(1)-687 31 52
(222)-67 76 41 extension 444
(02) 412-5555
(008)226377

A- 1

Index

Application files
copying to the hard disk 2-8
AUTO-BOOT 3-3, 3-12, 3-16

Byte 1-1

Diagnostics for Winchester disk 4-6
Disk
hard 1-1
Diskette
hard disk utility 3-3, 5-2
Winchester disk utility 3-3
Winchester Utility 2-4

Copying
applications to the hard disk 2-8
Copying MS-DOS to the hard disk 2-7

Error messages 4-1

F
FORMAT 2-7

1-1

Index

Hard disk
(Winchester disk) 1-1
automatically starting MS-DOS 3-2
changing the partitions 5-1
choice of operating systems 2-4, 5-3
copying MS-DOS to it 2-7
CP/M-86/80 partition menu 5-5
how to re-initialize 4-9
installation 1-2
manually starting MS-DOS 3-2
messages 4-1
MS-DOS partition menu 5-6
partitions 2-2
starting MS-DOS from 3-1
storage capacity 1-1
uses 1-3
using with MS-DOS 2-1
utility diskette 2-4, 3-3, 5-2
utility program Main Screen 2-4, 3-3
Hard disk diagnostics 4-6
Hard disk utility Main Screen 3-11

Re-initialize the hard disk 4-9

M
Megabyte 1-1
Messages
for the winchester disk 4-1
MS-DOS
creating a partition for 2-3
starting from the hard disk 3-1
using with your hard disk 2-1

p
Partition
arrangements 2-2
changing arrangement 5-1
creating an MS-DOS partition 2-3
hard disk 2-2

1-2

5
Set-Up program
AUTO-BOOT 3-3, 3-12, 3-16
Starting MS-DOS from the hard disk
automatically 3-7, 3-9 to 3-10
manually 3-2, 3-5

w
Winchester disk 1-1
automatically starting MS-DOS 3-2,
3-7
changing the partitions 5-1
choice of operating systems 2-4, 5-3
copying MS-DOS to it 2-7
CP/M-86/80 partition menu 5-5
how to re-initialize 4-9
manually starting MS-DOS 3-2
messages 4-1
MS-DOS partition menu 5-6
starting MS-DOS from 3-1
utility diskette 2-4, 3-3, 5-2
utility program Main Screen 2-4, 3-3
Winchester disk diagnostics 4-6
Winchester utility Main Screen 3-11
Winchester Utility Program 2-3
option 25-3
option 35-3
option 4 4-6
option 5 4-9
option 6 3-11, 3-15

Rainbow™

MSTM-DOS
Version 2.11
Using the Hard Disk

AA-EAOSA-XV
READER'S COMMENTS

Did you find this manual understandable, usable, and well-organized? Please
make suggestions for improvement.

Did you find errors in this manual? If so, specify the error and the page number.

Please indicate the type of reader that you most nearly represent.

o First-time computer user

o Experienced computer user

o Application package user
o Programmer
o Other (please specify)I_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Name'_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Dme~

__________________________

Organization_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Streetl-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
City_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
5tate,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Zip Code
orCount~-------------------------

I
I
I

It, g~;'gTea'g- F~.ld"a-'OO T.~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~

ffl-Ill --------;;;;--

I
I

-!I:

if Mailed in the
United States

I
I

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 33 MAYNARD MASS.
POSTAGE WILL BI; PAID BY ADDRESSEE

SOFTWARE PUBLICATIONS

200 FOREST STREET MR01-2/L 12
MARLBOROUGH, MA01752

---- Do Not Tear - Fold "ere and Tape --------------------------------------------

AA-EA07A-XV

MSTM_DOS
Version 2.11
User's Guide

digital equipment corporation

First Printing, October 1984

Portions of this document are reproduced with the permission of Microsoft Corporation.
© Microsoft Corporation 1982. All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should
not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital
Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may
appear in this document.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license and may
only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such license.
No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on equipment
that is not supplied by DIGITAL or its affiliated companies.
MS'"-DOS is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
CP/M is a registered trademark of Digital Research Inc. CP/M-80 and CP/M-86
are trademarks of Digital Research Inc.
8088'" is a trademark of Intel Corporation.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

~D~DD~D'M
DEC
DECmate
DECsystem-10
DECSYSTEM-20
DECUS
DECwriter
DIBOL

GIGI
MASSBUS
PDP
P/OS
Professional
Rainbow
RSTS

RSX
UNIBUS
VAX
VMS
VT
Work Processor

The postage-prepaid READER'S COMMENTS form on the last page of this
document requests the user's critical evaluation to assist us in preparing future
documentation.

Printed in U.S.A.

Contents

Preface

Welcome to MS-DOS ix
Intended Reader x
Guide Organization x
Conventions Used xi
Additional Information xii

Chapter 1. Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System
Hands-On Experience 1-2
Starting the Operating System from a Diskette Drive
Entering Instructions 1-3
Correcting Spelling and Typing Mistakes 1-10
Checking the Diskette in Drive A 1-14
Creating and Printing a Memo 1-15
Copying a Memo to Another diskette 1-21
Working with the Diskette in Drive B 1-24
What To Do in Case of Trouble 1-28

1-1

1-2

iii

Contents

Chapter 2. Using MS-DOS Files and Commands
Section 1 - Using Commands, Files, and Directories
Commands 2-2
Files 2-3
Wildcards 2-6
Directories 2-7

2-2

Section 2 - MS-DOS Operating System Commands
Advanced Commands 2-10
Mini-Exchange Commands 2-11
Information Common to All Commands 2-12
Conventions Used 2-13
Command Formats 2-14
BACKUP 2-15
CHKDSK 2-49
CLS 2-50
COPY 2-51
DATE 2-56
DEL (DELETE) 2-58
DIR (DIRECTORY) 2-59
DISKCOPY 2-61
ERASE 2-63
FORMAT 2-64
MDRIVE 2-65
PRINT 2-68
RDCPM 2-70
REN (RENAME) 2-73
SET 2-74
SETPORT 2-76
SYS (SYSTEM) 2-81
TIME 2-83
TYPE 2-84
VER 2-85
VERIFY 2-86
VOL (VOLUME) 2-87

2-8

Chapter 3. Editing Keys
Special Editing Keys 3-2
Control Character Functions

3-1
3-7

2-1

Contents

Chapter 4. Creating and Changing Documents 4-1
What You Can Do with EDLIN
What Is a Line Editor? 4-2
Section 1 - Starting EDLIN

4-2

4-3

Section 2 - Using Special Editing Keys
Right Arrow Key 4-6
Select Key 4-7
Do Key 4-9
Remove Key 4-1 0
Find Key 4-11
Cancel Key 4-12
Insert Here Key 4-14
Resume Key 4-16

4-5

Section 3 - Using EDLIN Commands 4-18
Locating Lines 4-18
Using Multiple Commands 4-19
Spacing in Commands 4-20
Inserting Control Characters 4-20
Inserting the CtrljZ Character 4-20
EDLIN Command Options 4-21
Section 4 - EDLIN Commands
(A)ppend 4-23
(C)opy 4-24
(D)elete 4-27
Edit 4-30
(E)nd 4-32
(I)nsert 4-34
(L)ist 4-38
(M)ove 4-41
(P)age 4-42
(Q)uit 4-43
(R)eplace 4-44
(S)earch 4-48
(T)ransfer 4-52
(W)rite 4-53

4-22

Contents

Chapter 5. Messages

5-1

Appendix A. Getting Help
Appendix B. Diskettes

A-1

B-1

Storing Diskettes B-2
Handling Diskettes B-2
Using Diskettes B-3
Diskette Backup Procedures
Diskettes and Files B-4

B-3

Appendix C. Reading IBM Diskettes

C-1

Copying Data or Programs from IBM Diskettes

Appendix D. International Features
Index

C-1

0-1

1-1

Figures
Figure I.
Control, Shift. Lock. and Return Keys xii
Figure 2-1. Command Line Example 2-2
Figure 2-2. Storing Information in a File Cabinet 2-3
Figure 2-3. Storing Information on a Diskette 2-4
Figure 2-4. File Name Characters 2-5
Figure 2-5. Backup and Restore Concepts 2-15
Figure 3-1. Editing Keys 3-3
Figure B-1. Tracks and Sectors on a Diskette B-5
Figure B-2. Applying a Write-Protect Tab B-6
Figure D-1. International Characters D-2

Contents

Screens
Screen 1-1. Rainbow Main System Menu 1-3
Screen 1-2. MS-DOS Operating System Start-up Message
Screen 1-3. Date and Time Input 1-6
Screen 1-4. Directory of Drive A 1-9
Screen 1-5. Example of Typing Error 1-11
Screen 1-6. Using the Delete Character Key 1-13
Screen 1-7. Using CHKDSK 1-14
Screen 1-8. Inserting the Memo 1-17
Screen 1-9. Displaying the Memo 1-18
Screen 1-10. Print Dialog 1-20
Screen 1-11 . FORMAT Introductory Message 1-22
Screen 1-12. FORMAT Dialog 1-23
Screen 1-13. Directory of Drive B 1-25
Screen 1-14. The TYPE Command 1-26
Screen 1-15. Directory of Drive B After Deleting MEMO. TXT
Screen 1-16. Set-Up Display 1-29
Screen 2-1. The Backup/Restore Main Screen 2-17
Screen 2-2. Backup Options 2-20
Screen 2-3. Advanced User Backup Options 2-23
Screen 2-4. Restore Options 2-30
Screen 2-5. Advanced User Restore Options 2-33
Screen 2-6. Verify Options 2-36
Screen 2-7. Advanced User Verify Options 2-39
Screen 2-8. Directory Options 2-41
Screen 2-9. Date and Time 2-43
Screen 2-10. SETPORT Main Menu 2-80

1-4

1-27

Tables
Table 2-1. Internal and External Command Characteristics 2-8
Table 2-2. MS-DOS Operating System Commmands 2-9
Table 2-3. Advanced Commands 2-10
Table 2-4. Mini-Exchange Commands 2- 11
Table 2-5. Conventions 2-13
Table 2-6. DIR Command Equivalents 2-59
Table 2-7. PRINT Command Switches 2-69
Table 2-8. SETPORT Parameters 2-79
Table 3-1. Special Editing Keys 3-3
Table 3-2. Effect of Commands on Command Line 3-6
Table 3-3. Control Character Keys and Their Functions 3-7
Table 4-1. Special Editing Keys 4-5
Table 4-2. EDLIN Commands 4-22

vii

Preface

Welcome to MS-DOS
We congratulate you on the purchase of the Rainbow personal computing
system and the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system. The Rainbow computer is the only industry standard computer built to DIGITAL's quality
specifications and backed by DIGITAL'S commitment to service and support. The Rainbow computer is a sound investment in personal productivity
that you'll enjoy using every day.
To get started, we have prepared a set of easy-to-use documentation. In
the back of these manuals is a card that welcomes your comments. Please
let us hear from you.
Remember that purchasing your first Rainbow computer is just the beginning of your relationship with Digital Equipment Corporation, the world's
leading manufacturer of minicomputers. Our dedication to quality manufacturing, our extensive availability of spares and accessories, and our service
organization of 16,000 representatives worldwide are your further assurance of total DIGITAL quality. With the Rainbow computer and the
MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system you have an investment that will
grow in value as you use it now and in the future.
ix

Preface

Intended Reader
This guide is intended for first-time users of Digital Equipment Corporation's Rainbow computer. The purpose of this guide is to provide you with
detailed information about the MS-DOS operating system.
This guide assumes that you have:
• Installed the Rainbow computer according to the instructions in the

Rainbow Installation Guide.
• Read the Rainbow MS-DOS Version 2.11 Getting Started.
• Made a copy of the MS-DOS master system diskette.

Guide Organization
Chapter 1

Introduces the MS-DOS operating system by having you
try a few simple tasks and gives an example of how to
create and print a short memo.

Chapter 2

Discusses the MS-DOS operating system commands in
alphabetical order.

Chapter 3

Describes how to use the MS-DOS editing and control
character keys.

Chapter 4

Discusses how to create and edit memos.

Chapter 5

Alphabetically lists the MS-DOS messages.

Appendix A

Lists DIGITAL's International Help Line numbers.

Appendix B

Describes how to store, handle, and use diskettes.

Appendix C

Discusses how to read IBM diskettes.

Appendix D

Discusses the international features of the MS-DOS
Version 2.11 operating system.

Preface

Conventions Used
Follow the conventions listed below while using this guide.
• In examples of dialog between you and the computer, what the computer displays on the screen is shown in black. The characters you
type from the keyboard are shown in color.
• You can type these characters in either lower or upper case characters. Use the Shift or Lock key (see Figure I) on the keyboard to
enable uppercase characters.
IMPORTANT
The Lock key does not enable you to type the
numeric and special symbol keys. For example, if
you want to type $, %, *, (, :, ? you must
use the Shift key. The Lock key only affects the
alphabetic characters.

• Make sure to type all spaces and punctuation marks exactly as they
are printed.
• When you see (Return), press the Return key on the keyboard (see
Figure I).
• When you see (Ctrt/c), hold down the control key (Ctrl key on the
keyboard as shown in Figure I). While you are still holding the Ctrl
key, press the C key and then release both keys.
• The optional portions of a command syntax are enclosed in a pair of
square brackets ([ ]).
• Braces ({ }) indicate that you have a choice between two or more
entries. You must select at least one unless the entries are optional.

Preface

Return

Lock

Figure I. Control. Shift. Lock. and Return Keys

Additional Information
You can find additional information on the Rainbow computer and the
MS-DOS operating system in:

• Rainbow Owner's Manual
-

Using the keyboard

Using Set-Up features

Using the Rainbow computer as a terminal

Using escape sequences

• Rainbow MS-DOS Version 2.11 Advanced User's Guide
-

Batch processing

Directories and paths

Additional MS-DOS commands

The File Comparison utility

The Link utility

• Rainbow MS-DOS Version 2.05 Technical Documentation Kit
You can order this technical documentation kit by calling DECdirect at
1-800-258-1710.

xii

1
Introducing the MS-DOS
Operating System

An operating system is a group of instructions that controls the overall
operation of the computer. This guide discusses MS-DOS, an operating system for the Rainbow computer. With this operating system, you can run a
variety of application programs.
To use this guide, you should have:
1. Installed the Rainbow computer according to the instructions in the

Rainbow Installation Guide.
2. Read the Rainbow MS-DOS Version 2.11 Getting Started, which
describes:
• Starting and stopping the computer from a diskette drive
•

Making a copy of the MS-DOS operating system master diskette

1-1

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

Hands-On Experience
This chapter explains introductory operating system concepts and operations that enable you to:
1. Start the operating system from a diskette.
2. Use a few common commands (instructions to the operating system).
3. Create a short memo.
4. Print the memo on a printer.
5. Copy the memo to another diskette.
The end of this chapter includes information on correcting problems.

Starting the Operating System
from a Diskette Drive
Start the MS-DOS operating system by completing the following
instructions:
1. Be sure there is no protective card or diskette in any of the drives.
2. Turn on the computer by pressing the power switch to the 1 (on)
position on the front of the system unit. The drive doors can be open
or closed.
3. Be sure the Main System Menu is displayed on the screen, as shown
in Screen 1-1.

1-2

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

.all•••
Rainbow 100
Version 04.03L
Copyright (c) D1gll.1 Equipment CorporaUan 1983
All lihghl! Reserved

Press A. B. C, D. W, 5, or T
A • st."t frOlll Drive A
B • st."t from Drive B
C • !lta"t froM Drive C
D • st.,.t frolll Drive D
W • !It.,.t frolll Drlve W
5 • execute Self Te!lt
T • enter Ter",inal Mode

Screen 1-1. Rainbow Main System Menu

4. Remove the MS-DOS working diskette from its protective paper
envelope. (You created this diskette following the instructions in Chapter 2 of the Rainbow MS-DOS Version 2.11 Getting Started.)
5. Open the door of drive A and insert the working diskette. Be sure to
align the orange arrow on the diskette with the orange stripe on the
diskette drive.
6. Close the drive door.
7. Start the MS-DOS operating system by pressing:
A

in response to the Main System Menu. Pressing A tells the computer
which drive contains the MS-DOS operating system diskette. This is
the drive from which you want to work.
Mter you hear clicking and whirring sounds, the MS-DOS operating
system displays the start-up message in Screen 1-2.

1-3

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

NOTE
The screens in this guide might not be identical to
those displayed on your computer. The general
form of the information should be the same, but
specific information such as dates and times can
differ. If, at anytime, a screen is not displayed,
refer to the end of this chapter for help. For
explanations of messages, refer to Chapter 5.

Copsri!Jht 1984 Digital E~if'lll!llt Corporation
"icrosoft lIS-DOS version 2.11
Copsri!Jht 1981,82,83 "icrosoft Corp.
COMiIId Y. 2.11
Current date is Sat 10-01-1983
Enter lIeU date: I

Screen 1-2. MS-DOS Operating System Start-Up Message

1-4

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

8. The MS-DOS operating system displays a date and then prompts
(asks) you to enter the correct date. You enter the current date using
the following format:
mm-dd-yy
For example, you would enter September 23, 1984 as:
9-23-84

Now, enter today's date and press the Return key.
9. The MS-DOS operating system displays a time and prompts you to
enter the correct time. You enter the time using the following format
of a twenty-four hour clock:
hh:mm
For example, you would enter 9:15 a.m. as:
9: 15

and 9:15 p.m. as:
21:15

Now, enter the current time and press the Return key.
Screen 1-3 shows a sample date and time entry.

1-5

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

COf'sright 1984 Digital EttUipll!llt COl'flllration
"icrosoft lIS-DOS vl!rsion 2.11
COP9right 1981,82,83 "icrosoft Corp.
COIIIIand v. 2.11

Current datI! is Sat 9-01-1984
Entl!r new datI!: 9-23-84
Current tilll! is 0:00: 15.27
Entl!r new tilll!: 9: 15

Screen 1-3. Date and Time Input

Notice the last two symbols displayed on the left side of the screen, A>.
This is called the operating system prompt, or prompt. It indicates that the
operating system is waiting for instructions. The prompt consists of the
name of the drive the operating system is currently working from (for·
example A or B) and a right angle bracket. The drive identified in the
prompt is known as the active drive, or default drive.

1-6

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

Entering Instructions
Whenever the MS-DOS operating system displays its prompt, you can type
an instruction. Instructions are commands that you type on the keyboard.
These commands tell the operating system what to do.
Most of the operating system commands are designed to act on a file,
which is a collection of information stored on the diskette. The MS-DOS
operating system works with two types of files:
•

Program files, which contain a collection of instructions telling the
computer how to perform a specific task.

• Text files, which contain a collection information, which you have
entered such as a list of numbers or a memo.
The operating system accepts commands from you to:
• List the names of files on a diskette.
• Copy the entire contents of a diskette.
• Copy individual files.
• Create text files.
• Display a text file on the screen.
• Print files on a printer.
• Delete files.
• Run programs.
You type a command directly after the A> prompt. As you type a command, the computer displays the command characters on the screen as you
enter them.
The cursor is a blinking rectangle or blinking underline that indicates where
you enter the next character. The cursor moves to the right each time you
type a character.

1-7

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

NOTE
The computer displays the characters you type as
lower-case characters unless you use the Shift or
Lock keys to obtain upper-case characters. A light
above the Help and Do keys indicates when the
Lock key is on. To release the Lock key press the
Lock key again.
You can type commands in either upper- or lower-case characters. After
typing most commands, press the Return key.
Pressing the Return key tells the operating system that you have finished
typing the command and want the command executed. Some programs display messages such as <CR> (for carriage return) or "RETURN" to indicate that you should press the Return key.

Displaying a Directory
A commonly-used command is the DIR command, which displays the diskette file directory. Each diskette that contains files also contains a file
directory. A file directory-or directory-is like a book's table of contents.
It tells the operating system what files are stored on the diskette.
To list the names of files stored on the working diskette in drive A, after
the prompt, type:
A)DIR( Return)

Remember to type only what is printed in color. The symbol (Return) means
"press the Return key. "
The operating system displays a list of file names. Screen 1-4 shows the list
of files stored on the MS-DOS operating system diskette.

1-8

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

C1IIIAND CIIt
CllFIG SYS
1tDRI'iE SYS
1tDRI'iE CIIt

15973
17
953
873

8-10-84 1:00,.
8-29-84 12:27a
H7-83 ll:~
H7-83 10:38p
CJmI( CIIt
~ lo-t9-83
7:51p
FIJRItIiT COlt 19414 8-09-84 I:«p
DISKCOPY COlt
1409 10-19-83 7:51p
PRINT COlt
3808 8-03-84 9: 35a
EDLIN
COlt
8080 10-19-83 7:51p
FIND
EXE
6331 10-19-83 7:51p
FC
ill
2585 lo-t9-83 7:51p
SYS
COlt
922 10-19-83 7: 51p
RECOVER COlt
2295 10-19-83 7:51p
HORE
COlt
4364 10-19-83 7:51p
LINK
ill 42368 1-06-83 4: 36p
DEBtJ(;
COlt 12223 10-19-83 7:52p
I1EDIACHK ill
13!Mi 10-10-83 9:25a
ROC"" EXE
9194 10-14-83 9:45a
BAOOI' ill 7114G 8-13-84 4:56p
CR£F
ill 13824 10-19-83 7:52p
HASH
EXE B1266 9-01-B4 12:05a
SETPIIH ill 34804 2-17-84 4:0lp
EXE2BIN ill
1649 10-19-83 7:51p
SIIIT
ill
1632 8-08-84 12:2la
XHODE CO"
1309 10-10-84 4: 54p
XATIACH COlt
3197 10-08-84 12:15a
XDETACH CIIt
288G 10-08-84 12:23a
LDCOPY COlt
6144 10-05-84 4:01p
28 File(s)
7680 II1ttes free

11)1

Screen 1-4. Directory of Drive A

NOTE
Files are identified by two parts: file name and file
type. In the directory, the file name and file type
are separated by a space(s). The file type
indicates the type of file. For example, the file
type TXT indicates a document or text file. Refer
to Chapter 2 for more information on file names.

1-9

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

Correcting Spelling
and Typing Mistakes
The operating system executes a command after you press the Return key.
If you misspell a command or make a typographical error and then press
the Return key, the operating system indicates that it does not understand
the command by displaying a message. Try the following example. Type:
A>DIRR (Return)

The operating system displays:
Bad command or file name

The message "Bad command or file name" indicates the MS-DOS operating
system did not recognize DIRR as a valid command. The A> prompt
indicates that the operating system is waiting for you to retype the
command correctly. See Screen 1-5.

1-10

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

A>DIIII
Bad cIIMiIIII or file IIaIII!

Screen 1-5. Example of Typing Error

As long as you see the A> prompt, you can retype the command.

,-"

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System
If you mistype a command and realize your mistake before you press the
Return key, you can correct it using the delete character key, (see Figure
1-1).

LJLJCJEJ
D~[][]

[][][]O

[]D[]D"'~

CJD
Character

Figure 1-1. Delete Character Key

Delete Character Key
Each time you press the delete character key, the last character you typed
is erased from the screen and the cursor moves back one space. You cannot
erase the prompt.
To see how the delete character key works, when you see the A> prompt,
complete the following instructions.
1. Type:
A)RAINBWD

2. Press the delete character key twice. The characters "0" and "W "
are erased, leaving the characters "RAINE" displayed on the screen.

1-12

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

3. Now type OW to complete the word Rainbow.
Screen 1-6 shows this sequence.
4. Press the delete character key seven times to erase the entire word.

Screen 1-6. Using the Delete Character Key

1-13

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

Checking the Diskette in Drive A
You should periodically use the CHKDSK command to check for errors on
your diskette or hard disk. If CHKDSK displays any messages, refer to the
complete discussion of CHKDSK in Chapter 2.
Use CHKDSK by typing:
A)CHKDSK (Return )

Screen 1-7 shows the CHKDSK display.

A>CID.I

VolUlll! IIS-DIIS V211 created Aug 19, 1984 5:~
393216 b!lt~ total disk space
29696 b!lt~ in 3 hidden fil~
349184 b!lt~ in 28 user fil~
14336 b!lt~ available on disk
655360 b!lt~ total III!IIDI'9
622928 b!lt~ fl'l!l!

Screen 1-7. Using CHKDSK

1-14

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

Creating and Printing a Memo
The following example shows you how to use EDLIN, an editor, to enter a
memo and store it on the diskette. The example also shows you how to
print the memo on a printer.

Starting the Editor and Inserting Text
The first step in creating a file is to assign a file name and file type.
Because the example is a memo containing text, call the file MEMO.TXT.
1. To start EDLIN, type:
A>EDLIN MEMO.TXT(Relum)

EDLIN responds with:
New file

*
The * is the EDLIN prompt. It indicates EDLIN is waiting for you to
type an instruction.
2. To type text in the memo, enter insert mode by typing:
*I(Relum)

EDLIN displays:
1: *

to indicate you can type the first line of the memo.

1-15

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System
3. Type the following text and press the Return key:
1: *To: Fred (Return )

EDLIN displays:
2:*

4. Type the second line of text and press the Return key:
2:*From: AlyceCRetu,n)

EDLIN displays:
3:*

5. Type the third line of text and press the Return key:
3:*I'm writing this memo using the Rainbow computer. CRew," )

EDLIN displays:
4:*

6. Type the last line and press the Return key:
4:*It's very easy to do. (R~um)

EDLIN displays:
5:*

7. To leave insert mode hold down the Ctrl key and press the C key.
This action is indicated by (Ctrl/C). Try it now.
5:*CCtrl/C)

1-16

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

EDLIN displays:

"c
and then
*

The * indicates you are no longer in insert mode.
Screen 1-8 shows the Insert procedure.

A>EDlIN m.m
Nell file

l:ITo: Fred
2:1F1'IlII: Al9ce
3:11'11 writing this III!IO using the Rainbow COIIfIIIter.
4:lIt's ve~ eas9 to do.

5:fAC

Screen 1-8. Inserting the Memo

1-17

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

Displaying the Memo
Display the memo again by typing:
*L ( Return )

next to the *. See Screen 1-9.

1:110: Fred
2: FI'IIII: A1SCl!
3: I'R lII'itiRg this III!IID using the Rainbow cDIIpIlter.
4: It's vers eass to do.

Screen 1-9. Displaying the Memo

1-18

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

Leaving the Editor
After displaying the memo, EDLIN displays:
*

To leave the editor and save MEMO. TXT on the diskette, type:
*E ( Retum )

next to the *.
The MS-DOS operating system displays its A> prompt.

Printing the Memo
Before you print the memo, check to see that the printer is connected to
the Rainbow computer and that the printer is turned on. The Rainbow
Owner's Manual shows you how to connect a printer to the Rainbow
computer.
To print the memo, type:
A>PRINT MEMO.TXT(Retum)

If this is the first time you have used the PRINT command since you
started the computer, the operating system displays the following message:
Name of list device [PRN1:

In response, press: (Retum)
The operating system displays:
Resident part of PRINT installed

1-19

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

As the memo starts to print, the MS-DOS operating system displays:
A:MEMO

.TXT i5 currently being printed

Screen 1-10 shows the PRINT dialog. The "A:" confirms that you are
printing a file from the diskette in drive A.

A>PRINT H.m
IIaRe of list device [PRN]:
Resident part of PRINT installed

A:H

•m is curl't!lltis being printed

Screen 1-10. PRINT Dialog

1-20

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

Copying a Memo
to Another Diskette
You can use the COPY command to copy files from one diskette to another
diskette. This is useful if you want to make a reserve copy of a file. This
example shows you how to copy the memo you just created, MEMO.TXT,
from the diskette in drive A to a diskette in drive B.

Preparing a Diskette
Before you can copy the memo, you must prepare a new diskette to receive
information. The process of preparing the diskette is called formatting. Find
a new diskette and do the following:
1. After the prompt, type:
A>FORMAT 8:/I(Relum)

The FORMAT program displays the introductory message shown in
Screen 1-11.

1-21

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

A>fIIIIIAT B: II

Rai_ Disk Fomttl!r ¥I!rsilll 2.7.
IlitRNIIIG!!! This prDgrilll lIill dl!stros ans data
curl'l!lltis III sour disk. TSpl! (CtrIlC) to stop.
IlISI!rt III!II diskl!ttl! in driYl! B:
and strikl! ans kes when read!JI

Screen 1- 11. FORMAT Introductory Message

2. Open the drive B door and insert the blank diskette in drive B.
3. Close the drive B door.
4. Press:

The drive B light comes on and you will hear whirring and clicking
sounds. The formatting process takes about 60 seconds. The
FORMAT program then displays:
Volume label (11 characters, Return for none)?

5. Type:
MYD I SKETTE (Return )

1-22

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

The FORMAT program displays:
393216 byte5 total di5k 5pace
393216 byte5 available on di5k

followed by the prompt:
Format another (YIN)?

6. Press:

The MS-DOS operating system displays the A> prompt.
Screen 1-12 shows the complete FORMAT dialog.

A>fIRlAT B:/I

Rairm. Disk FOl'lilttl!r Vl!rsion 2.7.
IlARNING!!! This prDgrill lIill destl'D!l aI!I data
currt!lltis on sour disk. TSpl! (Ctr IIC) to stop.
IlISI!rt III!II diskettl! in driYl! B:
and stri~1! aI!I ~1!9 IIhen react:!

VolUll! label (11 c:ilaracters, <Rl!tllrn> for none)? IIYDISKETTE
393216 b!ttl!S total disk space
393216 b!ttl!S availabll! on disk
FOl'lilt another !YIN)?M

A>I

Screen 1-12. FORMAT Dialog

'-23

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

Copying the Memo
To copy the memo from the diskette in drive A to the diskette in drive B,
use the COPY command. Next to the prompt, type:
A>COPV MEMO.TXT B:MEMO.TXT(Rewm)

The operating system displays:
1 File(s) copied

This message indicates the copy procedure was successful.

Working with the Diskette in Drive B
This section shows you how to:
1. Change the active drive from A to B.
2. Display the drive B directory.
3. Display MEMO.TXT on the screen.
4. Delete MEMO. TXT from the diskette.
5. Change the active drive from B to A.

Changing the Active Diskette Drive to B
To check that the file, "MEMO. TXT," copied to drive B, display a directory of drive B. To tell the operating system to go to the diskette in drive
B, type:
A>B: (Retum)

1-24

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

The MS-DOS operating system displays:
8>

indicating that drive B is now active.

Displaying the Directory of Drive B
To display the directory of the diskette in drive B, type:
B>DIR (Return )

Screen 1-13 shows that MEMO.TXT is on the diskette in drive B.

A)B:

B)DIR
VolUlll! in drive B is IIYIISKETTE
Dil'l!Ctol"9 of B:\

1 File(s)

97 9-23-84 9:23a
392704 b9tes free

B>I

Screen 1-13. Directory of Drive B

1-25

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

Displaying a File on the Screen
Use the TYPE command to look at the contents of a file on the screen. To
display MEMO. TXT from the diskette in drive B, type:
B)TVPE MEMO.TXT(RMum)

The operating system displays the memo as shown in Screen 1-14.

B>TlPE D. m
To: Fred
FI'DII: AI9C1!

I'. lI1'itill!l this III!IID usill!l the Rairblu CDIIpUter.
It's V!I'9 !aSS to do.

Screen 1-14. The TYPE Command

'-26

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

Deleting a File
If you no longer need to keep a file, delete it from the diskette directory
with the DEL command. Once you delete the file you can never access its
contents, so think carefully before you delete it.

To delete MEMO. TXT from the diskette in drive B, type:
B>DEL MEMO. TXT ( Return)

To check that MEMO.TXT is no longer in the drive B directory, type:
B>DIR(Retum)

Screen 1-15 shows the directory. Notice MEMO.TXT is not included.

B)DIR
VoiUlll! in drive B is IIYDISKETTE
Directors of B:\

File not foond

Screen 1-15. Directory of Drive B After Deleting MEMO. TXT

1-27

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

Changing the Active Diskette Drive to A
Because you do not have any files on the diskette in drive B, make drive A
the active drive again by typing:

The MS-DOS operating system displays the prompt:
A)

What To Do in Case of Trouble
If you have any trouble while using the computer, there are several things
to try.
1. Refer to the list of operating system messages in Chapter 5.

2. Reset the Rainbow computer.

Operating System Messages
Messages can be displayed for a variety of reasons. For example, messages
can be displayed if you:
• Type a command incorrectly.
• Type an invalid command.
• Omit some information the operating system needs to complete the
command.
• Choose a nonexistent drive.
You cannot anticipate all the conditions that can cause a message. However,
if you get a message:
• Check for spelling errors. If you find any, retype the command.
• Check the list of commands in Chapter 2 to determine if the command
you typed is a valid MS-DOS operating system command.
1-28

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

• Refer to Chapter 2 for further discussion of the commands or to Chapter 5 for a list of operating system messages, what they mean, and
what to do about them.

Resetting the Rainbow Computer
If the operating system encounters a condition it cannot deal with, it can
fail to display a message or fail to respond to any key you type. If this
happens, or if you want to start over for some reason, reset the computer.
You reset while the computer is turned on. Diskettes can be in or out of
the drives. To reset the computer:
1. Press the Set-Up key. The text on your screen should look like that in

Screen 1-16.

SET-UP
TO

~XIT

PR~SS

·S~T-Up·

·H~Lp·

R~S~T

TYP~

05.03A
640K

!MIS

12345678901@(!l1fl*I1112345G78901-.:12345678901 tfl-112345G789O!""'t"""(~""'4fi=*""'II:

Screen 1- 16. Set-Up Display

'-29

Introducing the MS-DOS Operating System

2. Then hold down the CtrI key while pressing the Set-Up key.

Mter you press these keys, the computer displays:
TESTI NG •••

About four seconds later, the test is completed. If the computer detects no
problems, the computer displays the Main System Menu.
Then, you can restart the MS-DOS operating system by pressing:
A

1-30

2
Using MS-DOS Files and
Commands

This chapter is divided into two sections:
• Section 1 explains concepts about files, directories, and commands.
• Section 2 discusses the most frequently used commands. The commands are listed alphabetically.

2-1

Using MS-DOS Files and Commands

Section 1
Using Commands. Files. and Directories
Commands
A command has three parts:
• The command or keyword
•

The optional command tail

• Carriage return, shown as (Retum )
Any combination of these parts is a command line. For example, the
following is a command line:
DIR

-r-

MEMO.TXT

I
I
I
CARRIAGE RETURN
I
I
i
I
I
OPTIONAL COMMAND TAIL
I
I
COMMAND

Figure 2-1. Command Line Example

Commands are instructions that tell the MS-DOS operating system to
perform a single operation.
An optional command tail supplies the command with additional information,
often a file name.
To have the MS-DOS operating system execute the command, press the
Return key.
When you type commands, exact spacing and punctuation are important. In
most cases, you must type at least one space after a command to separate
the command from the optional command tail. Additional spacing and
punctuation requirements are noted in Section 2, where each command is
described.

2-2

Using MS-DOS Files and Commands

Files
Most commands are designed to act on files. A file is a collection of related
information. A file on your diskette can be compared to a file folder in a file
cabinet. For example, one file folder could contain the names and addresses
of the employees who work in your office. You could name this file the
Employee Master File in your file cabinet (see Figure 2-2). A file on your
diskette could also contain the names and addresses of the employees in
your office and could be named EMPLOYEE. TXT (see Figure 2-3).

EMPLOYEE
MASTER
FILE

software that
runs the
Rainbow
Computer

Figure 2-2. Storing Information in a File Cabinet

2-3

Using MS-DOS Files and Commands

Employee.Text

MS-DOS is the
software that
runs the
Rainbow
Computer

Figure 2-3. Storing Information on a Diskette

All programs, text, and data on your diskette reside in files, and each file
has a unique name. You refer to a file by its name.
Each time you input and save data or text, you create a file. You also
create a file when you write and name programs and save them on your
diskette.

Naming Files
The name of a file has two parts:
• The file name
• The file type
In the example below, MYFILE is the file name and .EXE is the file
type.
MYF I LE. EXE

2-4

Using MS-DOS Files and Commands

A file name consist of from one to eight characters. The file type can be
three or fewer characters. You can type the characters in lowercase or
uppercase letters.
File names and file types usually consist of letters and numbers, but other
characters are allowed. You can use the characters A through Z and the
numbers 0 through 9 in file names and file types. You can also use the
following characters:

0
6

III

)

(

'"
It

}

'I.

U'
Y

'Ii

Figure 2-4. File Name Characters

Illegal File Names
The MS-DOS operating system reserves certain words for special purposes.
The following words cannot be used as file names:

• AUX

• CON
• PRN

• NUL
• CLOCK

2-5

Using MS-DOS Files and Commands

Wildcards
You can use two special characters, called wildcards, in file names or file
types to take the place of any character. They are:
• The question mark (?)
• The asterisk (*)

The Question Mark
A question mark in a file name or file type indicates that any character can
occupy that position. For example, the command:
A>DIR TEST?RUH.EXE(Rerum)

lists all directory filenames on the default (active) drive that:
• Have eight characters
• Begin with TEST
• Have a character after TEST
• End with the letters RUN
• Have a file type of EXE
The following are some examples of files that might be listed by the above
DIR command:
TEST1RUH.EXE
TEST2RUH.EXE
TEST6RUH.EXE
TESTSRUH.EXE

2-6

Using MS-DOS Files and Commands

The Asterisk
An asterisk in a file name or file type indicates that any character can
occupy that position or any of the remaining positions in the file name or
file type. For example:
A>DIR TEST*.EXE(Retum)

lists all directory entries on the default (active) drive with file names that
begin with the character TEST and have a file type of EXE. Some
examples of files that might be listed by the above DIR command are:
TEST1.EXE
TEST2RUN.EXE
TEST6RUN.EXE
TESTALL.EXE

The wildcard designation *.* refers to all files on the diskette. Note that
the asterisk wildcard can be very powerful when used in MS-DOS
commands.

Directories
The names of your files are kept in a directory on each diskette. The
directory also contains information on the size of your files, the locations of
the files on the diskette, and the dates the files were created and updated.
The directory you are working on is called your current or working
directory.
You can create and maintain private areas or "sub-directories" on the same
diskette. These areas are known as "directory paths". For complete information on sub-directories and paths, refer to the Rainbow MS-DOS Version
2.11 Advanced User's Guide, in this kit.

2-7

Using MS-DOS Files and Commands

Section 2
MS-DOS Operating System Commands
The MS-DOS operating system has two types of commands:
• Internal
• External
Table 2-1 lists the characteristics of internal and external commands.
Table 2-1. Internal and External Command Characteristics
Internal Commands

External Commands

Not shown in directory

Shown in directory

Always stored in the computer;
automatically read into the computer
memory at start up

Stored as files on a diskette; read into the
computer only when requested

Can be used at any time regardless of which
diskette or drive is being used

Can only be used if the requested file exists
on diskette; specify the diskette that the file
is on

Are executed immediately when you type
the command name and press the Return
key.

End with a file type of .COM, .EXE, or
.BAT. For example, DISKCOPY.COM and
FORMAT .COM are external files. Note that
you do not have to include the file type
when you type a file name.

Table 2-2 lists and briefly describes the MS-DOS internal and external
commands that are listed in this manual.

2-8

Using MS-DOS Files and Commands
Table 2-2. MS-DOS Operating System Commands
Command

Type

Use

BACKUP

External

Copies the indicated files from the hard disk to a set of
diskettes or from a set of diskettes to the hard disk

CHKDSK

External

Scans the diskette of the default or designated drive and
checks for errors

CLS

Internal

Clears the screen

COPY

Internal

Copies file(s) you specify

DATE

Internal

Displays and sets the date

DEL

Internal

Deletes file(s) you specify

DIR

Internal

Lists requested directory entries

DISKCOPY

External

Copies diskettes

ERASE

Internal

Deletes file(s) you specify

FORMAT

External

Prepares a diskette to receive MS-DOS files

MDRIVE

External

Specifies the size of the memory drive (MDRIVE.SYS)

External

Prints files you specify

RDCPM

External

Reads CP/M-86/80 files from a diskette

REN

Internal

Renames a file

SET

Internal

Sets one string value to another string value

SETPORT

External

Changes the serial port parameters for the computer and
sets up your LA50, LAIOO, or LQP02 printer.

SYS

External

Transfers the MS-DOS operating system files from one
diskette to another diskette

TIME

Internal

Displays and sets the time

TYPE

Internal

Displays the contents of the file you specify

VER

Internal

Displays the MS-DOS operating system version number

VERIFY

Internal

Checks a diskette to make sure that information has been
correctly written on it

VOL

Internal

Displays the volume identification number

2-9

Using MS-DOS Files and Commands

Advanced Commands
The commands listed in Table 2-3 are mainly for programmers. They are
stored on the MS-DOS master system diskette. For more information on
these commands refer to the Rainbow MS-DOS Version 2.11 Advanced
User's Guide in this kit.
Table 2-3. Advanced Commands
Command

Type

Usage

BREAK

Internal

Sets Ctrl/C check

CHDIR

Internal

Changes directories

CTTY

Internal

Changes console TTY

ECHO

Internal

Turns on or off the echoing of batch file command lines to
the terminal and turns on or off the MS-DOS operating
system prompt

EXE2BIN

External

Converts executable files to binary format

EXIT

Internal

Exit command, returns to lower level

FIND

Internal

Searches for a specific string of text

FOR

Internal

Provides a logical looping capability for command lines

GOTO

Internal

Provides logic flow control for batch file command lines

Internal

Provides logic control for command lines

LDCOPY

External

Copies reserved system tracks from one diskette to
another

MEDIACHK

External

Improves diskette performance

MKDIR

Internal

Makes a directory

Internal

Displays output one screen at a time

PATH

Internal

Sets a command search path

PAUSE

Internal

Temporarily suspends execution of a batch file command
lines

2-'0

Using MS-DOS Files and Commands
Table 2-3. Advanced Commands (Cont.)
Command

Type

Usage

PROMPT

Internal

Designates the command prompt

RECOVER

External

Recovers a file(s) containing bad sectors.

REM

Internal

Displays a comment in a batch file

RMDIR

Internal

Removes a directory

SHIFT

Internal

Increases the number of replaceable parameters in the
batch process

SORT

Internal

Sorts data alphabetically, forward or backward

Mini-Exchange Commands
Table 2-4 lists the commands you can use with the Mini-Exchange. See the
Rainbow Using the Mini-Exchange MS-DOS Version 2.11 Operating System contained in this kit.
Table 2-4. Mini-Exchange Commands
Command

Type

Usage

XMODE

External

Reassigns logical devices to physical devices

XATTACH

External

Attaches a Rainbow computer port to a Mini-Exchange
port

XDETACH

External

Detaches a Rainbow computer port from a Mini-Exchange
port

2-11

Using MS-DOS Files and Commands

Information Common to All Commands
The following information applies to all MS-DOS commands:
• Commands are usually followed by one or more options (command
tails). Options are information you can add to the command line if you
choose; they are not necessary to use the command.
•

You can type commands and options in uppercase or lowercase letters,
or a combination of both.

•

You must separate commands and options by delimiters. The space or
comma is normally used for delimiters.
.
For example:
A>DEL HEWFILE.TXT(R~um)
A>REHAME,THISFILE THATFILE(Relurn)

You can also use the semicolon (;), the equal sign (=), or the Tab key
as delimiters in MS-DOS commands.
•

You must include the file type when referring to a file that already has
a file type (except to run external commands and batch files).

• Commands take effect only after you press the Return key.
• Wildcards and reserved words (for example, PRN) are not allowed in
the names of any commands.
• The prompt is the default drive designation followed by a greater-than
sign (for example, A».
• Some command explanations refer to diskette drives or files as the
source and destination. The source is the one from which you are
transferring information. The destination is the one to which you are
transferring information.

In all cases, type the source before the destination. The following
example of the COpy command illustrates the order:
A>COPV source.txt destinat.ion(Rerum)

2-12

Using MS-DOS Files and Commands

Conventions Used
Table 2-5 lists the conventions used in the discussion of commands.
Table 2-5. Conventions
convention

Meaning

drv:

Diskette drive name (A:, B:, C:, D:)
Hard disk drive name (E:, F:, G:, H:)

filename

Any valid file name. The filename option does not refer
to a device or to a diskette drive designation.

.typ

Optional file type consisting of a period and one to
three characters. When used, file types immediately
follow file names (filename.typ).

switches

Options that control the MS-DOS operating system
commands. They are preceded by a forward slash (I).

arguments

Provide more information to MS-DOS commands. You
usually choose between arguments; for example ON or
OFF.
Vertical ellipsis indicates a sequential progression to
the entry shown.

2-13

Using MS-DOS Files and Commands

Command Formats
The following information tells you how to format MS-DOS commands:
• All words shown in capital letters must be entered. These words must
be spelled and spaced exactly as shown. You can type these words in
any combination of uppercase or lowercase characters.
• You must supply the text for any items shown in lowercase. For example, you enter the name you chose for your file when you see:
[filename. typl

• Items shown in brackets [ ] are optional. When you include optional
information, do not type the brackets. Include only the information
within the brackets.
• Items shown in braces { } indicate that you can choose between two or
more items. Do not type the braces. One item must be selected unless
the entries are optional.
• You must include all punctuation as shown, except for brackets and
braces.

2-14

BACKUP

BACKUP
Purpose
BACKUP is a program that allows you to:
• Copy files from a hard disk to diskettes (called "backup" in this
guide). Backup is generally used to make copies of the files you have
created. If they are accidentally erased from the hard disk, you can
copy these files back to the hard disk. Hence, they are called
"backup" copies of the files.
• Copy files from diskettes to a hard disk (called "restore" in this
guide). Restore is generally used to copy back or "restore" files that
were accidentally erased from the hard disk.
Figure 2-5 shows the "backup" and "restore" concepts.

Backup

Restore

Figure 2-5. Backup and Restore Concepts

2-15

BACKUP

It is important to make extra copies of all your files at regular intervals
because a hard disk can become too full, damaged, or accidentally erased.
By making these copies of the files, you can delete them from the daily
working space on the hard disk, and copy them back to the hard disk at a
later time.

Forms
BACKUP ( Return )
BACKUP operation{Return)

Menu Form. For the first form, you use a "menu" to copy files back and
forth from the hard disk . For instructions, see the section titled "BACKUP
Menu Instructions." Use this form if you are not familiar with the
BACKUP program and its options. The BACKUP menus ask you for information to supply to the program.
Command Line Form. For the second form, you simply type commands
after the A> prompt. For instructions, see the section titled "BACKUP
Command Line Instructions." Use this form when you are familiar with the
BACKUP program and know exactly what options you want to use. You
cannot use all the BACKUP program's options with this form.

BACKUP Menu Instructions
You use the BACKUP program to:
• Copy files from the hard disk to diskettes (called "backup" in this
guide).
• Copy files from diskettes to the hard disk (called "restore" in this
guide). Restore is generally used to "restore" files that were accidentally erased from the hard disk.

2-16

BACKUP
NOTE
The instructions below assume that you are starting the operating system from a diskette in drive A.
Starting BACKUP. To start the BACKUP program, type:
A>BACKUP ( Return )

BACKUP displays the menu shown in Screen 2-1.

lIS-DOS BaciUfl and Restore utilits V1.2

1. COf'!! hard disk files onto backUfl diskettes
2. Restore hard disk files fl'Oll backUfl diskettes
3. CoIIpare hard disk files tD backUfl diskette files
4. List the IliIIII!S Df files on backUfl diskettes
5. Set the date and till!!
6. Exit fl'Oll this progrill

Press the UfI ar1'Oll kes, down ar1'Oll kes or a IlWIber kes to point to
a se lection, then <Do).
lin aR9 selection, press <Help) for infol'Jlation and instructions.

Screen 2-1. The Backup/Restore Main Screen

2-17

BACKUP

To select an option:
1. Move the arrow in the left-hand corner of the screen to the task you

want to do by either:
• Pressing the up or down arrow keys
• Typing a number (1-6)
2. Press the Do key.
For example, if you type the number 4, the arrow moves to the fourth
option-"List the names of files on backup diskettes". Then press the Do
key.
After you press the Do key and the BACKUP program begins, you are
asked questions by the BACKUP program.
The options for the BACKUP program are discussed in the following
sections of this chapter.
Getting Help. If you want to find out what an option does:
1. Choose the option you want information about by pressing one of the

following:
• The up or down arrow keys to the appropriate line
• The number of the option (1-6)
2. Press the Help key.
After you have received the information you need, press the Prev Screen
key to return to the Backup/Restore Main Screen.

2-18

BACKUP

Option 1. Copy Hard Disk Files onto
Backup Diskettes
Option 1 of the BACKUP program allows you to copy selected files from
the hard disk to a set of diskettes. The diskettes you copy to are called the
"backup" diskettes.
IMPORTANT
Before you copy files, be sure that you set the
correct time and date. The time and the date can
be essential when you copy files back to the hard
disk. Set the time and the date with the TIME
and DATE commands at the operating system
level or with Option 5 on this BACKUP program.

To copy files from a hard disk to a set of diskettes:
1. Start the BACKUP program by typing:
A >BACKUP ( Return)

2. Insert a blank, MS-DOS formatted diskette in the diskette drive that
you want to copy the files to.
3. Press one of the following:
• The up or down arrow key until the arrow points to option 1
• The 1 key
4. Press the Do key.
The computer displays the backup options shown in Screen 2-2.

2-19

BACKUP

~-DOS Backup and Restore Utilits Vl.2

Backup Options
-}

Source hard disk drive........... [none] E F G H
Destination diskette drive ••••••• [none]

ABC D

TSpe of files to save ............ [AII1 Changed

Brackets surround selected options.
Press the up ar1'Oll kes or daun ar1'Oll kes to point to a line.
On iIII!I line, press <Help> for infol'lliltion and instructions.
Press <Do> to begin the backup.
Press <Next Screen> for AdvalCt!d User Bac:kup ~illlS.
Press <!'rev Screen> or <!lain ScreenI(F9)} for llain Screen.

Screen 2-2. Backup Options

5. To choose the hard disk drive to copy files from, press:
a. The down arrow key
b. The right arrow key to select the source drive (E, F, G, H)

NOTE
If you are not sure what an option means, move
the arrow to the option you need help on, and
press the Help key.

6. To choose the diskette drive to copy the files to, press:
a. The down arrow key
b. The right arrow key to select the destination drive (A, B, C, D)

2-20

BACKUP

7. Choose to copy:
• All files in the hard disk's current directory by making no more
selections and pressing the Do key.

• The files in the hard disk's current directory that have changed
since the last time you copied files:
-

Press the down arrow key.

Press the right arrow key to highlight "changed".

Press the Do key.

NOTE
The BACKUP program displays the Date and
Time screen after you press the Do key if you did
not change the default date and time when you
started the MS-DOS operating system. If you see
this screen, type the current date and time and
press the Do key. Then press the Do key to start
copying the files.
As the BACKUP program copies the files to the diskette, each file name is
displayed on the screen. When the diskette is full, you are asked to insert
another blank, MS-DOS formatted diskette.
When the program is done you see a brief message indicating that the
BACKUP program is complete, and the program returns to the
Backup/Restore Main Screen.

NOTE
After you have copied these files to diskettes, you
cannot use the files on these diskettes for any
other purpose than copying them back to the hard
disk.

2-21

BACKUP

Advanced Backup Procedures. Advanced User Backup options are
available for the copying process. For example, you can delete the files
from the hard disk after you copy them to the diskettes. See Screen 2-3 for
all of the advanced backup options.
To use the advanced backup options:
1. Start the BACKUP program. Type:
A>BACKUP ( Return )

2. Insert a blank, MS-DOS formatted diskette into the diskette drive that
you want to copy the files to.
3. Press one of the following:
• The up or down arrow key until the arrow points to option 1
• The 1 key
4. Press the Do key.
5. Press the Next Screen key.
Screen 2-3 displays the advanced backup options.

2-22

BACKUP

Advanct!d User Backup IftillllS
-)

Source hard disk drive ••••••••••• [none] E F G H
Destination diskette drive ••••••• [none] ABC D
T9p1! of files to save ............ [Alll Changed
Backup file specifier .................. ~*•.::..*_ _ _ _ _ _ __
Backup exclusion file specifier ........ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Hale for backup diskettes .•••.•.••••.•• ~
Exclude S9stl!ll files fl'Oll backup ....... [Mo] Yes
Exclude Read-Onl~ files fl'Oll backup •••• [Mol Yes
Delete files afte!' backup ..•••••••..••. [Mol Yes
Ve!'if~ files after backup.............. [Mol Yes
Get confi1'lliltion before deletes........ Mo [Yes I
Press the up ar1'Oll k.1!!I or down ar1'Oll k.1!!I to point to a line.
On ans line, press <Help) for inf'o1'lliltion and instructions.
Press <Do) to begin the backup.
Press <PreY Scl'l!l!fl) for Backup IftillllS.
Press <llain Sc1'l!l!lll(FS» for ltain Scl'l!l!ll.

Screen 2-3. Advanced User Backup Options

6. Press the up or down arrow key to select a line.
7. Press the right arrow key to select an option within a line, or type a
value on the drawn line
8. When you have specified all the information, press the Do key.

2-23

BACKUP

As the BACKUP program is copying the files, each file name is displayed
on the screen. When the diskette is full, you are asked to insert another
blank, MS-DOS formatted diskette.
When the program is done, it displays a brief message indicating that the
copying process is complete, and the program returns to the
Backup/Restore Main Screen.

NOTE
After you have copied these files to diskettes, you
cannot use the files on these diskettes for any
other purpose than copying them back to the hard
disk.
Descriptions of each of the advanced user backup options follow.

Source hard-disk drive
This option allows you to specify the partition on the hard disk from which
files will be saved. The partitions recognized by this program range from E
to H. If a hard disk has fewer partitions, and you select a nonexistent
partition, a message is displayed on the bottom of the screen in reverse
video. There is no default value; you must select a partition.

Destination diskette drive
This option allows you to specify which diskette drive contains the diskettes
to which to copy the files. The option requests that you insert diskettes as
needed to save all the specified files.
The drives recognized by this program range from A to D. There is no
default value; you must select a drive.

2-24

BACKUP

Type of files to save
This option allows you to specify whether or not to save ALL files in a
specified directory or just those that have been changed or created since
the last backup procedure. The default is to copy all files. However, saving
selected files is faster and requires less space.

Backup file specifier
This option allows you to specify categories of file names to be saved on
the diskette. The names of the files to be saved can be written in this entry
by using:
• An optional directory and/or path name
• A one to eight-character file name
• An optional period (.)
• An optional file type of up to three characters
• An optional /A specification that causes specified files in the hard
disk's current directory and all directories below it to be included in
the operation.
• An optional /D specification that causes specified files in directories
below but not including the hard disk's current directory to be
included in the operation.

NOTE
You cannot specify both /A and /D in the file specification. If you do not specify either /A or /D,
then the BACKUP program only performs the
operation on the files in the hard disk's current
directory.

2-25

BACKUP

For example, if you specify drive E as the source hard disk drive, the
following file specification backs up the entire hard disk drive E including
the main directory and all subdirectories.
\*.*fA

If desired, you can also use the following wildcard characters:

Matches any single character

Matches any number of any characters

You can also specify an indirect file. An indirect file contains a list of files
(one per line) to be saved on the diskettes. This is useful if you have a long
and frequently used list of files.
To specify an indirect file:
1. Use the symbol @

2. Followed by an optional drive name (A through I) and a colon (:)
3. Followed by a file name and optional file type. The name of the indirect file cannot include wildcard characters. However, the file names
listed in the indirect file can contain wildcards.
Example:
@A:LIST.FIL
If you type an illegal character, a message is displayed at the bottom of the
screen. If you type a character unintentionally, you can use the delete
character key to erase the character.

The default file specifier is all files in the hard disk's current directory
(*.*).

2-26

BACKUP

Backup exclusion file specifier
This option allows you to specify a category of file names not to be saved
on the diskettes. The names of the files not to be saved can be written in
this entry by using the wildcard characters described earlier. The default is
no files. If you type an illegal character, a message is displayed at the
bottom of the screen. If you type a character unintentionally, you can use
the delete character key to erase the character. You cannot use the fA or
fD switches on this file specifier.

Name for backup diskettes
The name of the backup diskettes is an eight-character name that you
choose. This name is stored on each backup diskette in the set. The name
is also used by the restore and verify programs as a check that the correct
set of diskettes has been inserted when files are being copied back to the
hard disk. The default name is BACKUP. To change the name, erase the
existing name using the delete character key. Then re-type the name. If
you type an illegal character, a message is displayed at the bottom of the
screen. If you type a character unintentionally, you can use the delete
character key to erase the character.

Exclude system files from backup
This option allows you to specify whether or not to save files with the
system attribute that are in the source partition. The system files are not
often changed so that once you have saved them, you can choose not to
save them again. The default is NO.

Exclude Read Only files from backup
This option allows you to specify whether or not to save files with the Read
Only attribute that are in the source partition. The default is NO.

2-27

BACKUP

Delete files after backup
This option allows you to specify whether or not to delete each file from
the hard disk source partition after the file has been saved onto the diskettes. This selection can save you time if a large number of files are to be
permanently saved. In addition, this option eliminates the possibility of
deleting the wrong files after a permanent backup procedure. The default is
NO.
Verify files after backup
This option allows you to specify whether or not to check that the data has
been correctly copied to the diskettes. This feature verifies that the data
has been properly copied. On the other hand, it takes more time. Therefore, if you feel confident about the backup procedures, select NO for this
option. The default is NO.
CAUTION
If you plan to delete or erase the data from the
h~rd disk before you attempt to restore the data,
you should select YES for this option. Then, when
you copy the data to the diskettes, you are
assured that the data was copied successfully and
can be easily restored.

Get confirmation before deletes
This option allows you to specify whether or not the BACKUP program
should require you to "give permission" before any data is deleted from
the hard disk or diskettes. You are prompted before each file deletion
whether or not to delete that particular file. If you feel confident about the
operation of the backup procedure and do not wish to be prompted by these
messages, select NO for this option. The default is YES.

2-28

BACKUP

Option 2. Restore Hard Disk Files from
Backup Diskette
Option 2 from the BACKUP program allows you to copy selected files from
the diskettes to a specified partition on the hard disk. You do this generally
to copy files back to the hard disk, (restore).
To copy files from the diskettes to the hard disk:
1. Start the BACKUP program by typing:
A)BACKUP ( Return )

2. Press one of the following:
• The up or down arrow key until the arrow points to option 2
• The 2 key
3. Press the Do key.
The computer displays the restore options shown in screen 2-4.

2-29

BACKUP
IIS-DOS Baciup iIId Restore UtilitS Vi.2
Restore IJptioos
-)

Source diskette drive •••••••••••• [none] A B C D
Destination hard disk drive ...... [none] E F G H
Restore file specifier ........... 1.1

Brackets surround the selected optioos
Press the up arl'Oll kes! or dIM! arl'Oll kes to point to a line.
IkI ill!! line, press <Help) for inf'omtion iIId instructioos.
Press <Do> to befin the restore.
Press <Next Screen> for Advftl!d User Restore OptilllS.
Press <JIrey Screen> or <llain Screen (F9)} for !lain Screen.

Screen 2-4. Restore Options

NOTE
The *.* indicates all files in the current hard disk
directory that are on the back-up diskettes.
4. To choose the diskette· drive to copy the files from, press:
a. The down arrow key to move the arrow to the first line
b. The right arrow key to select the source drive (A, B, C, D)

NOTE
If you are not sure what an option means, select
the option by moving the arrow to the option you
need help on, and press the Help key.

2-30

BACKUP

5. To choose the hard disk drive to copy the files to, press:
a. The down arrow key to move the arrow to the second line
b. The right arrow key to select the destination drive (E, F, G, H)
6. Choose to restore:
• All files in the hard disk's current directory by not making any
more selections and pressing the Do key
• Certain files that you specify:
-

Press the down arrow key to move the arrow to the third line.

Press the delete character key until the *. * is removed.

Type the names of the files you want restored.

Press the Do key.

You can specify the jA or the jD switches here. See the section called
"Backup file specifier" earlier in this chapter for more information about
these switches.

NOTE
If you are not sure of how to specify a group of
files, refer to the section called "Backup File
Specifier" earlier in this chapter.

After the program starts, you are asked to insert a diskette. When all the
files have been copied from that diskette to the hard disk, you are asked to
insert another diskette.
As the BACKUP command copies the files to the hard disk, each file name
is displayed on the screen. When the program is done you see a brief
message indicating that the procedure is complete, and the program returns
to the Backup/Restore Main Screen.

2-31

BACKUP

Advanced Restore Procedures. Advanced User Restore options are
available for the restoring process. For example, you can verify the files
after they are restored. See screen 2-5 for all of the advanced restore
options.

To use the advanced restore options:
1. Start the BACKUP program by typing:
A >BACKUP ( Retum )

2. Press one of the following:
• The up or down arrow key until the arrow points to option 2
• The 2 key
3. Press the Do key.
4. Press the Next Screen key.
Screen 2-5 displays the advanced restore options.

2-32

BACKUP

lIS-DOS Backup and Restore ut i 1it9 Vi.l

Advanced User Restore Options

Source diskette drive .......... [none] ABC D
Destination hard disk drive .... [none] E F G H
Restore file specifier ............. :...*•..:.,*_ _ _ _ _ _ __
Restore exclusion file spedfier ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Malle of backup diskettes........... JW:lIf......
.Restore over ex istill!/ fi Ies. . ••. . •. . . . . No [Yes]
Restore over Read-On19 files ........... [No] Yes
Restore over S9stl!ll files •.•...•••...•• [No] Yes
Verif9 files after restore ............. [No] Yes
Get confintation before deletes........ No [Yes]

Press the up arl'Oll k!9 or down arl'Oll k!9 to point to a line.
lin irI!I line, press <Help> for infontation and instructions.

Press <Do> to begin the restore.
Press <PreY Screen} for Restore Options.
Press <JIain Screenl(F9l> for !fain Screen.

Screen 2-5. Advanced User Restore Options

5. Press the up or down arrow key to select a line.
6. Press the right arrow key to select an option within a line, or type a
value on the drawn line.
7. When you have specified all the information. press the Do key.
After the program starts, you are asked to insert a diskette. When all the
files have been copied from that diskette to the hard disk, you are asked to
insert another diskette.
As the BACKUP program is copying the files from the diskettes to the hard
disk, each file name is displayed on the screen. When the program is done,
it displays a brief message indicating that the copying process is complete,
and the program returns to the Backup/Restore Main Screen.
These advanced user options are similar to those for the backup options,
except for three, which are described as follows.
2-33

BACKUP

Restore over existing files
This option allows you to specify whether or not to restore files from the
diskettes even if a file of the same name already exists on the hard disk. If
the file already exists on the hard disk, it is deleted and the file from the
diskette is written onto the hard disk.
The option is useful if you wish to restore a few files that were
inadvertently deleted. The default is YES.
Restore over Read Only files
This option allows you to specify whether or not to restore files that have a
Read Only protection attribute from the diskettes even if a file of the same
name already exists on the hard disk. If the file already exists on the hard
disk, it is deleted and the file from the diskette is written onto the hard
disk.
This option, in effect, allows the Restore utility to override the Read Only
attribute. The default is YES.
Restore over system files
This option allows you to specify whether or not to restore system files
from the diskettes even if a file of the same name already exists on the
hard disk. If the file already exists on the hard disk, it is deleted and the
file from the diskette is written onto the hard disk.
This option is useful if you wish to restore all application files to a previous
state. The default is YES.

2-34

BACKUP

Option 3. Compare Hard Disk Files to
Backup Diskette Files
Option 3 of the BACKUP program allows you to compare specified files on
the diskettes with the corresponding files on the hard disk-called a "verify
operation". Use this option to see any changes that have been made since
you last saved a file. The verify option is useful as a check that you have
the latest copy of any given file, as well as a check to be sure you have
saved the file on diskettes.
IMPORTANT
You should select this option if you plan to delete
the files from the hard disk before you restore
them. This insures that the files were successfully
copied to the diskettes and can be easily restored.

To compare the files on the hard disk to those on the backup diskette:
1. Start the BACKUP program by typing:
A>BACKUP (Return)

2. Press one of the following:
• The down arrow key until the arrow points to option 3
• The 3 key
3. Press the Do key.
The computer displays the verify options as shown in Screen 2-6.

2-35

BACKUP

lIS-DOS llack.up and Restore utilitS Vl.2
Verifs Options
-)

COIIpare diskette dr i ve.. .. ... [none] ABC

Collf'are hard disk drive •••••• [none] E F G H
COIIpare file specifier ••••••• ""'*•..;;..*_ _ _ _ _ _ __

Brackets surround selected options.
Press the up ar1'Oll kes or doun ar1'Oll kes to point to a line.
lin ill!! line, press <Help) for inforaation and instructions.
Press <Do} to begin the verifS.
Press <Next Screen> for Advanced User VerifS Options.
Press <PreY Screen> or <llain Screen/(FS)} for llain Screen.

Screen 2-6. Verify Options

4. To choose the diskette drive to compare file from, press:
a. The up or down arrow key
b. The right arrow key to select the diskette drive, (A, B, C, D)
5. To choose the hard disk drive to compare the files to, press:
a. The down arrow key
b. The right arrow key to select the hard disk drive, (E, F, G, H)

2-36

BACKUP

6. Choose to compare:
• All files in the hard disk's current directory that are on the back-up
diskettes by making no more selections and pressing the Do key
• Certain files that you specify:
-

Press the down arrow key to move the arrow to the third line.

Press the delete character key until the *. * is removed.

Type the file specification for the files you want to compare.

Press the Do key.

You can specify the /A or the /D switches here. See the section
called "Backup file specifier" earlier in this chapter for more information about these switches.
When the program starts you are asked to insert the first diskette. After
the files are compared between the diskette and the hard disk partition, you
are asked to insert another diskette.
As the BACKUP program verifies each file, the file name is displayed on
the screen. When the program is done, you see a brief message indicating
that the verify procedure is complete, and the program returns to the
Backup/Restore Main Screen.

2-37

BACKUP

Advanced Verify Procedures. Advanced User Verify Options are
available for the verify process. For example, you can choose to exclude
system files from the verify procedure. See screen 2-7 for all of the
advanced user verify options.

To use the advanced verify options:
1. Start the BACKUP program by typing:
A>BACKUP (Return )

2. Press one of the following:
• The up or down arrow key until the arrow points to option 3
• The 3 key
3. Press the Do key.
4. Press the Next Screen key.
Screen 2-7 displays the advanced verify options.

2-38

BACKUP

ItS-DOS Backup and Restore utilits Vl.2
Advanced User Verifs "tions

->
COIIpare disket te dr ive. •••••. ••. [none] ABC D
COIIpare hard disk dr i ve.. .. .. ... [none] E F G H
COllf'are file specifier ............. ""'1•..:..1_ _ _ _ _ _ __
COIIpare exclusion file specifier ••• ____- - - - - - NaJII! of bacl.up diskettes ••••••••••• BIl!lIL..
Exclude S9stl!ll files fl'Oll verifS ....... [No] Yes

Press the up arrow kes or down arrow kes to point to a line.
On iII9 line, press <Help> for infol'llation and instructions.
Press <IIo} to begin theverifs
Press <PreY Screen> for User Verifs "tiOllS.
Press <tIain Screen! (F9)} for llain Screen.

Screen 2-7. Advanced User Verify Options

5. Press the up or down arrow key to select a line.
6. Press the right arrow key to select an option within a line, or type a
value on the drawn line.
7. When you have specified all the information, press the Do key.
When the program starts you are asked to insert the first diskette. After
the files are compared between the diskette and the hard disk partition, you
are asked to insert another diskette.
As the BACKUP program verifies each file, the file name is displayed on
the screen. When the program is done, you see a brief message indicating
that the verify procedure is complete, and the program returns to the
Backup/Restore Main Screen.
The advanced verify options are similar to the advanced backup and restore
options as described on preceding pages.

2-39

BACKUP

Option 4. List the Names of Files on
Backup Diskettes
Option 4 of the BACKUP program allows you to list the names of all files
that you copied on a set of diskettes.
To list the files that are stored on the backup diskette:
1. Start the BACKUP program by typing:
A >BACKUP ( Return )

2. Press one of the following:
• The up or down arrow key so the arrow points to option 4
• The 4 key
3. Press the Do key.
The computer displays the directory options shown in Screen 2-8.

2-40

BACKUP

lIS-DOS IIad.up iIIId Restore utilits V1.2
Directo~ Options

Source diskette drive....... [none] ABC

Brackets surround selected options.
Press the up al'1'Oll kl!9 or down arrow kl!9 to point to a line.
lin ill!! line, press <Help} for inforwation iIIId instructions.
Press <IIo} to read the directo~.
Press <PreY Screen> or <JIain Screenl(F9l> for !lain Scl'l!l!ll.

Screen 2-8. Directory Options

4. To choose which diskette drive to list the file from, press:
a. The down arrow key
b. The right arrow key to select the the diskette drive (A, B, C, D)
5. Press the Do key.
The program asks you to insert a backup volume in the selected drive.
Then the program displays information about diskettes and the files on
these diskettes.
If you have a series of backup diskettes, you only need to insert the first
diskette to display a directory of all the files in the series.

2-41

BACKUP

Option 5. Set the Date and Time
Option 5 allows to to specify the date and time on the computer. This
option allows you to reset the date and the time that you specified when
you started MS-DOS.
To set the date and the time:
1. Start the BACKUP program by typing:
A>BACKUP ( Return )

2. Press one of the following:
• The up or down arrow key until the arrow points to option 5
• The 5 key
3. Press the Do key.
The computer displays the date and time options as shown in Screen
2-9.

2-42

BACKUP
ItS-DOS llaciup and RestoI'(! UtilitS Y1.2

Date and Till!
Please enter the current date and till!.
The foraat for date is:
1IIHId--s9
(Exallp Ie: 2-8-83)
The foraat for till! is:
hh:lIII:ss
(exallple: 16:30:00)
-}

T0da9's date ........ 09:09-84
Current till! ...........
10.....:1....6....
:1...
3_ _
Press the up arl'Oll Ites or _ arl'Oll Ites to point to a line.
On arI9 line, press <Help) for inforaation and instructions.
Press <Do) to set the date
Press <ltain Screen/(F9) for ltain Screen.

Screen 2-9. Date and Time

4. To enter the date:
a. Press the down arrow key to move to the "Today's date" line.
b. Use the delete character key to delete the current date.
c. Enter the month and day in two digits; enter the year in two or
four digits.
5. To enter the time:
a. Press the down arrow key to the "Current Time" line.
b. Use the delete character key to delete the current time.
c. Enter the hour, minutes, and seconds in one or two digits.
(Entering seconds is optional.)
6. To set the date and time, press the Do key.
2-43

BACKUP

Option 6. Exit from this Program
Option 6 of the BACKUP program allows you to leave the BACKUP program and return to the operating system.
To leave the BACKUP program from the Backup/Restore Main Screen:
1. Press one of the following:
• The down arrow key until the arrow points to option 6
• The 6 key
2. Press the Do key.
When you leave the BACKUP program you are returned to the operating system prompt.

BACKUP Command Line Instructions
You can use the BACKUP command line instructions to:
• Copy files from a hard disk to diskettes (called "backup" in this
guide). Backup is generally used to make copies of the files you created. If they are accidentally erased from the hard disk, you can copy
these files back to the hard disk. Hence, they are called "backup"
copies of the files.
• Copy files from diskettes to a hard disk (called "restore " in this
guide). Restore is generally used to copy back or "restore" files that
were accidentally erased from the hard disk.

2-44

BACKUP

This is the form of the BACKUP program to use if you do not want to use
the menu form. You simply type in a command after the A> prompt. You
should know exactly what operations you want to perform to use this form.
You cannot use all of the operations of the BACKUP program using this
form.
The basic operations you can use on the command line are:
• BACKUP
• RESTORE
• VERIFY
•

DIRECTORY

To use all of the options of the BACKUP program, you must use the menu
form. (See the section titled "BACKUP Menu Instructions".)

Forms. You can use the following forms at the command level for the
BACKUP program:
A>BACKUP [BACKUP] p:[filename.typ][/A
[/CHAHGED] (Retum )

ID] TO drv: [/ALL]

A>BACKUP RESTORE p: FROM drv:[filename.typ] (Retum )
A>BACKUP VERIFY p: WITH drv:[filename.tYP](Retum)
A>BACKUP DIRECTORY drv: (R~um)

2-45

BACKUP

Where:

Is a hard disk partition (E through H).

drY:

Is a diskette drive (A through D).

[filename.typ]

Is an optional file specifier or indirect file. Path
names can be included before the file name.

[fA]

Is an optional specification that causes specified
files in the current directory and all directories
below it to be included in the operation.

[fD]

Is an optional specification that causes specified
files in directories below but not including the
current directory to be included in the
operation.

[fALL]

Is an optional specification to copy all files in a
specified directory.

[fCHANGED]

Is an optional specification to copy only the files
that have changed since the last backup
operation.

2-46

BACKUP

BACKUP Restrictions
The following list describes some restrictions of the BACKUP program.
• The BACKUP program allows you to type only up to 32 characters in
file name and path name specifications. If you must specify a file name
and path name specification that exceeds 32 characters, you should
change your directory (with the CHDIR command) so the directory
that contains the file(s) you want to save, restore, or verify is now the
current directory. Do this BEFORE you run the BACKUP program.
For example, if the full path name and file name were:
\DIGITAL\SYSTEM\MSDOS\UTILITY\*.EXE

you would use the MS-DOS CHDIR command to make your current
directory "\DIGITAL\SYSTEM\MSDOS\UTILITY" before running
the BACKUP program Then, specify ,,* .EXE" as the file name to be
included in the operation.
• The BACKUP program can only display up to 50 characters in a file
name and path name specification. This means that when the BACKUP
program displays a file name and path name specification that contains
greater than 50 characters, it omits the characters following the fiftieth character. However, the program uses the full file name and path
name specification in performing the backup, restore, or verify operation despite the truncated display.
• If you include a very large number of files in a backup operation (250300 files), then the BACKUP program may not have enough memory
available to process all of them at once. The program displays a message to that effect if this situation occurs. You should then process
each sub-directory individually in multiple backup operations.
• If an unrecoverable error occurs during a backup, restore or verify
operation, the cursor may not be displayed on the screen when you
are returned to the operating system's prompt. To restore the cursor,
you must reset the computer.

2-47

BACKUP

• AVOID USING DISKETTES WITH WRITE-PROTECT TABS ON
THEM.
If you use a write-protected diskette on which to copy files during a
backup operation, the BACKUP program stops the operation. If the
BACKUP program copied files to any previous diskettes before it
encountered the write-protected diskette, the previous diskettes are
valid backup volumes. You can use them to restore the files they
contain. The only misleading information is in the directory of the
backup diskettes, which includes the files that the BACKUP program
could not copy onto the write-protected volume.

• It is possible, during a restore operation, to NOT have enough space
on your hard disk for the BACKUP program to transfer all the files.
This can happen if you have:
- Added or created new files on the hard disk
- Reduced the size of the partition
since you backed up the files you are attempting to restore. To
restore the file(s) if this situation occurs:
- Delete some files on the hard disk so all the files can be restored
- Repeat the Restore operation

2-48

CHKDSK

CHKDSK
Purpose
CHKDSK is an external command that scans the diskette in the specified
drive and checks it for errors.

Form
CHKDSK [drv:][filename.typ][/F][/V]{Rewm)

Instructions
CHKDSK should be used periodically on each diskette and hard disk to
check for errors in the directory. If errors are found, CHKDSK displays a
message, and then a status report. (See Chapter 5 for a list of CHKDSK
messages.)

Switches
The IF switch corrects errors you find with CHKDSK.
The IV switch displays messages while you are using CHKDSK.

Example
The following is an example of a status report:
393216
25600
204288
163328

bytes
bytes
bytes
bytes

total disk space
in 3 hidden files
in 18 user files
available on disk

65536 bytes total memory
53152 bytes free

2-49

CLS

CLS
Purpose
CLS is an internal command that clears the screen.

Form
CLS ( Retum )

Instructions
CLS causes the MS-DOS operating system to send the ANSI escape
sequence UK) [2J to your screen, which. then clears the screen.

2-50

COpy

COpy
Purpose
COPY is an internal command that copies one or more files from one diskette to another. If you prefer, you can give each copy a different name.
This command can also copy files to other locations on the same diskette.

Form
To copy files:
COPY
[drv:lfilename.typ[/Al[/Bl[drv:l[filename.typl[/Al[/Bl[/Vl(Rewm)

To concatenate files:
COPY [drv:lfilename.typ[/Al[/Bl + [drv:lfilename.typ[/Al[/Bl
[drv:lfilename.typ [/Al [/Bl[/Vl

Instructions
Copy files. If you do not specify the second [drv: 1 f i lename. typ, the
file is placed on the default drive with the original file name.
If you specify the second [drv: ]filename. typ, you can type it in one of
three ways:
• If you do not specify the second filename.typ, the copy is made to the
specified drive and has the same name as the original file name.
• If you specify only filename.typ in the second option, the original file
is copied to a file on the default drive with the original file name.
• If you specify both the drive and the filename.typ, the original file is
copied to that specified drive and filename.

2-51

COpy
If the first filename.typ option is on the default drive and you do not specify
the second filename.typ, the COPY command is stopped. The MS-DOS
operating system displays the following message:
File cannot be copied onto itself
o File(s) copied

The /V switch causes the operating system to verify that the sectors written on the destination diskette are recorded properly. Although there are
rarely recording errors when you run COpy, you can verify that critical
data has been correctly recorded. This option causes the COPY command
to run slower because the MS-DOS operating system checks each entry
recorded on the diskette.
The /A and the /B switches indicate that the files being processed are
ASCII or binary files. Each switch applies to the file name preceding it and
to all remaining files on the command line, until another /A or /B switch is
found.
When you use /A with a source file, the switch causes the file to be treated
as a text file. Data in the file is copied up to, but not including, the first
end-of-file mark, (Ctrl/Z). The rest of the file is not copied.
When you use /B with a source file, the switch causes the entire file to be
copied, including any end-of-file mark.
When you use /A with a target file, /A causes an end-of-file character to be
added as the last character of the file.
When you use /B with a target file, the /B causes no end-of-file character to
be added.

2-52

COpy

Concatenate Files. The COpy command also allows file concatenation
Goining) while copying. Concatenation is accomplished by simply listing any
number of files as options to COpy, separated by +. For example:
A)COPV

A.XVZ+B.MEM+B:C.TXT BIGFILE.TXT(Rawm)

This command concatenates files named A.XYZ, B.MEM, and B:C.TXT and
places them in the file called BIGFILE.TXT on the default drive.
To combine several files into one file, you can also use wildcards. For
example:
A)COPV *.LST COMBIH.PRH(Rewm)

This command takes all files with a file type of .LST and combines them
into a file named COMBIN.PRN.
Avoid concatenating when one of the source file names has the same file
name as the destination file name. For example, the following command is
incorrect if ALL.LST already exists, unless ALL.LST is the first *.LST file
in the diskette directory.
A)COPV *.LST ALL.LST(Rawm)

The problem is not detected until after the original ALL.LST has been
copied over by the new ALL.LST. At this point the original ALL.LST is
destroyed.
The following command appends all *.LST files, except ALL.LST, to
ALL.LST:
A)COPV ALL.LST + *.LST

2-53

COpy

This command is the correct way to concatenate when one of the source
file names has the same file name as the destination file name.
The following command copies the file B:ABC. TXT to the default drive and
assigns a new date and time.
A>COPV B:ABC.TXT +

The following command only changes the date and time, leaving the file in
place:
A>COPV B:ABC.TXT +

The commas define the end of the source file name. They are necessary
because the COPY command expects another file name after the + sign.
When you concatenate files, the default switch is IA.

2-54

COpy

Examples
1. The following example copies a file named REPORT. TXT on the diskette in drive A to the diskette in drive B. The file name does not
change.
A>COPV REPORT.TXT B:(R~um)

2. In the following example, for each file found matching *.LST, that file
is combined with the corresponding .REF file. The result is a file with
the same file name but with the file type .PRN. Thus, FILEl.LST will
be combined with FILE1.REF to form FILE1.PRN; then XYZ.LST is
combined with XYZ.REF to form XYZ.PRN; and so on.
A>COPV *.LST+*.REF

*.PRH(R~um)

3. The following COpy command combines all files matching *.LST, then
all files matching *.REF, into one file named COMBIN.PRN:
A>COPV *.LST+*.REF COMBIM.PRH(R~um)

4. The following command concatenates the file names "A. COM" ,
"B.XYZ", and "B:C. TXT". The MS-DOS operating system copies:
• The entire file "A.COM" including any end-of-file mark
• The file "B.XYZ" up to but not including any end-of-file mark
• The file "B:C.TXT" up to but not including any end-of-file mark
The three files are then placed in the file named "BIGFILE. TXT".
A>COPV A.COM/B + B.XVZ/A + B:C.TXT BIGFILE.TXT(R~um)

2-55

DATE

DATE
Purpose
DATE is an internal command that lets you enter or change the date
known to the operating system. This date is recorded in the directory for
any files you create or alter.
You can change the date from your terminal or from a batch file.

Form
DATE [mm-dd-YY](Retum)

NOTE
The date format above is for the United States.
The form for the DATE command depends on the
country you specify in the CONFIG.SYS file on
the MS-DOS Version 2.11 diskette. See Appendix
D of this guide for information on how to change
the format.

2-56

DATE

Instructions
If you type DATE, the DATE command displays the following message:
Current date i5 mm-dd-yy
Enter new date:

Press the Return key if you do not want to change the date shown. You can
also type a particular date after the DATE command, as in:
A>DATE 3-9-81

In this case, you do not have to answer the "Enter new date: " question.
Enter the new date using numerals only; you cannot use letters.
The options allowed are:
mm = 1 - 12
dd = 1 - 31
yy = 80 - 99 or 1980 - 2099
You can separate the date, month, and year entries by hyphens (-), periods
(.) or slashes (/). The MS-DOS operating system changes months and years
correctly, whether the month has 31, 30, 29, or 28 days. The operating
system handles leap years.

2-57

DEL (DELETE)

DEL (DELETE)
Purpose
DEL is an internal command that deletes all files with the designated
filename.typ. You can also use ERASE instead of DEL to delete files.
ERASE is discussed in this chapter.

Form
DEL [drv:Jfilename.tYPCRetum)

Instructions
If you use wildcards for the file name and file type, such as *.*, the prompt
"Are you sure?" is displayed.
If you type Y, then all files are deleted as requested. DEL performs the
same function as ERASE.

Example
In the following example, the DEL command erases all the files from the
diskette in drive B.
A)DEL B:*.*(Retum)

Press the Y key after the computer displays "Are you sure?". Then all the
files on the diskette in drive B are erased.

2-58

DIR (DIRECTORY)

DIR (DIRECTORY)
Purpose
DIR is an internal command that lists the files in a directory.

Form
DIR [drv:][filename.tYP][/P][/W](Rewm)

Instructions
If you just type DIR, all directory entries on the default drive are displayed.
If only the drive specification is given (DIR drY:), all entries on the diskette
in the specified drive are displayed. If you type only a file name with no file
type (DIR filename), then all files with the designated file name on the
diskette in the default drive are displayed.
If you designate a file specification (DIR drv:filename.typ), all files with the
file name specified on the diskette in the drive you specified are displayed.
In all cases, files are listed with their size and with the time and date of
their last modification.
You can use the wildcard characters? and * (question mark and asterisk) in
the file name option. Table 2-6 lists the DIR command equivalents.
Table 2·6. DIR Command Equivalents
Command

Equivalent

DIR

DIR *.*

DIR FILENAME

DIR FILENAME.*

DIR .EXT

DIR *.EXT

DIR.

DIR *.

2-59

DIR (DIRECTORY)

Switches
You can use two switches with the DIR command. They are:
• The IP switch. The /P switch selects page mode. When you use IP,
the directory display pauses after the screen is filled. To resume display of output, press any key.
• The IW switch. The IW switch selects wide display. When you use IW,
only file names are displayed. The file size and time and date of last
modification are not displayed. Files names are displayed five to a line.

2-60

DISKCOPY

DISKCOPY
Purpose
DISKCOPY is an external command that copies the contents of the diskette
in the source drive to the diskette in the destination drive.

Form
DISKCOPY [drv1:I[drv2:ICRewm)

Instructions
The first drive option (drv!:) is the source drive that contains the diskette
you want to copy. The second drive option (drv2:) is the destination drive
that contains the empty diskette.
If you omit both options, a single-drive copy operation is performed on the
default drive.
If you omit the second option, the default drive is used as the destination
drive.

You can specify the same drives or you can specify different drives. Typing
the same drive name for drv! and drv2, tells the MS-DOS operating system
to copy the contents of one diskette to another diskette using only one
drive. The MS-DOS operating system prompts you to insert each diskette
at the appropriate times. DISKCOPY waits for you to press the Return key
before continuing.

2-61

DISKCOPY

The diskette in the destination drive should have been previously formatted.
After copying, DISKCOPY displays:
Copy complete
Copy another (YIN)?

If you do not wish to make another copy, press N.
If you press Y, the MS-DOS operating system prompts you to insert the
proper diskettes. The next copy is performed on the same drives that you
originally specified.

Because diskette space is not allocated sequentially, diskettes that have had
a lot of file creation and deletion activity can have fragmented storage
areas. A file can be separated into several parts and located in several
places on the diskette. The first free space (sector) found is the next space
(sector) allocated, regardless of its location on the diskette.
A fragmented diskette can cause poor performance due to delays involved
in finding, reading, or writing a file. If this is the case, first prepare a
diskette, using the FORMAT command and then use the COpy command,
instead of DISKCOPY, to copy your diskette. This eliminates the
fragmentation.
The following example copies all files from the diskette in drive A: to the
diskette in drive B:.
A>COPY A:*.* B:/V(Retum)
A>

2-62

ERASE

ERASE
Purpose
ERASE is an internal command that deletes all files with the filename.typ
you specify.

Form
ERASE

[drv:]filename.typ(R~um)

Instructions
If you use the wildcards *. *, the prompt, "Are you sure? " is displayed. If
you type Y, all files are deleted as requested. You can also use the DEL
command to erase files.

Example
In the following example, the ERASE command removes all the files from
the diskette in drive B.
A)ERASE B:*.*{Retum)

Press the Y key after the computer displays "Are you sure?". Then all the
files on the diskette in drive B are erased.

2-63

FORMAT

FORMAT
Purpose
FORMAT is an external command that prepares (formats) the diskette so
you can copy files to it. You need to prepare all new diskettes before you
can copy individual files to the diskette.

Form
FORMAT drv:[ 15][

II](R~um)

Instructions
This command prepares (formats) the directory on a new, empty diskette.
The drive designation is required. You cannot format a diskette in the
default drive.
The FORMAT command allows you to assign a volume label to a diskette.
A volume label is used to identify diskettes; it is like a name tag for the
diskette. A volume label consists of from one to eleven characters. You can
use all acceptable files name characters in a volume label.

Switches
The /S switch copies the operating system files from the diskette in the
default drive to the newly formatted diskette.
The files are copied in the following order:
1. IO.SYS

2. MSDOS.SYS
3. COMMAND.COM
The /1 switch physically formats a non-RX50 diskette.

2-64

MDRIVE

MDRIVE
Purpose
A memory drive is like adding an extra disk drive to your computer. The
MS-DOS operating system uses the memory (that you allocate) as though it
were a diskette drive. Any MS-DOS operating system commands that reference or use a diskette drive are valid for the memory drive.
You use the external command, MDRIVE, to set the amount of memory
allocated to the memory drive.
Because a memory drive does not depend on the mechanical rotation of a
diskette, the reading and writing operations on a memory drive are faster
than on a diskette drive.

Form
MDRIVE [ n ] (Retum )

Instructions
MDRIVE allows you to allocate memory in 64K byte pages.
The first 128K bytes of memory are reserved for the MS-DOS operating
system and application programs. To use the MDRIVE command successfully, you must have at least 192K bytes of memory.

You MUST always configure MDRIVE from the drive that you will subsequently start the operating system from.

2-65

MDRIVE

Example
The following example shows how to allocate memory for (or configure) the
memory drive when you do not know how much memory you can allocate:

NOTE
The MDRIVE examples assume that a total of
320K bytes of memory are available. The 320K
byte total includes the 128K bytes from the system unit and a 192K byte memory option.
A) MDR I VE ( Return )
Rainbow Mdrive Configurator Ver5. 2.0
Your Mdrive 15 currently di5abled.
Enter the number of 64 Kbyte page5 (0-3): 2
Memory drive configured. Reboot 5y5tem to activate.

You can optionally specify the number of 64K byte pages as n on the same
line that invokes MDRIVE. The following example allocates the same
amount of memory as the previous example:
A)MDR IVE 2 ( Return )
Rainbow Mdrive Configura tor Ver5. 2.0
Memory drive configured. Reboot 5y5tem to activate.

The name of the memory drive depends on whether you have the hard disk
option. If you do not have the hard disk option, the memory drive name is
E. If you do have the hard disk option, the name of the memory drive
depends on the number of hard disk partitions that you allocated to the
MS-DOS operating system. For each partition allocated to the MS-DOS
operating system, the memory drive name is advanced along the alphabet
by one character. Thus, a hard disk with two partitions advances the
memory drive name to G.
2-66

MDRIVE
The following example assumes that you do not have a hard disk option. To
make the memory drive the default drive type:
A>E: (Return)
E>

After the memory drive is configured, you must restart the MS-DOS
operating system. This allows the MS-DOS operating system to recognize
the new memory allocation size for the memory drive.
Each time you restart the MS-DOS operating system, the memory drive is
blank. It does not contain any files. If you want to run an application
program from the memory drive, you must use the COPY command to copy
the file(s) to the memory drive.
You can retrieve memory allocated to the memory drive by specifying zero
64K byte pages as in the following example:
E>A: (Return)
A>MDRIVE o (Return )

The Mdrive will be di5abled at next 5y5tem boot.
A>

NOTE
If you have saved any new or modified data on the
memory drive, you must use the COpy command
to save the data on a another drive. If you turn
the Rainbow computer off, the data in the
memory drive is lost.
CAUTION
Some application programs require more than
128K bytes of memory. If you intend to run an
application that requires more than 128K bytes of
memory, then you must allow more memory for
the application by allocating less memory for the
memory drive.
2-67

PRINT
Purpose
PRINT is an external command that prints a text file on a printer. You can
use other MS-DOS commands while the file is printing.

Form
PRINT [[drv:]filename.typ[ tT[ filename.typ te][ filename.typ
tP]]] (Return)

Instructions
Use the PRINT command only if you have a printer attached to your
computer.
The first time you use the PRINT command after starting the MS-DOS
operating system, it asks you for the name of the list device, the default
being "PRN", which is the normal printer port. Press the Return key to
continue.

2-68

Switches
Table 2-7 describes the switches you can use with the PRINT command.
Table 2-7. PRINT Command Switches
SWitch

Usage

Removes all files waiting to be printed. A message to this effect
is displayed on the screen.

Turns on cancel mode. The filename.typ preceding the Ie switch
and all filename.typ entries following it in the print queue are
removed from the print queue until you issue a /P switch.

Turns on print mode. The preceding filename.typ and all
following filename.typ entries are added to the print queue until
you issue a Ie switch.

The PRINT command with no switches displays the contents of the print
queue on your screen without affecting the queue.

Examples
The following example removes the files waiting to be printed.
A)PRINT IT(Retum)

The following example removes the files waiting to be printed and prepares
for printing all files on the default drive with the file type ASM.
A)PR I NT IT *. ASM (Return )

The following example removes all files with the extension .ASM from the
print queue and adds the files REPORT.TXT and MONTH.LST to the print
queue.
A)PRINT *.ASM/C REPORT.TXT/P MONTH.LST

2-69

RDCPM

RDCPM
Purpose
RDCPM is an external command that allows you to read CP/M-86/80 files
on RX50 diskettes while using the MS-DOS operating system. RDCPM
cannot read CP/M-86/80 files from the hard disk.

NOTE
The RDCPM command can also read DECMATE
II CP/M-80 diskettes and PROFESSIONAL
325/350 CP/M-80 diskettes.

Form
RDCPM operation b:[filename.typ] [a:][path]{Rewm)

Where:
operation

Is the name of the RDCPM function that you
want to do. RDCPM has three operations:
DIR
READ
TYPE

Is the drive where you insert the CP/M-86/80
diskette.

filename. typ

Is the optional CP/M-86/80 file specification.
The default file specification is *. *.

Is the drive where you insert the MS-DOS
diskette. If you omit the MS-DOS drive
specifier, the MS-DOS file is created on the
current default drive. You can only this option
when you use the READ function.

2-70

RDCPM
path

Is the optional MS-DOS directory specification,
not including a file specification. The MS-DOS
file you create will always have the same file
name and file type as the CP/M-86/80 file. You
can only this option when you use the READ
function.

Instructions
DIR Option. If you specify the DIR function with the RDCPM command,
the MS-DOS operating system displays a directory of the files on the
CP/M-86/80 diskette in the specified drive.
READ Option. If you specify the READ function with the RDCPM command, the MS-DOS operating system copies all files from the CP/M-86/80
diskette (that match the file specification) to the directory described by
"path" on the MS-DOS diskette.
TYPE Option. If you specify the TYPE function with the RDCPM command, the MS-DOS operating system displays the contents of files on the
CP/M-86/80 diskette that match the file specification on the screen.

2-71

RDCPM

Examples
1. The following command displays the directory of files on the
CP/M-86/80 diskette in drive B that match the file specification,
TESTFILE. *.
A>RDCPM DIR 8:TESTFILE.*(Retum)

2. The following command copies the file(s) named TESTFILE. * from
drive B to the directory REPORT\JAN in drive A.
A>RDCPM READ 8:TESTFILE.* A:REPORT\JAH(Retum}

3. The following command types the file(s) named TESTFILE. * (from
drive B) on your screen.
A>RDCPM TVPE 8:TESTFILE.*(Retum)

2-72

REN (RENAME)

REN (RENAME)
Purpose
REN is an internal command that changes the name of a file to the new file
name.

Form
REM [drv:]oldfilename.typ

newfilename.typ(R~urn)

Instructions
The first option (oldfilename.typ) must be given a drive designation if the
diskette resides in a drive other than the default drive. Any drive designation for the second option (newfilename.typ) is ignored. The file remains on
the diskette where it currently resides.
You can use the wildcard characters in either option. All files matching the
old name are renamed. If wildcard characters appear in the new name,
corresponding character positions will not be changed.

Examples
1. The following command changes the names of all files with the .LST
file type to similar names with the .PRN file type:
REM

o,.

LST

o,.

PRM ( Return)

2. In the next example, REN renames the file ABODE on drive B: to
ADOBE:
REM 8:A80DE ?D?8?(Retum)

The file remains on drive B:.

2-73

SET

SET
Purpose
SET is an internal command that sets one string value equivalent to
another string value for use in later programs.

Form
SET

[5tring1=[5tring2]](R~um)

Instructions
Use this command only if you want to set values that are used by programs
you have written. An application program can check all values that are set
with the SET command by issuing SET with no options.
If you type the SET command with no string specified, then the current
environment strings are displayed.
If you specify 5 t r i ng1- and do not specify 5 t r i ng2, then the entire entry
5trlng1-5trlng2 is removed from the environment.

2-74

SET

Examples
1. The following example sets the variable TTY to the value VT52 until

you change it with another SET command.

2. You can also use the SET command in batch processing. In this way,
you can define your replaceable parameters with names instead of
numbers. If your batch file contains the statement "LINK %FILE%,"
you can set the name that the operating system uses for that variable
with the SET command. The command:
A)SET F I LE=DOMORE (Return)

replaces the batch file parameter %FILE% with the file name
DaMORE. Therefore, you do not need to edit each batch file to
change the replaceable parameter names. Note that when you use text
(instead of numbers) as replaceable parameters in batch files, the
name must end with a percent sign.

2-75

SETPORT

SETPORT
SETPORT is an external command that allows you to view or change the
current settings for:
• The printer connector (printer parameters)
• The communication connector (modem parameters)
• The extended communication connector A (auxiliary parameters)
• The LA50 printer
• The LAIOO printer
• The LQP02 printer
For the connectors, the SETPORT command allows you to access features
that are not available in the Rainbow's Set-Up. For the DIGITAL printers,
the SETPORT command enables you to set features that are not directly
accessible through the controls on the printer.

Form
SETPORT ( Return )

Instructions
After you type the SETPORT command, the computer displays the
SETPORT Main Menu. From this menu you can select a group of parameters for a connector or a printer to view or change. See the following
sections for information on how to view and change the SETPORT
parameters.

2-76

SETPORT
Viewing the SETPORT Parameters. To select a group of parameters,

press the up arrow key or the down arrow key so the arrow points to your
choice. Then press the Do key.
The computer displays a set of parameters specific to the group you
selected.

NOTE
The parameters displayed on the printer menu,
the modem menu and auxiliary port menu reflect
the current default settings of Rainbow's Set-Up.
If you changed a Set-Up parameter and did not
save it by pressing (Shift/S ), the change is not
reflected in the SETPORT program.
Changing the SETPORT Parameters. To change a parameter:
1. Press the up arrow key or the down arrow key so the reverse video

bar highlights your choice.
2. Press the left arrow key or the right arrow key until the computer
displays the setting you choose.
When you press the left arrow key or the right arrow key for the
printer, modem and auxiliary port parameters, the computer displays:
Press <Do> to set

2-77

SETPORT

For the new settings to take effect, you must press the Do key after
you select any new settings and before you move to another
SETPORT menu or leave the command. The changes are not reflected
in Rainbow's Set-Up.

NOTE
The computer remembers the changes you made
to any printer, modem, or auxiliary port
parameters until you reset or turn off the
computer. If you change a parameter for a
printer, the printer remembers the change until it
is turned off or the parameter is reset. The
SETPORT menus for the LASO, LAIOO, LQP02
printers always display the same set of parameters
when you start the SETPORT command.
3. To view another group of parameters, press the Next Screen key or
the Prev Screen key. You can then change any of these parameters by
following the previous instructions.
Leaving SETPORT. Mter you select (and set, if necessary) any new
parameters, press the Exit key to leave the SETPORT command.

Table 2-8 describes each group of SETPORT parameters that you can
change.

2-78

SETPORT
Table 2-8. SETPORT Parameters
Parameters

Purpose

Communications Connector

To select the data settings for the printer connector on
the back of the system unit. These settings must match
the settings of your printer. You may need to change
these settings if you use a non-DIGITAL printer.

Modem Connector

To select the data settings for the communications
connector on the back of the system unit. These
settings must match the settings of your modem or
other computer.

Extended Communication
Option Connector

To select the data settings for the extended
communication connector A. To use these parameters
your computer must have an extended communications
option. You can only select settings for extended
communication connector A with the SETPORT
command.

LA50 Remote Setup
LAIOO Remote Setup
LQP02 Remote Setup

To select the printer's settings. The list of parameters
differs for each printer based on the printer's
characteristics. The SETPORT command allows you to
specify these parameters on its menus rather than
sending escape sequences to the printer.

For more information on the parameters for the printer connector, the
modem connector and the auxiliary port connector, see the Rainbow
Owner's Manual. For more information on the parameters for the LA50,
the LA100, and the LQP02 printers, see the appropriate printer manual.

Example
The following example shows you how to change the character quality from
normal to enhanced for an LA50 printer.
1. Type:
A)SETPORT( Return)

The computer displays the Setport Main Menu (Screen 2-10).

2-79

SETPORT

Please select the ~ of SETPIIIT parillll!ters 90U wish to view or change •••
-) 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Printer Comector Parillll!ters
CoMunication Comector Parillll!ters
Extended CoMunication Option Parillll!ters
LA50 ReIIOte Setup
LA100 R8IIJte Setup
L0P02 ReIIOte Setup

To select an optilll, 111M! the pointer II!! pressing the up arl'Oll kl!!l, or the
down arl'OII kI!!f, then press <Do>.
To exit !iE1PIIIT, press <Exit).
Screen 2·10. SETPORT Main Menu

2. Press the down arrow key three times until the arrow points to
"LASO Remote Setup". Then press the Do key.
The computer displays the LASO Remote Setup menu. This menu lists
the current default settings for the LASO printer.
3. Press the down arrow key four times until the reverse video bar
highlights the "Print Density" parameter.
4. Press the left arrow key so that the print density changes to
"enhanced" .
S. Press the Do key.
6. Press the Exit key to return to the SETPORT Main Menu.
The next time you print a document, it will be printed in enhanced quality
characters rather than in normal quality characters.

2-80

SYS (SYSTEM)

SYS (SYSTEM)
Purpose
SYS is an external command that transfers the MS-DOS hidden system files
from the diskette in the default drive to the diskette in the drive you
specify by drv:.

Form
SYS drv: ( Return )

Instructions
SYS is normally used to update the operating system or to place the operating system on a formatted diskette that contains no files. You must supply
an entry for drv:
If IO.SYS and MSDOS.SYS are on the destination diskette, they must take
up the same amount of space on the diskette as the new system will need.
For example, you cannot transfer system files from an MS-DOS Version
2.11 diskette to an MS-DOS Version 2.01 diskette. You must reformat the
MS-DOS Version 2.01 diskette with the MS-DOS Version 2.11 FORMAT
command before using the SYS command.

NOTE
You can transfer system files from an MS-DOS
Version 2.11 diskette to an MS-DOS Version 2.05
diskette. But we recommend that you reformat
the MS-DOS Version 2.05 diskette with the
MS-DOS Version 2.11 FORMAT command so that
you update the diskette completely.

2-81

SYS (SYSTEM)
The transferred files are copied in the following order:
1. IO.SYS

2. MSDOS.SYS
IO.SYS and MSDOS.SYS are both hidden files that are not displayed when
the DIR command is executed. COMMAND. COM (the command processor)
is not transferred. You must use the COPY command to transfer
COMMAND.COM.

2-82

TIME

TIME
Purpose
TIME is an internal command that displays and sets the time.

Form
TIME [hh:mm] (Rewrn )

NOTE
The time format above is for the United States.
The format for the TIME command depends on
the country you specify in the CONFIG.SYS file
on the MS-DOS Version 2.11 diskette. See
Appendix D of this guide for information on how
to change the format.

Instructions
If you type the TIME command only, the following message is displayed:
Current time i5 hh:mm:55.cc
Enter new time:

Press the Return key if you do not want to change the time shown. You
can type a new time to the TIME command as:
TIME B:20(Retum)

Type the new time using numerals only; letters are not allowed. The
allowed options are:
• hh = 00 - 23
• mm = 00 - 59
Separate the hour and minute entries by colons (:) or periods O. You do
not have to type the ss (seconds) or cc (hundredths of seconds) options.
2-83

TYPE

TYPE
Purpose
TYPE is an internal command that displays the contents of the file on the
screen.

Form
TYPE

[drv:]filename.typ(R~urn)

Instructions
Use the TYPE command to look at a file without modifying it. (Use DIR to
find the name of a file and EDLIN to alter the contents of a file.) TYPE
expands tabs to spaces that are consistent with tab stops at every eighth
column. Do not display binary files with a TYPE command because a display of binary files causes control characters (such as Ctrl/Z) to be sent to
your computer, including bells, form feeds, and escape sequences.

2-84

VER

VER
Purpose
VER is an internal command that prints the MS-DOS operating system
version number.

Form
VER ( Retum )

Instructions
If you want to know what version of the MS-DOS operating system you
are using, type VER. The version number is displayed on your screen.

2-85

VERIFY

VERIFY
Purpose
VERIFY is an internal comm~ that turns the verify switch on or off when
writing to a diskette. Whewyou turn on the verify switch, the MS-DOS
operating system tells you that a file was written correctly and has no bad
sectors.

Form
VERIFY [OHIOFF1(RMwn)

Instructions
This command is identical with the COPY command's IV switch. If you
want to verify that all files are written correctly to a diskbtte, you can use
the VERIFY command to tell the MS-DOS operating system to verify that
your files are intact (no bad sectors, for example). The MS-DOS operating
system performs a VERIFY each time you write data to a diskette. You
receive a message only if the MS-DOS operating system was unable to
successfully write your data to diskette.
VERIFY ON remains in effect until you change it in a program by using the
SET VERIFY command, or until you issue a VERIFY OFF command to the
MS-DOS operating system.
If you want to know what the current setting of VERIFY is, type VERIFY
with no options.

2-86~

VOL (VOLUME)

VOL (VOLUME)
Purpose
VOL is an internal command that displays a diskette volume label, if a
label exists.

Form
VOL [drv:](Retum)

Instructions
This command displays the volume label of the diskette in drive you specify. If no drive is specified, the MS-DOS operating system prints the volume label of the diskette in the default drive.
If the diskette does not have a volume label, VOL displays:
Volume in drive x has no label

2-87

3
Editing Keys

This chapter discusses:
• Special editing keys
• Control characters
You can use special editing keys and control keys to perform some operations on the command line and to create documents with an MS-DOS program called an editor. This chapter describes how to use the special editing
keys and the control characters for use on the command line. Chapter 4
discusses how to use the editing keys and the control characters with the
editor.

3-1

Editing Keys

Special Editing Keys
The special editing keys deserve particular emphasis because they differ
from the way in which most operating systems handle the way commands
are entered. You do not have to type the same sequence of keys repeatedly, because the last command line is placed in a special storage area
called a template.
The special editing keys allow you to:
• Repeat a command line by pressing two keys simultaneously
• Edit and retry the command when you make an error, without retyping the entire command line
• Edit and execute a command line that is similar to a preceding command with a minimum of typing
When you type a command to the MS-DOS operating system and press the
the Return key, the command is automatically sent to the command processor. At the same time, a copy of this command is sent to the template,
which allows you to recall the command or modify it using the special
editing keys.
Table 3-1 lists the special editing keys. Each of these keys is more fully
described in Chapter 4, Creating and Changing Documents.

3-2

Editing Keys
Table 3-1. Special Editing Keys

Key

Editing Function

Copies one character from the template to the
command line
Copies characters up to the character specified in the
template and puts these characters on the command
line
Copies all remaining characters in the template to the
command line
Skips over (does not copy) a character in the template

( Remove)

Skips over (does not copy) the characters in the
template up to the character specified
Cancels the current input; leaves the template
unchanged
( Insert Here )

Enters/exits insert mode

(Resume)

Makes the new line the new template
Inserts an end-of-file character (Ctrl/Z) in the new
template

Figure 3-1 shows the location of these keys on the keyboard.
Resume

Cancel

Exit

Find

Insert Here

Remove

EJEJEJLJ
[]~[][]

[][][]O
[][][l]D"·'

CJD

Select

Right Arrow

Figure 3-1. Editing Keys

3-3

Editing Keys

Examples
These examples show you how to use the editing keys at the command line.
Chapter 4 shows you how to use the editing keys with the MS-DOS text
editor.
If you type the following command:
DIR PROG.COM

the MS-DOS operating system displays information about the file
PROG.COM on your screen. The command line is also saved in the template. To repeat the command, just press two keys:

The repeated command is displayed on the screen as shown below:
DIR PROG.COM

Notice that pressing the Do key causes the contents of the template to be
sent to the command line; pressing the Return key causes the command
line to be executed.
If you want to display information about a file named PROG.ASM, you can
use the contents of the template and type:
( Select) C

Pressing the Select key followed by the letter C copies all characters from
the template to the command line, up to but not including the character
"C". The operating system displays:
DIR PROG.

Now type:
ASM

3-4

Editing Keys

The result is:
DIR PROG.ASM

The command line DIR PROG.ASM is now in the template and ready to be
sent to the command processor for execution. To do this, press the Return
key.
Now assume that you want to execute the following command:
TYPE PROG.ASM

To do this, type:
TYPE ( Insert Here ) ~ ~ ( Return )

Notice that when you are typing, the characters are entered directly into
the command line and overwrite corresponding characters in the command
line and template. This automatic replacement feature is turned off when
you press the Insert Here key. Thus, the characters "TYPE" replace the
characters "DIR " in the template. To insert a space between "TYPE" and
"PROG.ASM", press the Insert Here key and then the space bar. Finally,
to copy the rest of the template to the command line, press the Do key and
then the Return key. The command TYPE PROG.ASM has been processed
by the operating system, and the template becomes TYPE PROG.ASM.
If you had misspelled TYPE as BYTE, an error would have occurred.
Instead of aborting the whole command, you can save the misspelled line,
before you press the Return key, by creating a new template with the
Resume key:
BYTE PROG.ASM( Resume)

You could then edit this command by typing:

3-5

Editing Keys

The right arrow key copies a single character from the template to the
command line. The resulting command line is then the command that you
want:
TYPE PROG.ASM

As an alternative, you can use the same template containing BYTE
PROG.ASM and then use the Remove and Insert Here keys to achieve the
same result:
( Remove ) ( Remove) a:) (Insert Here) YP C2i)

Table 3-2 shows how the command line is affected as you type.
Table 3-2. Effect of Commands on Command Line
Keys

Screen

Effect On Command Line

( Remove)

Skips over 1st template character

( Remove)

Skips over 2nd template character
Copies 3rd template character

T
( Insert Here)

TYP

TYPE PROG.ASM

Inserts characters
Copies rest of template

Notice that the Remove key does not affect the command line. It affects
the template by deleting the first character. Similarly, the Find key deletes
characters in the template, up to but not including a given character.

3-6

Editing Keys

Control Character Functions
A control character function is a function that affects the command line.
The Ctrl key (control key) is a special key that is used in conjunction with
certain other keys (see Figure 3-1 for the location of the Ctrl key). When
you press the Ctrl key simultaneously with another key, a simple command
is sent to the operating system that affects the command line.
Table 3-3 lists the control character keys and their functions.
Remember that when you type a control character, such as Ctrl/C, you
must hold down the control key, (labeled Ctrl on the keyboard), and then
press the C key at the same time.
Table 3-3. Control Character Keys and Their Functions
Control Character

Function
Turns on and off echoing of output to line printer.
Stops current command.
Removes the last character from command line, and
erases character from screen.
Inserts physical end-of-line, but does not empty
command line. Use the LF key Oine feed) to extend the
current logical line beyond the physical limits of one
screen.
Turns on and off terminal output to line printer.
Stops output display on the screen. Press any key to
resume.
Cancels the current line; empties the command line;
and then outputs a back slash (\), carriage return, and
line feed. The template used by the special editing
commands is not affected.

3-7

4
Creating and Changing
Documents

This chapter describes how to use an editor. An editor is a type of program
that lets you create, change and display memos, reports, and other documents. The MS-DOS operating system's editor is called EDLIN.
This chapter is divided into four sections:
• Section 1 tells you how to start EDLIN.
• Section 2 describes how to use the special editing keys introduced in
Chapter 3.
• Section 3 describes how to use EDLIN commands and options.
• Section 4 lists the EDLIN commands.

4-1

Creating and Changing Documents

What You Can Do with EDLIN
You can use EDLIN to:
• Create new files and save them
• Update existing files and save both the updated and original files
• Delete, edit, insert, and display lines
• Search for, delete, or replace text within one or more lines

What Is a Line Editor?
EDLIN is a line editor. A line editor lets you create and edit files line by
line. EDLIN is divided into lines; each line holds up to 253 characters.
EDLIN generates line numbers and displays them during the editing process for your convenience. Line numbers are not actually stored in the
saved file.
Lines are always numbered consecutively. When you insert lines, all line
numbers advance automatically by the number of lines inserted. When you
delete lines, all line numbers decrease automatically by the number of lines
you deleted.

4-2

Creating and Changing Documents

Section 1
Starting EDLIN
To start EDLIN, type:
EDL I N filename. typ (Return)

Creating a New File
If you are creating a new file, filename.typ should be the name of the file
you wish to create. If EDLIN does not find this file on the diskette, EDLIN
creates a new file with the name you specify. The following message and
prompt are displayed:
New file

Notice that the prompt for EDLIN is an asterisk (*).
When you see the prompt, EDLIN is ready to accept commands.
To begin entering text, you must enter the Insert command to insert lines.
The Insert command is discussed in Section 4 of this chapter.

4-3

Creating and Changing Documents

Using an Existing File
If you want to change (or edit) an existing file, filename.typ should be the
name of the file you want to change. When EDLIN finds the file on the
designated or default drive, the file is loaded into memory.
• If the entire file can be loaded into memory, EDLIN displays the following message on your screen:
End of input file

You can then edit the file using EDLIN editing commands.
• If the file is too large to be loaded into memory, EDLIN continues to
load lines until memory is 3/4 full and then displays the * prompt. You
can now edit the portion of the file that is in memory.

To edit the remainder of the file, you must save some of the edited
lines on the diskette to free memory using the Write command. Then
use the Append command to load the unedited lines from the diskette
into memory.
When you complete the editing session, save the original (old) and the
revised (new) files by using the End command. The End command is discussed later in this chapter. The original file is renamed with a file type of
.BAK, and the revised file has the file name and file type you specify in the
EDLIN command. The original .BAK file is not erased until the end of the
editing session, or until diskette space is needed by the editor, EDLIN.
Do not try to edit a file with a file type of .BAK because EDLIN assumes
that any .BAK file is a backup file. If you find it necessary to edit such a
file, rename the file with another file type (using the RENAME command
discussed in Chapter 2), then start EDLIN and specify the new
filename. typo

4-4

Creating and Changing Documents

Section 2
Using Special Editing Keys
The special editing keys and template discussed in Chapter 3 can be used
to edit your text files. These keys are discussed in detail in this section.
Table 4-1 summarizes the commands, codes, and functions. Descriptions of
the special editing keys follow the table.
Table 4-1. Special Editing Keys
Key

Function

Description

Copies one character

Copies one character from the template to
the new line.

( Select )

Copies up to
character

Copies all characters from the template to
the new line, up to the character specified

(]!)

Copies template

Copies all remaining characters in the
template to the screen

( R_ove )

Skips one character

Does not copy (skips over) a character

( Find )

Skips up to character

Does not copy (skips over) the characters
in the template, up to the character
specified

( Cancel)

Quits input

Voids the current input; leaves the
template unchanged

( Insert Ha.. )

Insert mode

Enters/exits insert mode

( Insert Hare )

Replace mode

Turns insert mode off; this is the default

( R_ma)

New template

Makes the new line the new template

(]![)

Exits template

Inserts an end-of-file character in the new
template

4-5

Right Arrow Key

(Right Arrow Key)
Purpose
The right arrow key copies one character from the template to the command line.

Instructions
Pressing the right arrow key copies one character from the template to the
command line. When you press the right arrow key, one character is
inserted in the command line.

Example
If you begin an editing session and your screen displays:
1:*Thi5 i5 B 5Bmple file.
1: *

with the cursor positioned at the beginning of the line, after the asterisk,
pressing the right arrow key copies the first character (T) to the second of
the two lines displayed:
1:*Thi5 i5 B 5Bmple file.
1:*aJ

becomes
1:*Thi5 i5 B 5Bmple file.
1: *T

4-6

Right Arrow Key

Each time you press the right arrow key, one more character is displayed
on the same line:

4-7

Select Key

Select Key
Purpose
The Select key copies mUltiple characters Up to a character you specify.

Instructions
The Select key allows you to copy all characters, up to a character you
specify, from the template to the command line. The character you specify
is the character you type after you press the Select key; the character is
not copied or displayed on the screen. Pressing the Select key causes the
cursor to move to the single character that is specified in the command. If
the template does not contain the specified character, nothing is copied.

Example
Assume that the screen shows:
1:*This is a sample file.
1: *

At the beginning of the editing session, the cursor is positioned at the
beginning of the line, after the asterisk. Pressing the Select key copies all
characters up to the character specified immediately after you press the
Select key.
1:*This is a sample file.
1:*(Select)e

becomes
1:*This is a sample file.
1:*This is a sample

with the cursor positioned after the I in the second line.

4-8

Do Key

Do Key
Purpose
The Do key allows you to copy the template to the command line.

Instructions
The Do key lets you copy all remaining characters from the template to the
command line. Regardless of the cursor position at the time the Do key is
pressed, the rest of the line is displayed, and the cursor is positioned after
the last character on the line.

Example
Assume that the screen shows:
1:*This is a sample file.
1: *

At the beginning of the editing session, the cursor is positioned at the
beginning of the line, after the asterisk. Pressing the Do key copies all
characters from the template to the line with the cursor.
1:*This is a sample file.
1:*~

1:*This is a sample file.

4-9

Remove Key

Remove Key
Purpose
The Remove key allows you to skip over one character in the template.

Instructions
Each time you press the Remove key, one character is not copied from the
template. The action of the Remove key is similar to the right arrow key,
except that the Remove key skips a character in the template rather than
copy it to the command line.

Example
Assume that the screen shows:
1:*Thi5 i5 a 5ample file.
1: *

At the beginning of the editing session, the cursor is positioned at the
beginning of the line, after the asterisk. Pressing the Remove key skips
over the first character (T).
1:*Th15 i5 a 5ample file.
1:*(Remove)

The cursor position does not change, and only the template is affected. To
see how much of the line has been skipped over, press the Do key, which
moves the cursor beyond the last character of the line.
1:*Thi5 i5 a 5ample file.
1:*(Remove)~hi5 i5 a 5ample file.

4-10

Find Key

Find Key
Purpose
The Find key allows you to skip multiple characters in the template, up to
the specified character.

Instructions
The Find key lets you skip over all characters up to a character that you
specify in the template. This character is not copied and is not shown on
the screen. If the template does not contain the specified character, no
character is skipped over. The action of the Find key is similar to the Do
key, except that the Find key allows you to skip over characters in the
template rather than copying them to the command line.

Example
Assume that the screen shows:
1:*Thi5 i5 a 5ample file.
1: *

At the beginning of the. editing session, the cursor is positioned at the
beginning of the line, after the asterisk. The Find key lets you skip over all
the characters in the template up to the character specified after you press
the Find key:
1:*Thi5 i5 a 5ample file.
1:*~p

The cursor position does not change. To see how much of the line has been
skipped over, press the Do key to copy the template. This moves the
cursor beyond the last character of the line:
1:*Thi5 i5 a 5ample file.
1:*~p(]2)

1:*ple file.

4-11

Cancel Key

Cancel Key
Purpose
The Cancel key allows you to stop inputing and empties the command line.

Instructions
The Cancel key lets you empty the command line, but leaves the template
unchanged. The Cancel key also prints a backslash (\), carriage return, and
line feed, and turns insert mode off. The cursor is positioned at the beginning of the line, after the asterisk. Pressing the Do key copies the template
to the command line and the command line is displayed as it was before the
Cancel key was pressed.

Example
Assume that the screen shows:
1:*Thi5 i5 a 5ample file.
1: *

At the beginning of the editing session, the cursor is positioned at the
beginning of the line, after the asterisk. Next, assume that you want to
replace the line with "Sample File":
1:*Thi5 15 a 5ample file.
1:*Sample File

To cancel the line you just entered (Sample File), and to keep "This is a
sample file.", press the Cancel key. Notice that a backslash is displayed on
the Sample File line to tell you it has been canceled.
1:*Thi5 i5 a 5ample file.
1:*Sample File (Cancel )\

4-12

Cancel Key

Press the Return key to keep the original line, or to perform any other
editing functions. If you press the Do key, the original template is copied to
the command line:
* (]U Th i 5

5 amp 1 e

f i 1e •

4-13

Insert Here Key

Insert Here Key
Purpose
The Insert Here Key is used to insert or replace text in a file. The Insert
Here key lets you turn insert and replace modes on and off.

Instructions
Pressing the Insert Here key causes EDLIN to enter and exit insert mode.
The current cursor position in the template is not changed. The cursor
does move as each character is inserted. However, when you have finished
inserting characters, the cursor is positioned at the same character as it
was before the insertion began. Thus, characters are inserted in front of
the character to which the cursor points.

Example
Assume that the screen shows:
1: *Th1s 15 a sample ·file.
1: *

At the beginning of the editing session, the cursor is positioned at the
beginning of the line, after the asterisk. Assume that you press the Select
and f keys:
1:*Th1s 15 a sample f1le.
1 : * ( Select) fTh 15 15 a samp I e

Now press the Insert Here key and insert the characters "edit" and a
space:
1:*(Select}fTh1s 15 a sample (InsertH.re)ed1t~
1:*Th1S is a sample ed1t

4-14

Insert Here Key

If you now press the Do key, the rest of the template is copied to the line:
1:*This is a sample edit

~f1le.

To exit insert mode, simply press the Return key again.
If you pressed the Return key, the remainder of the template would be
truncated, and the command line ends:
1: *This is a sample (Insert Here) edi t
1:*This 1s a sample edit

(Return)

Instructions
Pressing the Return key causes EDLIN to exit insert mode and to enter
replace mode. All the characters you type overwrite and replace characters
in the template. When you start to edit a line, replace mode is in effect. If
the Return key is pressed, the remainder of the template is deleted.

Example
Assume that the screen shows:
1:*This is a sample file.
1: *

At the beginning of the editing session, the cursor is positioned at the
beginning of the line, after the asterisk. Assume that you then type:
1:*Th1s is a sample file.
1: * ( Select) mThis i s a s a (""'I-ns-ert:--;:"He-re"""') 1 a r y t a x
1: *Thi sis a salary tax (Remove) (Remove ) (r:R:-em-o-ve~) (Remove ) ~
1:*This is a salary tax file.

Notice that you replaced "mple" with "lary tax". If you type characters
that extend beyond the length of the template, the remaining characters in
the template are automatically added when you press the Do key.

4-15

Resume Key

Resume Key
Purpose
The Resume key allows you to create a new template.

Instructions
Pressing the Resume key copies the current command line to the template.
The contents of the old template are deleted. Pressing the Resume key
outputs an @ ("at" sign) character, a carriage return, and a line feed. The
command line is also emptied and insert mode is turned off.
IMPORTANT
The Resume key performs the same function as
the Cancel key, except that the template is
changed and an @ ("at" sign) character is printed
instead of a \ (backslash).

Example
Assume that the screen shows:
1:*This is a sample file.
1: *

At the beginning of the editing session the cursor is positioned at the
beginning of the line, following the asterisk. Assume that you type:
l:*This is a
1:*{Select)m
1:*This is a
1 : * Th i s i s a
1:*This is a

4- 16

sample file.
saClnsertHere)lary tax
sal a r y t a x C Remove ) C'"=R=-em---o-ve-") C Remove ) C Remove ) ~
salary tax file.

Resume Key

At this point, assume that you want this line to be the new template, so you
press the the Resume key:
1:"Th1!i 1!i a !ialary tax file. (Resume)1

The @ indicates that this new line is now the new template. Additional
editing can be done using the new template.

4-17

Using EDLIN Commands

Section 3
Using EDLIN Commands
EDLIN commands perform editing functions on lines of text. You should
read the following information before you use EDLIN commands.

Locating Lines
You can reference line numbers relative to the current line (the line with
the asterisk). Use a minus sign (hyphen key) with a number to indicate lines
before the current line. Use a plus sign with a number to indicate lines
after the current line.

Example
*-10,+10L( Return)

This command lists 10 lines before the current line, the current line, and
10 lines after the current line.

4-18

Using EDLIN Commands

Using Multiple Commands
You can use multiple commands on one command line. When you issue a
command to edit a single line, a line number and a semicolon must separate
commands on the line. Otherwise, one command can follow another without
any special separators. In the case of a Search and Replace command, the
string can be ended by a CtrI/Z instead of pressing the Return Key.

Examples
The following command line edits line 15 and then displays lines 10 through
20 on the screen.
* 1S; -s, +SL (Return)

The command line in the next example searches for "This string" and then
displays five lines before and five lines after the line containing the matched
string. If the search fails, then the displayed lines are those line numbers
relative to the current line. (The Search command is described later in this
chapter.)
*SThis string (ClrlIV )-S,+SL(Retum)

4-19

Using EDLIN Commands

Spacing in Commands
You can type EDLIN commands with or without a space between the line
number and command. For example, to delete line 6, the command 6D is
the same as 6 D.

Inserting Control Characters
It is possible to insert a control character (such as CtrI/C) into text by
using the CtrlfV characters before it, while you are in insert mode. Ctrl/V
tells the MS-DOS operating system to recognize the next capital letter
typed as a control character. It is also possible to use a control character in
any of the string arguments of Search or Replace by using the special quote
character. (The Replace command is described later in this chapter.)

Example
The following list describes the function of control characters.
S ( ClrlN ) Z

Finds the first occurrence of CtrI/Z in a file

R ( ClrtlV ) Z ( Clrt/Z ) foo

Replaces all occurrences of CtrI/Z in a file by "foo "

R ( ClrtlV ) C (Ctrt/z ) bar

Replaces all occurrences of CtrI/C by "bar "

It is possible to insert CtrI/V into the text by typing:

Inserting the CtrljZ Character
The CtrI/Z character ordinarily tells EDLIN, "This is the end of the file .. "
If you have CtrI/Z characters elsewhere in your file, you must tell EDLIN
that these other control characters do not mean end-of-file. Use the IB
switch to tell EDLIN to ignore any CtrI/Z characters in the file and to show
you the entire file.

4-20

Using EDLIN Commands

EDLIN Command Options
Several EDLIN commands accept one or more options. The effect of a
command option varies, depending on which command you use. The following list describes each option.
1. line-The line option indicates a line number that you type. Line numbers must be separated by a comma or a space from other line numbers, other options, and from the command.

You can specify the line option in one of three ways:
• Number-Any number less than 65529. If a number larger than
the largest existing line number is specified, then line means the
line after the last line number.
• Period (.)-If you specify a period for line, then line means the
current line number. The current line is the last line edited, and is
not necessarily the last line displayed. The current line is marked
on your screen by an asterisk (*) between the line number and the
first character.
• Pound (#)-The pound sign indicates the line after the last line
number. If you specify # for line, this has the same effect as specifying a number larger than the last line number.
Pressing the Return key without any of the line specifiers listed above
directs EDLIN to use a default value appropriate to the command.
2. ?-The question mark option directs EDLIN to ask you if the correct
string has been found. The question mark is used only with the
Replace and Search commands. Before continuing, EDLIN waits for
you to type either a Y or press the Return key for a yes response, or
for any other key for a no response.
3. string-The string option represents text to be found, to be replaced,
or to replace other text. The string option is used only with the
Search and Replace commands. Each string must be ended by typing a
CtrI/Z or by pressing the Return key (see the Replace command for
details). No spaces should be typed between strings or between a string
and its command letter, unless you want those spaces to be part of the
string.
4-21

EDLIN Commands

Section 4
EDLIN Commands
This section describes EDLIN editing commands. The commands are listed
alphabetically. Refer to Table 2~5 in Chapter 2 for a list of conventions
used in this manual.
Table 4-2 summarizes the EDLIN commands discussed in this chapter.
Table 4~2. EDLIN Commands
Command

Purpose

Line

Edits line number

Appends lines

Copies lines

Deletes lines

Ends editing
Inserts lines

Lists text

Moves lines

Pages text

Quits editing

Replaces lines

Searches text

Transfers text

Writes lines

4-22

(A)ppend

(A)ppend
Purpose
Append lets you add the specified number of lines from the diskette to the
file being edited in memory. The lines are added at the end of lines that
are currently in memory.

Form
[nlA(Return)

where n = number of lines

Instructions
This command is meaningful only if the file being edited is too large to fit
into memory. As many lines as possible are read into memory for editing
when you start EDLIN.
To edit the remainder of the file that does not fit into memory, lines that
have already been edited must be written to the diskette. Then you can
load unedited lines from the diskette into memory with the Append command. Refer to the Write command in this chapter for information on how
to write edited lines to the diskette.
IMPORTANT
If you do not specify the number of lines to
append, lines are appended to memory until available memory is 3/4 full. No action is taken if available memory is already 3/4 full.

The message "End of input file" is displayed when the Append command
has read the last line of the file into memory.

4-23

(C)opy

(C)opy
Purpose
Copy lets you copy a range of lines to a specified line number. The lines
can be copied as many times as you want by using the count option.

Form
[linel,[linel,line,[countlC(Return)

Instructions
If you do not specify a number in count, EDLIN copies the lines one time.
If the first or the second line are omitted, the default is the current line.
The file is renumbered automatically after the copy.

The line numbers must not overlap or you will get an "Entry error "
message. For example, 3,20,15C would result in a message.

Examples
Assume that the following file exists and is ready to edit:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:

Thi5 i5 a 5ample file
u5ed to 5how copying line5.
See what happen5 when you U5e
the Copy command
(the C command>
to copy text in your file.

You can copy this entire block of text by issuing the following command:
* 1 ,6, 7C ( Return )
*

4-24

(C)opy

When you display your file (using the List command), the result is:

* L ( Return)
1: This is a sample file
2: used to show copying lines.
3: See what happens when you use
4: the Copy command
5: (the C command>
6: to copy text in your file.
7:*This is a sample file
8: used to show copying lines.
9: See what happens when you use
10: the Copy command
11: (the C command>
12: to copy text in your file.

If you want to place the text within other text, the third line option should
specify the line before which you want the copied text to appear. For
example, assume that you want to copy lines and insert them within the
following file:
1: This is a sample file
2: used to show copying lines.
3: See what happens when you use
4: the Copy command
5: (the C command>
6: to copy text in your file.
7: You can also use COPY
8: to copy lines of text
9: to the middle of your file.
10: End of sample file.

4-25

(C)opy

The command 3,6,lOC results in the following file (which you display using
the List command):
1 : Thi5 i5 a 5ample file
2: u5ed to 5how copying line5.
3: See ",hat happen5 when you U5e
4: the Copy command
5: (the C command)
6: to copy text in your f i Ie.
7 : You can al50 U5e COpy
8: to copy line5 of text
9: to the middle of your file.
10:*See what happen5 when you U5e
11: the Copy command
12: (the C command)
13: to copy text in your file.
14: End of 5ample file.

4-26

(D)elete

(D)elete
Purpose
Delete allows you to erase a specified range of lines in a file.

Form
[ 1 i ne] • [ 1 i ne] D ( Return )

Instructions
If the first line is omitted, that option defaults to the current line (the line
with the asterisk next to the line number). If the second line is omitted,
then just the first line is deleted. When lines are deleted, the line immediately after the deleted section becomes the current line and has the same
line number as the first deleted line had before the deletion occurred.

4-27

(D)elete

Examples
Deleting Multiple Lines. Assume that the following file exists and is
ready to edit:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:

This is a sample file
used to show dynamic line numbers.
See what happens when you use
Delete and Insert
This line will be
deleted

25: (the D and I commands)
26: to edi t the text
27:*in your file.

To delete multiple lines (lines 5 through 24), type:
*5, 24D (Return)

result is:
1 : This is a sample fi Ie
2: used to show dynamic line numbers.
3: See what happens when you use
4 : Delete and Insert
5: (the D and I commands)
6: to edit the text
7:*in your file.

4-28

(D)elete

Deleting a Single Line. To delete a single line, type:
*6D ( Return )

The result is:
1: Thi5 15 a 5ample file

2: u5ed to 5how dynamic line number5.
3: See what happen5 when you U5e
4: Delete and In5ert
5: (the D and I command5)
6:*in your file.

Deleting a Range of Lines. Assume you have the following file:
1: Thi5 i5 a 5ample file

2: u5ed to 5how dynamic line number5.
3:*See what happen5 when you U5e
4: Delete and In5ert
5: (the D and I command5)
6: to edi t text
7: which you
8: have put
9: in your file.

To delete a range of lines, beginning with the current line, type:
* , 6D ( Return )

The result is:
1: Thi5 i5 a 5ample file
2: u5ed to 5how dynamic line number5.
3:*which you
4: have put
5: in your file.

Notice that the lines are automatically renumbered.

4-29

Edit

Edit
Purpose
Edit allows you to change a line of text.

Form
[ 1 i ne] ( Return )

Instructions
When a line number is typed, EDLIN displays the line number and text;
then, on the next line, EDLIN reprints the line number. The line is now
ready for editing. You can use any of the EDLIN editing commands to edit
the line. The existing text of the line serves as the template until the
Return key is pressed. If no line number is typed (that is, if only the
Return key is pressed), the line after the current line (marked with an
asterisk (*)) is edited. If no changes to the current line are needed and the
cursor is at the beginning or end of the line, press the Return key to accept
the line as is.
CAUTION
If the Return key is pressed while the cursor is in
the middle of the line, the remainder of the line is
deleted.

4-30

Edit

Example
Assume that the following file exists and is ready to edit:
1: This is a sample file.
2: used to show
3: the editin9 of line
4:*four.

To edit line 4, type:
* 4 ( Return )

The contents of the line are displayed with a cursor below the line
following the asterisk:
4:* four.
4:*

Now, using the Do and Insert Here special editing keys, type:
4: (Insert Here) number ~ four (Return )
5:*

4-31

(E)nd

(E)nd
Purpose
End lets you stop the editing session.

Form

Instructions
This command:
• Saves the edited file on diskette
• Renames the original input file by giving it a file type of .BAK
• Exits EDLIN
If the file was created during the editing session, no .BAK file is created.

The E command takes no options. Therefore, you cannot tell EDLIN on
which drive to save the file. The drive on which you want to save the file
must be specified when you start the editing session.
If no drive is specified as the active drive when EDLIN is started, the file
is saved on the diskette in the default drive. (It is still possible to copy the
file to a different drive using the MS-DOS COpy command.)

You must be sure that the diskette contains enough free space for the
entire file. If the diskette does not contain enough free space, the write is
ended and the edited file lost, although part of the file might be written out
to the diskette.

4-32

(E)nd

Example
*E (Return )
A)

After you type the E command and press the Return key, the operating
system default drive prompt (for example, A» is displayed.

4-33

(I)nsert

(I)nsert
Purpose
Insert allows you to add text immediately before the specified line.

Form
[ l i ne]l ( Retum )

Instructions
If you are creating a new file, the I command must be given before text
can be inserted. Text begins with line number 1. Successive line numbers

display automatically each time you press the Return key.
EDLIN remains in insert mode until you press Ctrl/C. When you exit insert
mode, the line immediately following the inserted lines becomes the current
line. All line numbers following the inserted section are incremented by the
number of lines inserted.
If line is not specified, the default is the current line number and the lines
are inserted immediately before the current line. If line is any number
larger than the last line number, or if a pound sign (#) is specified as line,

the inserted lines are appended to the end of the file. In this case, the last
line inserted becomes the current line.

NOTE
Use the Interrupt key to insert an escape character when required.

4-34

(I)nsert

Examples
Assume that the following file exists and is ready to edit:
1: This is a sample file
2: used to show dynamic line numbers.
3: See what happens when you use
4: Delete and Insert
5: (the D and I commands>
6: to edi t text
7:*in your file.

To insert text before a specific line that is not the current line, type:
*7 I ( Return )

The result is:
7: *

Now, type the new text for line 7:
7:· and renumber 1 i nes (Return )

Then to end the insertion, press Ctrl/C on the next line:
B: *

(Ctrl/C)

To see your file type L and press the Return key.
*L ( Return)

1: This is a sample file
2: used to show dynamic line numbers.
3: See what happens when you use
4: Delete and Insert
5: (the D and I commands>
6: to edit text
7. and renumber lines
B:*in your file.

4-35

(I)nsert

To insert lines immediately before the current line, type:
*I(Aetum)

The result is:
B:*

Now, insert the following text and end by typing Ctrl/C on the next line:
B: 50 they are consecutive(Aerum)
9: * (CtrI/c )

To list the file, type L and press the Return key.
*L (Rerum)

The result is:
1: This is a sample file
2: used to show dynamic line numbers.
3: See what happens when you use
4: Delete and Insert
5: (the D and I commands>
6: to edi t text
7: and renumber lines
B: so they are consecutive
9:*in your file.

4-36

(I)nsert

To append new lines to the end of the file, type:
* 101 (Return)

This produces the following:
10: *

Now, type the following new lines:
10: The in5ert command can place new line5
11: in the file; there'5 no problem

12: becau5e the line number5 are dynamic;
13: they'll go all the way to 65529.
14: *

End the insertion by typing Ctrl/C on line 14. The new lines displays at the
end of all previous lines in the file. Now type the List command (L) and
press the Return key. The result is:
1 : Thi5 i5 a 5ample file

2: u5ed to 5how dynamic line number5.
3: See what happen5 when you U5e
4 : Delete and In5ert
5: (the D and 1 command5)

6: to edit text
7 : and renumber line5
8: 50 they are con5ecutive
9: in your file.
10: The in5ert command can place new line5
11: in the file; there'5 no problem
12: becau5e the line number5 are dynamic;
13: they'll go all the way to 65529.

4-37

(L)ist

(l)ist
Purpose
List lets you display a range of lines, including the two lines specified.

Form
[1 i ne][ ,Ii ne] L ( Return )

Instructions
Default values are provided if either or both of the options are omitted. If
you omit the first option, as in:
* ,Ii n-eL ( Return )

the display starts 11 lines before the current line and ends with the
specified line. The beginning comma is required to indicate the omitted first
option.

NOTE
If the specified line is more than 11 lines before
the current line, the display is the same as if you
omitted both options.
If you omit the second option, as in:

* 1 i neL ( Return)
23 lines are displayed, starting with the specified line.
If you omit both parameters, as in:
*L ( Return)

4-38

(L)ist

23 lines are displayed (the 11 lines before the current line, the current line,
and the 11 lines after the current line). If there are fewer than 11 lines
before the current line, more than 11 lines after the current line is
displayed to make a total of 23 lines.

Examples
1. Assume that the following file exists and is ready to edit:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:

This is a sample file
used to show dynamic line numbers.
See what happens when you use
Delete and Insert
(the D and I commands)

15:*The current line contains an asterisk.

26:
27:

to edi t text
in your file.

2. To list a range of lines without reference to the current line, type
line,lineL and press the Return key:
*2, 5L ( Return )

The result is:
2:
3:
4:
5:

used to show dynamic line numbers.
See what happens when you use
Delete and Insert
(the D and I commands>

3. To list a range of lines beginning with the current line, type:
* . , 26L ( Return)

4-39

(L)ist

The result is:
15:*The current line contains an asterisk.

26: to edi t text

4. To list a range of 23 lines centered around the current line, type only
L:
* L ( Return )

The result is:
4: Delete and Insert
5: (the D and I commands)

13: The current line is listed in the middle of the range.
14: The current line remains unchanged by the L command.
15:*The current line contains an asterisk.

26: to edi t text.

4-40

(M)ove

(M)ove
Purpose
Move allows you to move a range of text to the line specified.

Form
[ 11 ne] J [ 1 i ne] J 11 neM ( Return )

Instructions
Use the Move command to move a block of text (ranging from the first line
to the second line) to another location in the file. The lines are renumbered
according to the direction of the move.

Example
8, +

25, 100M ( Return )

moves the text from the current line plus 25 lines to line 100. If the line
numbers overlap, EDLIN displays an "Entry error" message.
To move lines 20-30 to line 100, type:
820,30,100M(Retum)

4-41

(P)age

(P)age
Purpose
Page lets you move through a file 23 lines at a time.

Form
[line][, linelP

Instructions
If the first line is omitted, that number defaults to the current line plus
one. If the second line is omitted, 23 lines are listed. The line at the
bottom of the screen becomes the new current line and is marked with an
asterisk.

4-42

(Q)uit

(Q)uit
Purpose
Quit lets you end the editing session and returns to the MS-DOS operating
system.
Quit does not save any changes made to the file.

Form

Instructions
EDLIN asks you to be sure you do not want to save your changes.
Type Y if you want to quit the editing session. No editing changes are
saved and no .BAK file is created. Refer to the End command in this
chapter for information about the .BAK file.
Type N or any other character except Y if you want to continue the editing
seSSIOn.

NOTE
When started, EDLIN erases any previous copy of
the file with a file type of .BAK to make room to
save the new copy. If you reply Y to the "Abort
edit (YIN)?" message, your previous backup copy
no longer exists.

Example
*Q ( Return)

Abort edit (Y/H)?Y
A>

4-43

(R)eplace

(R)eplace
Purpose
Replace lets you substitute all occurrences of a string of text in the specified range with a different string of text or blanks.

Form
[l1nel[,l1nel[?lRstrlng1 (Ctrl/z )str1ng2(Return)

NOTE
Ctrl/Z displays as A Z on your screen.

Instructions
As each occurrence of string! is found, it is replaced by string2. Each line
in which a replacement occurs is displayed. If a line contains two or more
replacements of string! with string2, then the line is displayed once for
each occurrence. When all occurrences of string! in the specified range are
replaced by string2, the R command terminates and the asterisk prompt
reappears.
If a second string is to be given as a replacement, then string! must be
separated from string2 with a Ctrl/Z. String2 must also end with a CtrlfZ
and a carriage return combination or simply by pressing the Return key.
If string! is omitted, then Replace takes the old string! as its value. If
there is no old string!, for example, the first time this is performed, then
the replacement process terminates immediately.
If string2 is omitted, end the command line by pressing the Return key.

If the first line is omitted in the range (as in ,line) then the first line
defaults to the line after the current line.

(R)eplace

If the second line is omitted (as in line or line,), the second line defaults to
#. Therefore, this is the same as line,#. Remember that # indicates the line
after the last line of the file.
If string! is ended with a Ctrl/Z and there is no string2, string2 is taken as
an empty string and becomes the new replace string.

Examples
*Rs t r i ng2 ( Ctrl/Z ) ( Return )

deletes occurrences of old string!.
If the question mark (?) option is given, the Replace command stops at each
line with a string that matches string!, displays the line with string2 in
place, and then displays the prompt "O.K.?".
If you press Y or the Return key, then string2 replaces string!, and the
next occurrence of string! is found. Again, the "O.K.?" prompt displays.
This process continues until the end of the range or until the end of the
file.

After the last occurrence of stringl is found, EDLIN displays the asterisk
prompt.
If you press any key besides Y or Return after the "O.K.?" prompt, the
stringl is left as it was in the line, and Replace goes to the next occurrence
of string!.
If stringl occurs more than once in a line, each occurrence of string! is
replaced individually, and the "O.K.?" prompt is displayed after each
replacement. In this way, only the desired string! is replaced, and you can
prevent unwanted substitutions.

4-45

(R)eplace

Assume that the following file exists and is ready for editing:
1: Thi5 i5 a 5ample file
2: u5ed to 5how dynamic line number5.
3: See what happen5 when you U5e
4: Delete and In5ert
5: (the D and I command5)
6: to edi t text
7: in your file.
8: The in5ert command can place new line5
9: in the file; there'5 no problem
10: becau5e the line number5 are dynamic;
11: they'll go all the way to 65529.

To replace all occurrences of string 1 with string2 in a specified range,
type:
*2, 12Rand (Ctrl/z ) or (Return )

The result is:
4: Delete or In5ert
5: (the D or I commor5)
8: The in5ert commor can place new line5

NOTE
In the above replacement, some unwanted
substitutions have occurred. To avoid these and to
confirm each replacement, the same original file
can be used with a slightly different command.

4-46

(R)eplace

In the next example, to replace only certain occurrences of the first string
with the second string, type:
II

2?Rand ( CtrI/Z ) or ( Retum )

The result is:
5: (The D or

commands)

O.K.? V(R.tum)

5: (The D or I commors)
8: The insert command can place new lines
O.K.? H(Retum)

8: The insert commor can place new lines
II

Now, type the List command (L) to see the result of all these changes:

4: Delete or Insert
5: (The D or I commands)

8: The insert command can place new lines

4-47

(S)earch

(S)earch
Purpose
Search allows you to search the specified range of lines for a specified
string of text.

Form
[line][,line][?]S5trin9CR~um)

Instructions
You end the command line by pressing the Return key. The first line that
matches the string is displayed and becomes the current line. If no line
contains a match for the string, the message "Not found" is displayed.
If the question mark option is not specified, the Search command ends
when a match is found. If the question mark option (?) is included in the
command, EDLIN displays the first line with a matching string; it then
prompt you with the message "O.K.?".
If you press either the Y or the Return key, the line becomes the current
line and the search ends.
If you press any other key, the search continues until another match is
found, or until all lines have been searched (and the "Not found" message
is displayed).
If the first line is omitted (as in ,line S string), the first line defaults to the
line after the current line.
If the second line is omitted (as in line S string or line, S string), the
second line defaults to # (line after last line of file), which is the same as
line,# S string.

4-48

(S)earch
If string is omitted, Search takes the old string if there is one. (Note that
"old" here refers to a string specified in a previous Search or Replace
command.)
If there is not an old string (for example, no previous search or replace has
been done), the command terminates immediately.

Examples
Assume that the following file exists and is ready for editing:
1: This is a sample file
2: used to show dynamiC line numbers.
3: See what happens when you U5e
4: Delete and Insert
5: (the D and I commands)
6: to edi t text
7: in your file.
8: The insert command can place new lines
9: in the file; there's no problem
10: because the line numbers are dynamiC;
11:*they'11 go all the way to 65529.

To search for the first occurrence of the string "and", type:
2,12 Sand (Return )

The following line is displayed:
4: Delete and Insert

To get the "and" in line 5, modify the search command by typing:
( Remove) (]2) ,12

Sand ( Return )

4-49

(S)earch

The search then continues from the line after the current line (line 4),
since no first line· was given. The result is:
5: (the D and I commands)

To search through several occurrences of a string until the correct string is
found, type:
1, ? Sand

The result is:
4: Delete and Insert

O.K.?

If you press any key (except Y or the Return key), the search continues,
therefore type:
O.K.?

Continue:
5: (the D and I commands)

O.K.?

Now press Y to terminate the search:
O.K.? Y
II

To search for string XYZ without the verification (O.K.?), type:
.. Sxyz ( Return)

4-50

(S)earch

EDLIN reports a match and continues to search for the same string when
you issue the S command:

"s (Return )
EDLIN reports another match if there is one. If there are no more
matches, EDLIN reports the string is "Not found".

NOTE
String defaults to any string specified by a
previous Replace or Search command.

4-51

(T)ransfer

(T)ransfer
Purpose
Transfer lets you insert (merge) the contents of filename.typ into the file
currently being edited at line. If line is omitted, then the current line is
used.

Form
[linelT filename.tYP(Rewm)

Instructions
This command is useful if you want to put the contents of a file into
another file or into the text you are typing. The transferred text is inserted
at the line number specified by line and the lines are renumbered.

4-52

(W)rite

(W)rite
Purpose
Write allows you to write a specified number of lines to the diskette from
the lines that are being edited in memory. Lines are written to diskette
beginning with line number 1.

Form
[nlW (Return)

Instructions
This command is meaningful only if the file you are editing is too large to
fit into memory. When you start EDLIN, EDLIN reads lines into memory
until memory is 3/4 full.
To edit the remainder of your file, you must write edited lines in memory
to diskette. Then you can load additional unedited lines from diskette into
memory by using the Append command.
NOTE
If you do not specify the number of line~, lines are
written until memory is 3/4 full. No action is
taken if available memory is already more than
3/4 full. All lines are renumbered, so that the first
remaining line becomes line number 1.

4-53

5
Messages

This chapter lists the messages that can be displayed while using the
MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system. They are listed in alphabetical
order for easy reference. The message is printed first, followed by what it
means, and what to do about it.
Remember, if you are asked to reset the Rainbow computer:
• Press the Set-Up key.
• Then hold down the control key (Ctrl on the keyboard) while you
press the Set-Up key.

Other Messages
If you see a message that starts with
See Owner'5 Manual - MESSAGE nn -

Consult the Rainbow Owner's Manual.
If any messages are displayed while you are using an application program,
refer to the application program documentation for instructions.
5-1

Messages
Allocation error, size adjusted

The CHKDSK program found an invalid cluster number in the F AT (File
Allocation Table). The CHKDSK program truncated the file at the end of
the last valid cluster.
Bad call format reading/writing device

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system found an incorrect length
request header for the specified device. Press the A key to abort the command. Review the source code of the program that produced the message.
Bad command error reading/writing device

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system found an invalid command in
the command code field of the request header for the specified device.
Press the A key to abort the command. Review the source code of the
program that produced the message.
Bad command or file name

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system did not recognize the command or file name. Check for typing errors. Reenter the command
correctly.
Bad or missing Command Interpreter

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system could not find the
COMMAND.COM file on the disk. The COMMAND.COM file is invalid or
is missing from the root directory, or the COMSPEC= parameter in the
CONFIG.SYS file did not point to a COMMAND. COM file. Reset the
Rainbow computer and copy the COMMAND. COM file from your MS-DOS
back-up system diskette onto the disk you use to start the MS-DOS Version
2.11 operating system.

5-2

Messages
Bad or missing filename

You specified an invalid device in the CONFIG.SYS file. Check the accuracy
of the DEVICE statement in the CONFIG.SYS file.

Bad unit error reading/writing device

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system found an invalid subunit code
in the request header for the specified device. Press the A key to abort the
command. Review the source code of the program that produced the
message.

Batch file missing

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system could not find the batch file
(.BAT) you tried to process.

Cannot CHOIR to filename - tree past this point not processed

The CHKDSK program was unable to proceed to the specified directory
while traveling the tree structure of the directory. All sub-directories
underneath this directory will not be verified. Copy the files on your disk to
another disk. If you have trouble copying the files, run the RECOVER
program.

Cannot CHOIR to root
Processing cannot continue

The CHKDSK program was unable to return to the root directory while
traveling the tree structure of the directory. The CHKDSK program cannot
continue checking the remaining sub-directories to the root. Copy the files
on your disk to another disk. If you have trouble copying the files, run the
RECOVER program.

5-3

Messages
Cannot do binary reads from a device

You used the IB option while copying from a device other than a disk. Try
again without the IB option.
Cannot edit .BAK file-rename file

You specified a file with a .BAK file type for the EDLIN program to edit.
The EDLIN program cannot edit a file with a .BAK file type. Rename or
copy the file with a different file type.
Cannot format disk on default drive.

You either specified the default drive or did not specify a drive when using
the FORMAT program. Specify a drive other than the default drive.

Cannot format this disk.

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system could not format this disk
because of physical errors on the disk. Run the FORMAT program again
with the II switch or try another disk.
Cannot load COMMAND, system halted

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system was unable to reload the nonresident portion of the COMMAND. COM file into memory. Reset your
Rainbow computer and reload the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system.

Cannot open filename

The PRINT program failed to find the specified file to print, or the file
does not exist. Check the command for a valid file name.

5-4

Messages
cannot recover. entry, processing continued.

The CHKDSK program found the. (current directory) entry defective.
Copy the files on your disk to another disk. If you have trouble copying the
files, run the RECOVER program.

Cannot recover .. entry,

The CHKDSK program found the .. (parent directory) entry defective.
Copy the files on your disk to another disk. If you have trouble copying the
files, run the RECOVER program.

Cannot start COMMAND, exiting

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system could not load another copy of
the COMMAND.COM file into memory. Either you do not have enough
memory, or the FILES= parameter in the CONFIG.SYS file is set too low.

Cannot use Mdrive for formatting.

You specified MDRIVE for formatting. MDRIVE is already formatted.

Can't find MDRIVE.SYS

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system could not find the
MDRIVE.SYS file. Your MS-DOS start-up disk must contain both the
MDRIVE.COM and MDRIVE.SYS files in the root directory. Copy the
MDRIVE.SYS file from your MS-DOS back-up diskette.

5-5

Messages
Can't read setup.

The SETPORT program could not read the extended communications data.
You are probably using the MS-DOS Version 2.01 operating system. Check
to make sure you are using the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system.
CHOIR .. failed, trying alternate method

The CHKDSK program could not return to a parent directory while traveling the tree structure. The CHKDSK program tries to return to that directory by starting over at the root and traveling down. Copy the files on your
disk to another disk. If you have trouble copying the files, run the
RECOVER program.
Content of destination lost before copy

A source file in your COPY command was also the destination file. The
COPY program overwrote the source file prior to completion of the copy.
You can no longer use that file.
Copy not completed

The DISKCOpy program could not copy the entire disk because of physical
errors on the disk. Use another diskette.
CP/M drive must be 'A' through '0' No Wini Support

The RDCPM program tried to read a CP/M-86/80 hard disk partition. The
RDCPM program cannot read CP/M-86/80 hard disk partitions. If you want
to read a CP/M-86/80 file from a hard disk:
1. Start the CP/M-86/80 operating system.

2. Copy the file to a diskette.
3. Restart the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system.
4. Use the RDCPM program to read the file from the diskette.

5-6

Messages
CP/M source cannot be the current default drive

The current default drive contains an MS-DOS disk. Reenter the command
specifying the drive that contains the CP/M-86/80 file.
Data error reading/writing drive drv
Abort, Retry, Ignore?

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system could not read from or write
to the disk. The disk is probably unusable. Press the R key to retry the
command.
If the problem persists and you are performing a back-up, restore, or verify
operation, press the I key to ignore the problem and continue the operation.
A file is most probably corrupted.
If you are not performing a back-up, restore, or verify operation and the
problem persists, press the A key to abort the command. Copy all files to a
new diskette or back up and reformat your hard disk.
Directory is totally empty,
no " or ""

The specified directory did not contain references to current and parent
directories. Delete the specified directory and recreate it.
Disk error reading/writing drive drv
Abort, Retry, Ignore?

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system could not read from or write
to the disk. The disk is probably unusable. Press the R key to retry the
command.
If the problem persists, press the A key to abort the command. Copy all
files to a new diskette or back up and reformat your hard disk.

5-7

Messages
Disk error reading FAT

The CHKDSK program found a defective sector while trying to read the
FAT (File Allocation Table). The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system
automatically uses the other FAT (File Allocation Table). Copy all files to a
new diskette or back up and reformat your hard disk.
Disk error writing FAT

The CHKDSK program found a defective sector while trying to write the
FAT (File Allocation Table). The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system
automatically uses the other FAT (File Allocation Table). Copy all files to a
new diskette or back up and reformat your hard disk.
Disk full- write not completed

You entered the EDLIN END command, but the disk did not contain
enough free space for the file. The EDLIN program stops the END command and returns you to the operating system. Delete some files to free
some space on your disk. Restart the editing session.
Disk is not properly initialized.
Possible blank disk? Try "FORMAT drv:/I".

You used an improperly initialized diskette on your Rainbow computer. Use
the FORMAT command with the /1 switch to prepare your diskette.
Disk unsuitable for system disk

The FORMAT program found a bad sector on the disk where some system
data resides. You can use this disk for general data storage, but you cannot
use it as a system disk.

5-8

Messages
Disks must be the same size

You tried to copy a diskette to another diskette with a different format
using the DISKCOPY program. Use the COPY program to copy files onto
the diskette.
Divide overflow

The Intel 8088 processor set the divide overflow flag, which is usually
caused by division by zero. Review the source code or contact the vendor
of the program that produced the message.
Drive Error.

Your disk drive may be malfunctioning. Reset your Rainbow computer and
run the Rainbow self-test diagnostics by pressing S from the Rainbow Main
System Menu.
Duplicate file name or File not found

You tried to rename a file to a file name that already exists, or the name
you specified could not be found. Use a different file name for the destination file or check to make sure the source file exists.
Entry error

You entered an EDLIN command incorrectly. Reenter the command correctly and press the Return key.
Entry has a bad attribute (or size or link)

If one period displayed before the message, the CHKDSK program found an
error in an entry in the current directory. If two periods displayed before
the message, the CHKDSK program found an error in an entry in the
subdirectory. The CHKDSK program with the IF switch attempts to correct
this error.

5-9

Messages
Error creating output file.

The RDCPM program tried to copy a file to a disk that is full or has too
many directory entries. Delete some files from the disk.
Error in command line

You entered the command line incorrectly. Reenter the command line correctly. Refer to the documentation on the MS-DOS command you are using.
Error in .EXE file

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system tried to load an .EXE file
containing an invalid internal format. Copy the .EXE file from your
MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system back-up diskette.
Error modifying MDRIVE.SYS

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system found a faulty copy of
MDRIVE.SYS. Copy the file from your MS-DOS back-up system diskette.
Error reading CP1M file

The RDCPM program found an error while reading the CP/M-86/80 file.
Check the integrity of the file by loading the CP/M-86/80 operating system
and typing the file. If your file is correct, copy the file to a new diskette
and use the RDCPM program again.
Error reading floppy disk file

The BACKUP program found an error while verifying your diskette produced by the BACKUP program. Run the BACKUP program again using a
new diskette.

5-10

Messages
Error reading hard disk file

The VERIFY program found an error in the files on your hard disk while
verifying your back-up diskettes. Restore the file causing the error on your
hard disk from your back-up diskette.

Error reading MDRIVE.SYS

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system found a faulty copy of
MDRIVE.SYS. Copy the file from your MS-DOS back-up system diskette.

Error reading the disk
Type any key to try again

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system found a problem while loading.
Start the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system from your back-up diskette. Copy all files to a new diskette or back up and reformat your hard
disk.
Error transferring system area.

The FORMAT program could not transfer the loader to the new disk. Use
the FORMAT program with the /1 switch.

Error writing Allocation Table.

The FORMAT program could not write the Disk Allocation Table. Use the
FORMAT command with the /1 switch.

Error writing MSDOS file

The RDCPM program found a problem while writing the MS-DOS file. Use
a different destination disk.

5-11

Messages
Error writing to device

You sent too much data to a device. The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating
system could not write the data to the specified device. Check the amount
of data in the file that requested the input/output function and try again.
Errors found, F parameter not specified.
Corrections will not be written to disk.

The CHKDSK program found problems on the disk. You must use the IF
switch if you want the CHKDSK program to correct the problems.
Errors on list device indicate that it
may be off-line. Please check it.

Your printer is offline. Turn it online.
EXEC failure

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system either found a problem when
reading a command, or you set the FILES statement in the CONFIG.SYS
file too low. Increase the value of the FILES statement and restart the
MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system.
Extended Communication Option (PC 1XX-BB) is not installed.

The extended communications option board is missing or not working
correctly.
File allocation table bad for drive drv

The disk may be faulty. Use the CHKDSK program with the /F switch to
check the disk. Then retry the operation. If the message persists, format
the disk using the FORMAT program.

5-12

Messages
File cannot be copied onto itself

You used the same file name for the source and destination file names.
Specify a different destination file name.
File creation error

You tried to add a new file name or replace a file that already exists in the
directory. If the file already exists, it is a read-only file and cannot be
replaced. Use the CHKDSK program on the disk to determine the cause of
the problem.
File name must be specified

You did not specify a file name when you started the EDLIN program.
Specify a file name.
File not found

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system could not find the file that you
specified. Check to see that the path name is accurate and the file exists in
the directory you specified.
File on floppy disk Is missing

The BACKUP program verify option could not find the files on the diskette.
Check to make sure you are using the correct back-up diskettes.
File on hard disk is missing

The BACKUP program verify option could not find the files on the hard
disk. You are trying to verify files you deleted. Set the verify file specifier
option and the verify exclusion file specifier option in the advanced verify
menu so you do not try to verify files you have deleted.

5-13

Messages
Filename.typ contains x non-contiguous blocks.

The CHKDSK program found non-contiguous blocks in the file you specified. This means that the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system stored
the file in fragments on the disk rather than sequentially. Copy the fragmented file to another disk to improve reading performance.
Filename.typ has invalid cluster, file truncated.

The CHKDSK program found a file that contains an invalid pointer. If you
specified the IF switch, the CHKDSK program truncates the file at the last
valid data block. The file may be missing data.
Filename.typ is cross linked on cluster

The CHKDSK program found an area of the disk that belongs to two files.
Make a copy of the file that has the problem. Then, delete both files that
are cross linked.
FIND: File not found filename

The FIND program could not find the file you specified. Check to see that
the path name is accurate and the file exists in the directory you specified.
FIND: Invalid number of parameters

You did not specify a string in the FIND command. Reenter the command
with a string.
FIND: Invalid parameter param

You tried to use an invalid parameter in the command line. The valid
parameters are IV, IC, and IN. Reenter the command with a valid
parameter.

5-14

Messages
FIND: Read error in filename

The FIND program could not read the file. Reenter the command. If the
problem persists, use the CHKDSK program.
FIND: Syntax error

You typed an illegal string in the FIND command. You must enclose the
string in quotes ("string"). Reenter the command enclosing the string in
quotes.
First cluster number is invalid,
entry truncated.

The CHKDSK program found an invalid pointer to the data area in the file
directory entry. Use the CHKDSK program with the IF switch to truncate
the file to a zero-length file, which you should delete.
FOR cannot be nested

You tried to nest FOR statements in a batch file. You cannot nest FOR
statements in a batch file. Remove the FOR statements from the batch file.
Format failure

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system could not format the disk.
This message is displayed with an explanation as to why the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system could not format the disk.
Incompatible system size

The SYS program could not copy the system files (IO.SYS and
MSDOS.SYS). These files occupy more space on the source diskette than is
available on the destination diskette. Format a blank diskette with the IS
switch and copy all files except the COMMAND. COM file from the source
diskette.

5-15

Messages
Incorrect DOS version

You tried to use a program that will not run on the MS-DOS Version 2.11
operating system. Use the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system version
of the same program.
Insert COMMAND.COM disk in drive drv
and strike any key when ready

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system tried to reload the
COMMAND.COM file but could not find the file in the specified drive.
Insert your MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system diskette into the specified drive and press any key. If the specified drive is not A:, B:, C:, or D:,
reset the Rainbow computer and restart the MS-DOS Version 2.11
operating system.

Insufficient disk space

You tried to perform an operation on a disk which is full. Try again using a
disk that contains sufficient room to perform the operation.
Insufficient memory

You tried to perform an operation without enough memory. If you have a
BUFFERS= statement in your CONFIG.SYS file, specify a smaller value in
the BUFFERS= statement. Restart the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating
system and try the command again. If this message displays again, you need
to purchase additional memory for your Rainbow computer.
Insufficient memory for requested size

You specified too many blocks of memory for your MDRIVE. Specify a
lower value for the number of blocks to install for your MDRIVE.

5-16

Messages
Insufficient memory for system transfer

You did not have enough memory to transfer the MS-DOS Version 2.11
system files (IO.SYS and MSDOS.SYS) using the FORMAT command with
the /S switch. Use the SYS program to copy the system files.
Insufficient room in root directory.
Erase files in root and repeat CHKDSK.

The CHKDSK program tried to recover lost files into a full root directory.
Delete some files in your root directory to make room for the lost files.
Intermediate file error during pipe

The pipe operation uses temporary files on the disk, which are automatically deleted after completion of the piping process. An error occurred in
one of these files. Delete some files from your root directory and reenter
the piping operation.
Invalid character

You typed an invalid character in the file name of the BACKUP program's
backup, restore, or verify file specifier option or the backup, restore, or
verify exclusion file specifier option. Reenter the file name using a valid
character.
Invalid characters in volume label

You tried to name a volume label with an invalid alphanumeric character.
Reenter the volume label with valid alphanumeric characters.

5-17

Messages
Invalid COMMAND.COM in drive drv

The application program you used has taken most of your memory. The
MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system must reload the COMMAND.COM
file from disk. However, the COMMAND. COM file found is a different
version from the COMMAND.COM file you started the MS-DOS Version
2.11 operating system with. Insert the diskette you used to start the
MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system into the specified drive.
Invalid country code

You specified an invalid country number in your CONFIG.SYS file. The
country number you entered is not supported by the MS-DOS Version 2.11
operating system. Use a valid country code.
Invalid current directory.
Processing cannot continue

The CHKDSK program could not read the current directory. Your disk is
faulty. Copy all files and reformat your disk.

Invalid date
Enter new date:

You used an invalid DATE value or separator. Enter a valid date and press
the Return key. If you do not want to enter a date, press the Return key.
Invalid device

You used an invalid device. Valid devices are CON, NUL, AUX, or PRN.
Reenter the device.
Invalid directory

You specified an invalid or nonexistent directory. Reenter the directory
name correctly.

5-18

Messages
Invalid drive in search path

You specified an invalid drive to the PATH command. Reenter the command with a valid drive.
Invalid drive or file name

You specified an invalid drive or invalid file name when starting the EDLIN
program. Restart the EDLIN program specifying a valid drive or file name.
Invalid drive specification

You specified an invalid drive specification. Reenter the command with a
correct drive specification.
Invalid number of parameters

You used an incorrect number of options in the command line. See the
documentation on the specified command you are using to determine how
many options you can use. Then, reenter the command using the correct
number of options.
Invalid parameter

You used an incorrect switch. See the documentation on the specified command you are using to determine what switches you can use. Then, reenter
the command using the correct switches.
Invalid path, not directory,
or directory not empty

You could not remove the directory requested because you specified an
invalid path, an invalid directory, or a directory that is not empty. Specify
the correct path name and directory, or delete all the files in the directory
you are trying to remove. Reenter the RMDIR command.

5-19

Messages
Invalid path or file name

You used an invalid path or file name with the COpy command. Reenter
the COPY command line with a valid path or file name.
Invalid path specified

You used an invalid path in the RDCPM program. Run the RDCPM program again using a valid path.
Invalid sub-directory entry

You used an invalid or nonexistent sub-directory. Check to see that you
entered the sub-directory name correctly. Run the CHKDSK program using
a valid sub-directory.

Invalid time
Enter new time:

You used an invalid TIME value or separator. Reenter a valid time and
press the Return key. If you do not want to enter a time, press the Return
key.
label not found

Your batch file contained a GOTO command to a nonexistent label. You
must begin a label with a colon. Edit your batch file or use an existent
label, and run the batch file again.

line too long
The EDLIN program stopped the REPLACE command when a replacement
string caused the line to expand beyond the 253 character limit. Divide the
long line into two lines, then use the REPLACE command twice.

5-20

Messages
List output is not assigned to a device

You specified a nonexistent device the first time you used the PRINT program. Run the PRINT program and specify a valid device (pressing the
Return key specifies the PRN device).
X lost clusters found in y chains.
Convert lost chains to files (YIN)?

The CHKDSK program found files for which the directory entry has been
lost. This is usually caused by a program exiting without closing the files.
If you did not specify the IF switch, the CHKDSK program displays the
number of bytes that are lost but does not recover the lost space.
If you did specify the IF switch and answer N(o) to the question, the
CHKDSK program makes this otherwise unusable space available for use.
If you did specify the IF switch and answer Y(es) to the question, the
CHKDSK program creates a file in the root directory for each lost chain.
Files created by the CHKDSK program are named FILEnnnn.CHK. Look at
the files to see if they contain valuable information. Delete the files that
contain information you do not need.
*** Mdrive disabled. ***
Not enough system memory for requested size.

You configured MDRIVE on a Rainbow computer with more memory than
the Rainbow computer you are currently using. Reconfigure MDRIVE for
the Rainbow computer you are using.

5-21

Messages
Memory allocation error
Cannot load COMMAND, system halted

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system had a problem managing
memory. Reset the Rainbow computer and restart the MS-DOS Version
2.11 operating system. If this message persists, copy your MS-DOS Version
2.11 operating system from your back-up MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating
system diskette.
Minimum 192K bytes of RAM needed to activate Mdrive

You tried to configure MDRIVE with less than the 192K bytes of required
memory. To use MDRIVE, you need to purchase additional memory for
your Rainbow computer.
Must specify destination line number

You omitted a destination line number when you tried to copy or move lines
with the EDLIN program. Reenter the EDLIN program and specify a destination line number with the COpy or MOVE command.
No files found

The RDCPM program could not find any of the CP/M-86/80 files you specified. Run the RDCPM program and use the DIR option to make sure the
file exists.
No files match d:XXXXXXXX.XXX

You specified an invalid file specification to be added to the PRINT queue.
Run the PRINT program and specify a validJile specification.

5-22

Messages
No free file handles
Cannot start COMMAND.COM. exiting

The CONFIG.SYS file contains a FILES= parameter that is too small.
Restart the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system from your back-up
MS-DOS Version 2.11 operation system diskette. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file
on your working diskette to increase the value of the FILES= parameter.
No room for system on destination disk

You tried to copy the system files to a full disk using the SYS program.
Delete some files to make room for the system files or use another disk.
You may need to reformat the disk to copy the system files.
No room in directory for file

You tried to save a file in the root directory, but the directory is full while
using the EDLIN program. Unlike the root directory, sub-directories are
not limited in size. Delete some files from your root directory and reenter
the command.
Non-DOS disk error reading/writing drive drY
Abort. Retry. Ignore?

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system did not recognize the disk
format. Press the A key to abort the command. You cannot use this disk
with the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system. Reformat the disk.
Not an MS-DOS system disk
Type any key to try again

You tried to start the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system from a nonsystem MS-DOS disk. Restart the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system
using a valid system disk.

5-23

Messages
Not enough memory to transfer files

The RDCPM program did not have enough memory to transfer all the files
you specified. Transfer the files one at a time.
Not enough room to merge the entire file

You used the EDLIN TRANSFER command to transfer a file to memory,
but there was not enough room in memory to hold the file. Free some
memory by writing some files to disk and then transfer the file.
Not ready error reading/writing drive drv
Abort, Retry. Ignore?

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system could not access the drive you
specified.
1. Check the door of the drive specified in the message. If it is open,

close the door and press the R key to retry the command.
2. Check the diskette in the drive specified in the message. If it is
upside-down, insert it in the drive correctly and press the R key to
retry the command.
Out of environment space

You used a SET command but there is not enough room in the program
environment to accept more data. Reduce the size of the data in the program environment by entering smaller SET parameters.
Please set the system date and time first.

You used the BACKUP program without setting the date and time. You
must set the date and time before you can back up, restore, or verify files.

5-24

Messages
PRINT queue is full

You tried to place more than 10 files in the PRINT queue. Wait until some
files are printed before adding more files to the queue.
Printer isn't on.

The SETPORT program tried to use the printer but either the printer is
turned off, the printer cable is not connected, or the printer is not supported. Turn the printer on or connect the printer cable.
Probable non-DOS disk.
Continue (YIN)?

You created a disk that the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system did not
recognize. Either you created the disk on another system with a format not
supported on the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system, or the disk is
not an MS-DOS disk.
If the CHKDSK program displays this message for a diskette, stop processing. If the CHKDSK program displays this message for a hard disk, the
information describing the characteristics of the disk to the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system has been destroyed. In this case, you can continue the CHKDSK program processing.

Program too big to fit in memory

You used an application program that needs more memory than you have in
your Rainbow computer. If you configured MDRIVE, either configure a
smaller MDRIVE or remove MDRIVE. If you did not have MDRIVE configured, you must acquire more memory to run your application program.
It is also possible that you just used an application program that is still in
memory. Restart the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system and try to
use the application program again. If this message is displayed again, you
must acquire more memory.

5-25

Messages
Read error occured

The RDCPM program found an error while reading a CP/M-86/80 file.
Check the integrity of the file by loading the CP/M-86/80 operating system
and typing the file. If your file is correct, copy the file to a new diskette
and use the RDCPM program again.
Read fault error reading/writing drive drv
Abort, Retry, Ignore?

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system could not read from or write
to the disk drive. Press the R key to retry the command.
If the problem persists, press the A key to abort the command. Your disk
drive may be malfunctioning. Reset your Rainbow computer and run the
Rainbow self-test diagnostics by pressing S from the Rainbow Main System
Menu.
Save volume is bad

The BACKUP program found an error on the back-up diskettes while verifying the files. Your back-up diskettes are unusable. Reformat the faulty
back-up diskette and use the BACKUP program again.
Sector not found error reading/writing drive drv
Abort, Retry, Ignore?

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system could not read from or write
to the disk. The disk may be unusable. Press the R key to retry the
command.
If the problem persists, press the A key to abort the command. Then, copy
all files to a new diskette or back up and reformat your hard disk.

5-26

Messages
Sector size too large in file filename

The CONFIG.SYS file loaded the specified device driver that used a sector
size larger than that of any other device driver on the system. You cannot
run this device driver. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file to delete the DEVICE=
entry.

Seek error reading/writing drive drv
Abort, Retry, Ignore?

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system could not read from or write
to the disk. The disk may be unusable. Press the R key to retry the
command.
If the problem persists, press the A key to abort the command. Copy all
files to a new diskette or back up and reformat your hard disk.

SETPORT uses no command line arguments

You used an argument on the SETPORT command line. You cannot use
arguments on the SETPORT command line.
Sorry, a disk erase error occured

The BACKUP program found an unrecoverable error on the diskette being
erased. Use the FORMAT program with the /1 switch and then start the
BACKUP program again.

Sorry, a drive specifier is allowed only for indirect files

You specified a drive specification in the BACKUP program's backup,
restore, or verify file specifier option. You cannot specify a drive specification in the backup, restore, or verify file specifier option unless it is for an
indirect file.
If you are specifying an indirect file, you must precede the file specification
with an @ sign. Otherwise, enter the drive specification by the displayed
menu items above the file specification by pressing the arrow keys.
5-27

Messages
Sorry, a file specifier can't contain a drive name.

The BACKUP program found one or more file names with a drive specification in the file specified in the backup, restore, or verify file specifier
option. Edit the file and remove the drive specifications.
Sorry, an indirect file cannot be specified here

You specified an indirect file in the BACKUP program's backup, restore, or
verify exclusion file specifier option. Remove the indirect file reference in
the backup, restore, or verify exclusion file specifier option.
Sorry, an unidentified error has occured

The BACKUP program found an unidentified error. Run the BACKUP program again. If the problem persists, copy the BACKUP.EXE file from your
back-up MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system diskette and try again. If
the problem still persists, call the DIGITAL Help Line for help.
Sorry, can't open the directory file

The BACKUP program found an error with the data on your back-up diskettes while restoring your files. Run the BACKUP program again. If the
problem persists, copy the BACKUP.EXE file from your back-up MS-DOS
Version 2.11 operating system diskette and try again. If this does not work,
restore your hard disk from an older back-up volume.
Sorry, can't open the specified indirect «) file.

The BACKUP program could not find the indirect file you specified. Reenter a valid indirect file name.
Sorry, legal switches are: /D and / A.

You used an invalid switch in the BACKUP program's backup, restore, or
verify file specifier option. You can only use the jD and IA switches in the
backup, restore, or verify file specifier options. Reenter a valid switch.
5-28

Messages
Sorry, no files have been matched.

You specified file names in the BACKUP program's backup, restore, or
verify file specifier option and the backup, restore, or verify exclusion file
specifier option that did not match any of the files on either the hard disk
or back-up diskettes. Reenter a backup, restore, or verify file specifier
option and a backup, restore, or verify exclusion file specifier option that
include valid file names.
Sorry, not enough memory for the file buffer.

You tried to copy too many files to back-up diskettes using the BACKUP
program. Instead of copying all your files at once, use the BACKUP program several times.
Sorry, not enough memory for the file list.

You tried to copy too many files to back-up diskettes using the BACKUP
program. Instead of copying all your files at once, use the BACKUP program several times.
Sorry, not enough room in the hard disk root for another sub-directory

The BACKUP program tried to create a sub-directory but there are too
many directory entries on the root directory of the hard disk. Delete some
files from your root directory on the hard disk and copy them back into
sub-directories on the hard disk.
Sorry, not enough room on the hard disk for another sub-directory

The BACKUP program tried to create a sub-directory but there is not
enough room on your hard disk. Delete some files from your hard disk and
run the BACKUP program again.
5-29

Messages
Sorry, not enough room on the hard disk for this file

The BACKUP program tried to restore a file to your hard disk. There are
either too many directory entries on the root directory of the hard disk, or
the hard disk is full. Delete some files from your root directory on the hard
disk, and run the BACKUP program again.
Sorry, pathnames are limited to 64 characters.

The BACKUP program tried to backup a file with a file specification larger
than 64 characters. Use the CHDIR program to change your current path,
and use the BACKUP program several times.
Sorry, the destination drive must be specified

You did not specify a destination drive to the BACKUP program. Run the
BACKUP program again and specify a valid destination drive.
Sorry, the disk is not a backup volume

You used a diskette that was not written by the BACKUP program. Insert
the correct back-up diskette.
Sorry, the indirect file is is incorrectly formatted.

The BACKUP program found an invalid list of file names in the indirect
file. Edit and enter a valid list of file names in your indirect file.
Sorry, the source drive must be specified

You did not identify either the drive on a RESTORE command, or the hard
disk drive on a BACKUP command in the command line. Reenter the
RESTORE or BACKUP command specifying the source drive.

5-30

Messages
Sorry, this entry cannot contain a file extension.

You specified a period in the BACKUP program volume name. Reenter
another volume name without a period.
Sorry, this entry cannot contain a path specification.

You specified a backslash (\) in the BACKUP program volume name. Reenter another volume name without a backslash.
Sorry, this entry may contain a single file specifier only

You specified a comma in the BACKUP program volume name. Reenter
another volume name without a comma.
Sorry, this entry may not contain any 'switches'

You specified a slash (f) in the BACKUP program volume name. Reenter
another volume name without a slash.

Sorry, valid flags are: / ALL and /CHANGED

You specified an invalid switch on the BACKUP command line. You can
only use the fALL and fCHANGED switches. Reenter the command line
with the correct switch.
Sorry, valid floppy drives are: A, B, C, and D

You specified a nonexistent drive on the BACKUP command line. Reenter
the command line with the correct drive (A:, B:, C:, or D:).
Sorry, valid winchester drives are: E, F, G, and H

You specified a nonexistent hard disk drive on the BACKUP command line.
Reenter the command line with the correct drive (E:, F:, G:, or H:).

5-31

Messages
Sorry, volume name is improper.

You specified an incorrect back-up diskette name while using the BACKUP
program advanced menu option. The name does not match those on the
actual back-up diskettes. Use the DIRECTORY command to obtain the
name of the back-up diskettes and enter that name into the advanced menu
option.
Sorry, volume sequence is out of order

The BACKUP program found an internal programming error. Save your
diskettes. Call the DIGITAL Help Line for help.
Sorry, wildcards (* or ?) are not allowed in this entry.

You specified an asterisk (*) or question mark (?) in the BACKUP program
volume name. Reenter another volume name without an asterisk or question mark.
Sorry, you have not selected a valid winchester drive

You specified a nonexistent hard disk drive on the BACKUP command line.
Reenter the command line with a valid hard disk drive.
SORT: Incorrect DOS version

You tried to use a version of the SORT program that cannot be used with
the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system. Use the SORT program on
the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system diskette.
SORT: Insufficient disk space

You tried to create a file with the SORT program by redirecting the file to
a disk that is full. Specify a different disk or delete some files.

5-32

Messages
SORT: Insufficient memory

You tried to use the SORT program on a Rainbow computer with insufficient memory. If you configured MDRIVE, either configure a smaller
MDRIVE or remove MDRIVE. If you did not have MDRIVE configured,
you must acquire more memory to sort this list.
Source and target disks are not the
same format. Cannot do the copy.

The diskettes you used for the DISKCOPY program are not the same format. Reformat the target diskette so it is the same format as the source
diskette.
Specified COMMAND search directory bad

The COMSPEC= statement in the SET environment is invalid. Either the
place that you told the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system to look for
the COMMAND.COM file does not exist, or the COMMAND.COM file is
not in that place. Enter the SET COMSPEC= statement with a valid
COMMAND.COM file location.
Syntax error

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system did not recognize the command you typed. Check to make sure that you typed the command
correctly.
The command is incorrectly formatted

You typed the BACKUP command line using a wrong format. Reenter the
command using the correct format.

5-33

Messages
Too many resident drivers or programs to permit formatting.

Device drivers or resident programs (such as the PRINT program) are
using too much memory to allow the FORMAT program to run. Edit the
CONFIG.SYS file, remove one of the drivers to provide more system memory for the operation, and restart the MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating
system.
Track 0 bad - disk unusable

The FORMAT program found a defective sector. The FORMAT program
can compensate for defective sectors on the disk except for those near the
beginning. Use another disk.
Unable to create directory

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system could not create the directory
you specified. Check for a name conflict (that is, you may already have a
directory with the same name) or the disk may be full.
Unrecognized command In CONFIG.SYS

You used an invalid statement in your CONFIG.SYS file. Edit the
CONFIG.SYS file and correct the statement.
Unrecoverable error In directory
Convert directory to file (YIN)?

The CHKDSK program found an error in the directory. If you specified the
IF switch and respond Y(es) to the question, the CHKDSK program converts the bad directory to a file. You can then fix the directory yourself or
delete it.
If you respond N(o) to the question, you may not be able to write to or
read from the bad directory.

5-34

Messages
Use LA50 Remote Setup.

You used the LAIOO or LQP02 setup menu with your LA50 printer. Use
the LA50 setup menu.

Use LA 100 Remote Setup.

You used the LA50 or LQP02 setup menu with your LAIOO printer. Use
the LAIOO setup menu.

Use LQP02 Remote Setup.

You used the LA50 or LAIOO setup menu with your LQP02 printer. Use
the LQP02 setup menu.
WARNING: Cannot read bad block information from hard disk.
Errors in files may occur on this drive.

The FORMAT program could not read the information telling it where bad
blocks (if any) are located. Back up the hard disk and use the Winchester
Utility Program to test the hard disk and reinitialize if necessary.

Warning - directory full

The root directory was too full for RECOVER processing. Delete some files
in the root directory to free space.

WARNING: Files may not be intact on drive drv

If you have a hard disk, this message can display when you start the operating system. It indicates that there may be a problem with the files on the
hard disk.
Make a back-up copy of the files on the hard disk. Then, run the
Winchester Utility Program to initialize the hard disk, or reformat the partitions on the hard disk.

5-35

Messages
WARNING: Only 8 MBytes of the hard disk Is usable.
Refer to the MS-DOS installation Instructions.

You created a 10M byte MS-DOS partition using the Winchester Utility
Program Version 1.0. However, you can only use 8M bytes of this partition
on your hard disk. Do not exceed 8M bytes of storage on this partition.
Back up all files currently on your hard disk. Using the Winchester Utility
Program Version 2.0, test and initialize your hard disk. Then, repartition
and create a configuration that meets your needs. Finally, restore your
files.
WARNING: The hard disk is not formatted or not partitioned

This message occurs if:
• The hard disk has not been installed properly for the MS-DOS Version
2.11 operating system.
• The hard disk has been tested and installed successfully for the
MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system, but the MS-DOS Version
2.11 operating system does not recognize the hard disk.
Use the Winchester Utility Program Version 2.0 to run the diagnostic test
and the initialization procedure.
If the problem persists:

• Call your vendor.
• Call the DIGITAL Help Line.

5-36

Messages
Write fault error reading/writing drive drv
Abort, Retry, Ignore?

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system could not read from or write
to the disk drive. Press the R key to retry the command.

If the problem persists, press the A key to abort the command. Your disk
drive may be malfunctioning. Reset your Rainbow computer and run the
Rainbow self-test diagnostics by pressing S from the Rainbow Main System
Menu.
Write protect error reading/writing drive drv
Abort, Retry, Ignore?

The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system could not write to the diskette
displayed in the message. Check to see if the diskette has a write-protect
tab. If it does, remove the write-protect tab. Press the R key to proceed.

If the error persists, press the A key to abort the command. Your disk
drive may be malfunctioning. Reset your Rainbow computer and run the
Rainbow self-test diagnostics by pressing S from the Rainbow Main System
Menu.

5-37

A
Getting Help

Help Line Phone Numbers
Country

Phone Number

U.S.A.
Canada
United Kingdom
Belgium
West Germany
Italy
Japan
Denmark
Spain
Finland
Holland
Switzerland
Sweden
Norway
France
Austria
Australia
Sydney
All other areas

(800) DEC-8000
(800) 267-5251
(0256) 59 200
(02)-24 26 790
(089) 95 91 66 44
(02)-617 53 81 or 617 53 82
(0424) 64-3302
(04)-30 10 05
(1)-73 34 307
(90)-42 33 32
(1820)-31 100
(01)-810 51 21
(08)-98 88 35
(02)-25 64 22
(1)-687 31 52
(222)-67 76 41 extension 444
(02) 412-5555
(008) 226377

A- 1

B
Diskettes

Flexible dis~ettes, when used with care, are remarkably durable and reliable
storage devices. Any given portion of a diskette's surface can be read and
written upon millions of times before the oxide film that holds the data
begins to wear too thin to consistently hold data. Moreover, flexible diskettes routinely pass, without a single error, diagnostic tests that fill the
diskette tracks with data which is checked, changed, and rewritten in
worst-case format, over and over and over.
In spite of their ruggedness and reliability, flexible diskettes (the pros call
them "floppies") have acquired a somewhat poor reputation in data processing circles. Why?
A glance in any computer room or office where flexible diskettes are used
shows them sitting on top of video terminals exposed to heat and magnetic
fields, sitting beneath coffee cups and cold drink cans, and even lying on the
floor without their protective envelopes.
Although many of these diskettes forget what they were told, a surprising
number of them continue working through the coffee and cola rings,
through the grit and grime and magnetic influences, for months or years at
a time.
B-1

Diskettes

Don't push your luck. If you wish to avoid joining the ranks of frustrated
flexible diskette users, carefully observe the following precautions.

Storing Diskettes
• Keep flexible diskettes in dose-fitting, dust-tight boxes Oike those they
are packaged in when you buy them ten at a time).
• Store these boxes in rooms with consistent temperature, humidity, and
cleanliness.

Handling Diskettes
Follow the tips below when handling diskettes.
• Avoid bending the diskettes. The "flexibility" of flexible diskettes is an
accident of their design, not a goal. They will bend, but when bent
their covers tend to crease or warp in ways that cause wear and
binding when the drives rotate the diskette inside. Insert diskettes
gently into their drives.
• Never allow your fingers to touch the diskette data surface (that is,
the shiny, usually brown or black surface inside the black cover). Body
oils cause the drive read/write heads (small electromagnets used to
read or write information) to behave erratically-usually at the cost of
data.
• Always return diskettes to their protective envelopes-even if you
expect to use them again in a few seconds. One piece of grit on a
diskette picked up from a desk top can wipe out a week's work.
• Keep diskettes far away from magnets. Magnets are often used to
hold notes and piotures to metal surfaces. These handy items can
damage diskettes.
• The best place to store diskettes, even temporarily, is in their storage
boxes. However, if you must lay your diskettes (in their protective
envelopes, of course) on your desk top rather than replace them in
their storage boxes, never lay anything on top of them. Once you
cover a diskette with a memo, the next thing you lay down will inevitably be a magnetized paperweight, stapler, or a key ring.
B-2

Diskettes

Using Diskettes
• Always identify your diskettes with the self-sticking labels. You can
always ask the computer to tell you what is on the diskette, but this
slows you down unnecessarily. If you fill out these labels after they
are applied to the diskette cover, use only felt-tip pens because they
require minimum pressure. Never use a ball-point pen or pencil. They
can seriously deform both the diskette cover and the diskette inside. If
you place a new label on a diskette, be sure to gently peel off the old
label first. Placing labels on top of labels can cause the diskette to be
seated improperly in a drive.
• Never allow diskettes to become so full that you risk running out of
space while trying to write data to them. Leave some free space on
your data diskettes.
• When running application programs that write data to diskettes, do not
exchange one diskette for another except when the program tells you
to do so or has finished executing. Some programs open files and leave
them open until all the required data has been entered and acted upon.
You almost certainly will have trouble if you exchange diskettes in the
middle of such an operation.
• Do not turn the computer's power on or off when a diskette is
inserted into any drive.

Diskette Backup Procedures
These procedures involve making copies of any edited diskettes.
Why? A diskette is not immortal. Sliding a diskette in and out of its jacket
or a poor drive will wear it out. Accidents mentioned above and under
"Handling Diskettes" may also occur.

B-3

Diskettes

Follow these tips and protect your work.
• Make copies of original diskettes. Label the original "master" and
store it. You might want to make two copies of the original.
• Set up a diskette rotation method. Use five diskettes. At the close of
day one, copy diskette work onto day two's diskette. At the close of
day two copy work onto day three's diskette. Label diskettes with the
numbers, actual dates, or days of the week.
• Take diskettes out of use after six months of rotation.
Above all "better safe than sorry". Months of work can be lost due to
worn-out or damaged diskettes.

Diskettes and Files
The MS-DOS operating system deals with a wide range of information
including programs, text, and data. Information is organized in the form of
files, and the files are stored on diskettes. File names distinguish electronic
files much the same way as labels on file folders distinguish paper files in a
cabinet.

Storing Information on Diskettes
The computer stores and retrieves files by referring to tracks and sectors
on a diskette (see Figure B-1). Rainbow diskettes have 80 tracks, (numbered 0-79); each track is composed of ten sectors. Sectors store blocks of
"bytes, " each byte represents one character such as a letter, a digit, or a
symbol. Because each sector has a unique location on a diskette, the computer can find a particular sector on a particular track and store information
in it or retrieve information from it.

8-4

Diskettes

TRACK a

NOTE:

THERE IS NO SECTOR 0

PLASTIC COVER

:![ /',.- ..---- - -. -. ,
/

/
~
/

THIN MYLAR DISKETTE COATED
WITH MAGNETIC MATERIAL
(RECORDING SURFACE)

WRITE.

------------~>~-JEPROTECT

NOTCH

INNER EDGE OF
PLASTIC COVER --t-+I-----Jl-i

\
\
\
\

DRIVE SPINDLE
ACCESS HOLE"

...

,.-

--/

ACCESS HOLE FOR DISKETTE
READ/WRITE HEAD
• ROTATING SPINDLE ENTERS THIS HOLE,
GRABS DISKETTE, AND SPINS IT,

Figure B-1. Tracks and Sectors on a Diskette

The amount of information you can store on a diskette depends on the
diskette's "density." The Rainbow computer's double density diskettes can
hold twice as much information as single density diskettes. You can store
about 115 pages of typewritten text on one diskette assuming 54 lines per
page and 65 characters per line.

8-5

Diskettes

Protecting Data on Diskettes
You can protect the data on a diskette from being accidentally deleted by
applying a self-sticking write-protect tab onto the diskette's write-protect
notch (Figure B-2). This tab prevents the computer from writing on the
diskette. You can remove the write-protect tab by peeling it off the diskette
when you want the computer to write on it.
You can purchase write-protect tabs at any computer store.

L-.------------"i1~

WRITEPROTECT

TAB

Figure B-2. Applying a Write-Protect Tab

8-6

c
Reading IBM Diskettes
Copying Data or Programs from
IBM Diskettes
The Rainbow MS-DOS operating system can copy an 8-sector or 9-sector,
single-sided IBM diskette.
If you want to copy data files or programs from an IBM diskette to a
Rainbow diskette, follow the steps below.
1. Display the Rainbow Main System Menu according to one of the following procedures:

• Turn on the Rainbow computer if it is turned off
• Reset the Rainbow computer if it is turned on
2. Remove the MS-DOS working diskette from its protective envelope.
3. Open the drive A door and insert the MS-DOS working diskette.
4. Start the MS-DOS operating system by pressing the A key in response
to the Main System Menu. After entering the correct time and date,
the operating system prompt, "A>", should be the last characters
displayed on the screen.
5. Remove the IBM diskette from its protective envelope.

C-l

Reading IBM Diskettes

6. Open the drive B door and insert the IBM diskette.
7. Use COpy to copy all or some of the data files or programs from the
IBM diskette to the MS-DOS working diskette.
To copy ALL files, type:
A)COPV 8:*.* A:/V(Return)

To copy SOME files, type:
A)COPV 8:filename.typ A:/V(Rerum)

NOTE
We do not recommend writing onto non-RX50K
diskettes or diskettes that have not been
formatted with the /1 switch. The MS-DOS
operating system allows you to do this, but you
could see unexpected results if you try to read the
diskettes on a computer other than the Rainbow.

C-2

D
International Features

This appendix includes information about the international features of the
MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system. These features include:
1. Using international characters in file names

2. Using the international conventions for date, time, currency and more.

D-1

International Features

International Characters
Figure D-1 lists the international characters you can use in file names.

o
o

'';

•

"
'4

'j;'

.II

-.-

-I-

Figure 0-1. International Characters

H these keys are not printed on your keycaps and you have a Rainbow
100B or Rainbow 100+ computer, you can create them by using the three
key compose sequence. See the Rainbow Owner's Manual for more information about compose character sequences.

D-2

International Features

International Conventions
The MS-DOS Version 2.11 operating system can modify the information it
displays with the DIR, DATE and TIME commands and some applications
to support the conventions used in your country. These conventions include:
Date
Time
Currency
Thousands Separator
Decimal Point
To tell the MS-DOS operating system which country's convention you want
to use, insert the country's code into the CONFIG.SYS file. This file is
stored on the operating system diskette.

NOTE
The default country code is 1 (for the United
States). When you first display the contents of the
file CONFIG.SYS, there is no country code visible.
If you want to specify another country, you must
add the country code to the file.
An example of changing the conventions follows:

1. Type:
A>EDLIN CDNFIG.SYS

MS-DOS displays:
End of input file

•

D-3

International Features
2. Type:
I nser t (Return)

MS-DOS displays:
*2

NOTE
This may be another number depending on how
many lines are already in the CONFIG.SYS file on
your diskette.
3. Type:
Country=nn

Where:
nn

Is one of the country codes below:
United States

France

United Kingdom

33
34
35
39
44

Germany

Japan

Israel

Spain
Portugal
Italy

D-4

International Features

For example, to specify France, type:
Country=33

4. Press:

5. Type:
*End

The next time you reset or turn on your computer, the conventions for the
country you specified will be reflected.

D-5

Index

fA switch
BACKUP 2-27
using at the BACKUP command line
2-46
using in the BACKUP menu 2-25
Active drive 1-6
Add text into a file
with EDLIN 4-14
Add text to a file
with EDLIN 4-34
Adding an extra disk drive 2-65
Advanced backup procedures 2-22
Advanced restore procedures 2-32
Advanced verify procedures 2-38
Append lines to a file
with EDLIN 4-23
Applying write-protect tabs B-6
Asterisk
used as a wildcard 2-7
in BACKUP 2-25
Asterisk (*) prompt 4-3

Backing up hard disk files 2-19
BACKUP 2-15
fA 2-46
fA switch 2-25, 2-27
fD 2-46
fD switch 2-25, 2-27
advanced backup procedures 2-22
advanced procedures 2-22
advanced restore options 2-32
advanced verify procedures 2-38
at the command line 2-44
command line 2-16
compare files 2-35
coping files from the hard disk 2-19
directory of backup diskettes 2-40
getting help 2-18
leave program 2-44
Main Screen 2-17
menu 2-16
path names that are too long 2-47
restore procedure 2-29

1-1

Index
restrictions 2-47
set date and time 2-42
specifing file 2-25
starting from menu 2-19
verify files 2-35
Backup diskettes 2-19, 2-21
directory of 2-40
Backup procedures B-3
.BAK files 4-4, 4-32
Batch commands 2-11
BREAK 2-11
Byte B-4

c
Cancel current line 3-7
Cancel Key 4-12
Changing active drive 1-24
Changing lines in a file 4-30
Characters
international D-2
Characters used in file names 2-5
CHDIR 2-11
Checking a diskette 1-14
Checking diskette for errors 2-49
CHKDSK 1-14, 2-49
Clearing the screen 2-50
CLS 2-50
Command
defined 2-2
stop current command 3-7
Command line 2-2
for the BACKUP program 2-16, 2-44
remove last character 3-7
Commands
advanced 2-10
BACKUP 2-15
batch 2-11
BREAK 2-11
CHDIR 2-11
CHKDSK 1-14, 2-49

1-2

CLS 2-50
conventions 2-12
COpy 1-24, 2-51
CTTY 2-11
DATE 2-56
DEL 1-27,2-58
DIR 1-8, 2-59
DISKCOPY 2-61
ECHO 2-11
EDLIN 1-15
ERASE 2-63
EXE2BIN 2-11
EXIT 2-11
external 2-8
FIND 2-11
FOR 2-11
FORMAT 2-64
GOTO 2-11
IF 2-11
internal 2-8
invalid 5-1
LDCOPY 2-11
MDRIVE 2-65
MEDIACHK 2-11
MKDIR 2-11
MORE 2-11
operating system 2-8
PATH 2-11
PAUSE 2-11
PRINT 1-19, 2-68
PROMPT 2-11
RDCPM 2-70
RECOVER 2-11
REM 2-11
REN 2-72
RMDIR 2-11
SET 2-73
SETPORT 2-76
SHIFT 2-11
SORT 2-11
SYS 2-81

Index
TIME 2-83
TYPE 2-84
VER 2-85
VERIFY 2-86
VOL 2-87
XATTACH 2-11
XDETACH 2-11
XMODE 2-11
Communications connector
setting parameters for 2-6
Compare files
using BACKUP 2-35
Concatenation 2-53
Control characters 3-7
inserting with EDLIN 4-20
COPY 1-24, 2-51
Copy mUltiple characters 4-8
Copy template to command line 4-9
Copying a file to another diskette
1-24, 2-55
Copying a memo 1-21
Copying an entire diskette 2-61
Copying files 2-51
Copying files from diskettes
restore 2-29
Copying files from the hard disk 2-19
Copying MS-DOS system files 2-81
Correcting
spelling mistakes 1-10
typing mistakes 1-10
Creating a memo 1-15
CTTY 2-11
Cursor
changing 1-7

D
/D switch
BACKUP 2-27
using at the BACKUP command line
2-46
using in the BACKUP menu 2-25

Data surface of diskette B-2
DATE 2-56
Date
entering 1-4
setting 2-56
for BACKUP 2-42
Default drive 1-6, 2-6, 2-12
DEL 1-27, 2-58
Delete lines from a file
with EDLIN 4-27
Delete character key 1-12
Deleting a file 1-27
Deleting files from a diskette 2-58
Delimiters 2-12
Density of diskette B-5
Destination drive 2-12
DIR 2-59
Directory
defined 2-7
displaying 1-25
displaying on the screen 1-8
file 1-8
Directory of backup diskettes 2-40
DISKCOPY 2-61
Diskette
applying write-protect tab B-6
backup procedures B-3
data surface B-2
density B-5
floppies B-1
handling B-2
master B-4
preparing 1-21
sectors B-4
starting the operating system 1-2
storing B-2
storing information B-4
tracks B-4
using B-3

1-3

Index
Diskettes
backup 2-19, 2-21
reading CP/M-86/80 files 2-70
reading IBM diskettes C-l
Displaying
directory 1-8, 1-25
file 1-26
Displaying a directory 2-59
Displaying a memo 1-18
Do Key 4-9
Drives
active 1-6
changing 1-24
default 1-6

E
ECHO 2-11
Editing commands
Quit input 4-12
Right arrow characters 4-6
Editing keys
using on the command line 3-4
Editing lines in a file 4-30
Editor 1-15
EDLIN
.BAK files 4-4
changing an existing file 4-4
creating a new file 4-3
editing an existing file 4-4
inserting text 1-15
leaving 1-16
special editing keys 4-5
starting 1-15, 4-3
EDLIN commands
Append Lines 4-23
Copy Lines 4-24
Delete Lines 4-27
Edit Line 4-30
End Editing 4-32
Insert Text 4-34
List Text 4-38

1-4

Move Text 4-41
options 4-21
Page Text 4-42
Quit Editing 4-43
Replace Lines 4-44
Search Text 4-48
Transfer Text 4-52
using 4-18
Write Text 4-53
End-of-line
insert 3-7
Entering
date 1-4
time 1-5
ERASE 2-63
Erasing files from a diskette 2-63
Error messages 1-28, 5-1
Escape character
with EDLIN 4-34
EXE2BIN 2-11
EXIT 2-11
Extended communications connector
2-76
External commands 2-8

F
File
copying to another diskette 1-24
deleting 1-27
displaying 1-26
File name 1-9
File names
characters in 2-5
illegal 2-5
File type 1-9

Index
Files
comparing hard disk and diskette
2-35
copying from hard disk 2-19
copying MS-DOS system files 2-80
copying to another diskette 2-55
data 1-7
defined 2-3
deleting all from a diskette 2-58
indirect 2-25
listing on the screen 2-84
naming of 2-4
program 1-7
renaming 2-72
restoring hard disk 2-29
FIND 2-11
Find key 4-11
Floppies B-1
FOR 2-11
FORMAT 1-21, 2-64

G
GOTO 2-11

H
Handling diskettes B-2
Hard disk
backing up files from 2-19
BACKUP command line 2-44
BACKUP menu 2-16
BACKUP program 2-15
changing date and time 2-43
comparing files 2-35
directory options 2-41
restoring files 2-29
verify backup files 2-35
Help key 2-18, 2-20, 2-30

IF 2-11
Indirect file 2-25
Insert Here Key 4-14
Insert text into a file 4-14
with EDLIN 4-34
Inserting text 1-15
Internal commands 2-8
International characters D-2
Interrupt key
to insert escape character 4-34
Invalid commands 5-1

K
Key
Cancel 4-12
Do 4-9
Find 4-11
Help 2-20, 2-30
Insert Here 4-14
Remove 4-10
Resume 4-16
Right Arrow 4-6
Select 4-8
Keyboard keys
delete character 1-12
Return 1-8
Keys
editing 3-4

L
LAI00 printer
setting parameters for 2-76
LA50 printer
setting parameters for 2-76
LDCOPY 2-11
Leaving EDLIN 1-16
Leaving the BACKUP program 2-44

1-5

Index
Line
cancel current line 3-7
Line editor 4-2
Listing a file 2-84
Listing files on a diskette 2-59
Locating lines 4-18
with the hyphen key 4-18
with the plus key 4-18
Looking at the contents of a file 1-26
LQP02 printer
setting parameters for 2-76

M
Main System Menu 1-3
Master diskette B-4
MDRIVE 2-65
MEDIACHK 2-11
Memo
copying 1-21
creating 1-15
displaying 1-18
printing 1-19
Menu
BACKUP 2-16
Messages
error 5-1
MKDIR 2-11
MORE 2-11
Move text to another location
with EDLIN 4-41
MS-DOS messages 5-1
MS-DOS operating system
start-up message 1-3
starting from a diskette 1-2
Multiple commands
used with EDLIN 4-19

N
Naming files 2-4

1-6

o
Operating system
commands 2-8
Operating system defined 1-1

P
PATH 2-11
Path names 2-7
PAUSE 2-11
Preparing a diskette 1-21, 2-64
PRINT 2-68
PRINT command 1-19
Printer
turn on/off echoing 3-7
turn on/off output 3-7
Printer connector
setting parameters for 2-76
Printing a file 2-68
Printing a memo 1-19
PROMPT 2-11
Prompt 1-4
operating system symbol 2-12

Q
Question mark
used as a wildcard 2-6
in BACKUP 2-25

R
RDCPM 2-70
Reading CP/M-86/80 diskettes 2-70
Reading IBM diskettes C-l
RECOVER 2-11
REM 2-11
Remove Key 4-10
Removing files from a diskette
2-58,2-63
REN 2-72

Index
RENAME (synonym for REN) 2-72
Renaming a file 2-72
Replace a string with another
with EDLIN 4-44
Reserved words 2-5, 2-12
Reset 1-29
Resetting the computer 1-29
Restore options 2-30
Restoring files 2-29
Resume Key 4-16
Return key 1-8
Right Arrow
Key 4-6
RMDIR 2-11

s
/S switch
FORMAT 2-64
Screen
stop output display 3-7
Sectors B-4
Select Key 4-8
SET 2-73
SETPORT 2-76
Setting the date 2-56
BACKUP 2-42
Setting the time 2-82
BACKUP 2-42
SHIFT 2-11
SORT 2-11
Source drive 2-12
Special editing keys 3-2
used with EDLIN 4-5
using on the command line 3-4
Specifing files to back up 2-25
Standard verify options 2-36
Starting BACKUP from menu 2-19
Starting EDLIN 1-15
Starting the operating system
from a diskette 1-2
Stop current command 3-7

Stop output display on screen 3-7
Storing diskettes B-2
Storing information on diskette B-4
Sub-directory 2-7
Switches 2-13
SYS 2-81

T
Template
creating a new template 4-16
Text editor 1-15
TIME 2-82
Time
entering 1-5
setting 2-82
for BACKUP 2-42
Tracks B-4
TYPE 2-83

u
Using diskettes B-3

V
VER 2-84
VERIFY 2-85
Verify backup files 2-35
Verify files 2-85
with BACKUP 2-28
Version number
displaying 2-85
VOL 2-87
Volume label
assigning 2-64
displaying 2-87

1-7

Index

w
Wildcards 2-6, 2-12
used in backup 2-25
Working directory 2-7
Write lines to a file
with EDLIN 4-53
Write-protect tab B-6

x
XATTACH 2-11
XDETACH 2-11
XMODE 2-11

1-8

RainbowTM
MSTM_DOS
Version 2.11
User's Guide

AA-EA07A-XV
READER'S COMMENTS

Did you find this manual understandable, usable, and well-organized? Please
make suggestions for improvement.

Did you find errors in this manual? If so, specify the error and the page number.

Please indicate the type of reader that you most nearly represent.

D First-time computer user
D Experienced computer user
D Application package user
D Programmer
D Other (please specify) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Name_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Date'_____________________________
Organization_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
StreetL-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
City_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
State,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Zip Code
orCount~-------------------------

I
1
I

It. g~;'gTeagr- HeIr.e a...
id
FOa

T . - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - -

-ffl-lll--------~~:;~: --_.

if Mailed in the
United States

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 33 MAYNARD MASS.
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

SOFTWARE PUBLICATIONS

200 FOREST STREET MR01-2/L 12
MARLBOROUGH, MA 01752

- - - -

Do Not

Tear - Fold Here and Tape -- --------------- ------------ ------ --- ------

:!!

:::i

]

oS!

11.1
1
1
1
I

;

AA-EAOBA-XV

MSTM_ DOS
Version 2.11
Advanced User's Guide

digital equipment corporation

First Printing, October 1984

© Digital Equipment Corporation 1984. All Rights Reserved.
This document is reproduced with the permission of Microsoft Corporation.
© Microsoft Corporation 1982. All Rights Reserved.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should
not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital
Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may
appear in this document.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license and may
only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such license.
No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on equipment
that is not supplied by DIGITAL or its affiliated companies.
MS'"-DOS is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
CP/M is a registered trademark of Digital Research Inc. CP/M-80 and CP/M-86
are trademarks of Digital Research Inc.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

~D~DD~D'"
DEC
DECmate
DECsystem-10
DECSYSTEM-20
DECUS
DECwriter
DIBOl

GIGI
MASSBUS
PDP
P/OS
Professional
Rainbow
RSTS

RSX
UNIBUS
VAX
VMS

VT
Work Processor

The postage-prepaid READER'S COMMENTS form on the last page of this
document requests the user's critical evaluation to assist us in preparing future
documentation.

Printed in U.S.A.

CONTENTS

DIRECTORIES AND PATHS

:HAPTER
1.1
1.2
1 .2. 1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7

CHAPTER 2
2.1
2.2
2.2.1
2.3
2.3.1

CHAPTER 3
3.1
3. 1 • 1
3.1.2
3.1.3

CHAPTER 4
4.1
4.2

·····
·····

1-1
· · . · · 1-5
1-5
.
· · · · · · · · 1-7
1-8
1-9
·1-10
·········
1-11
1-11
······

DIRECTORIES
FILENAMES AND PATHS
Pathnames
Pathing and External Commands
Pathing and Internal Commands
Displaying Your Working Directory
Creating a Directory
How to Change Your Working Directory
How to Remove a Directory
BATCH PROCESSING

···········
·······

BATCH PROCESSING
THE AUTOEXEC.BAT FILE
How to Create an AUTOEXEC.BAT File
CREATING A .BAT FILE WITH REPLACEMENT PARAMETERS
Executing a .BAT File
·

······· · ··

2-1
2-5
2-7
2-9
2-10

REDIRECTION OF INPUT AND OUTPUT

····

INPUT AND OUTPUT.
Redirecting Your Output
Filters
·
Command Piping

. ··
·····

····

· 3-1
3-1
· 3-3
3-3

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS

···

COMMAND FORMATS
MS-DOS ADVANCED COMMANDS

iii

4-1
4-2

CHAPTER 5

5. 1
5. 1 • 1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8

CHAPTER 6

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10

APPENDIX A
A.1

FILE COMPARISON UTILITY (FC)
INTRODUCTION • • . • • • • •
Limitations on Source Comparisons
FILE SPECIFICATIONS
HOW TO USE FC •• • • • • • • •
FC SWITCHES • • • • • • • • • •
DIFFERENCE REPORTING ••
REDIRECTING FC OUTPUT TO A FILE
EXAMPLES • • •
ERROR MESSAGES • •

· 5-1
• 5-2
• 5-2
5-3
· . 5-4
• 5-6
· • 5-7
· . 5-8

5-12

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)
INTRODUCTION •••
OVERVIEW OF MS-LINK
DEFINITIONS YOU'LL NEED TO KNOW
FILES THAT MS-LINK USES
Input File Extensions
Output File Extensions.
VM.TMP (Temporary) File
HOW TO START MS-LINK • . • •
Method 1: Prompts
Method 2: Command Line ••
Method 3: Response File
COMMAND CHARACTERS • •
COMMAND PROMPTS
MS-LINK SWITCHES • • • •
SAMPLE MS-LINK SESSION
ERROR MESSAGES •

• 6-1
6-2
• 6-4
• 6-6
· 6-6
6-7
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-11

6-13
6-15
6-17
6-20
6-24
6-26

HOW TO CONFIGURE YOUR SYSTEM
CHANGING THE CONFIG.SYS FILE • • . • . • . . • . • A-3

INDEX

FIGURES

6-2

A Sample Hierarchical Directory Structure
MS-DOS Batch File Steps . . • .
How MS-DOS Uses the AUTOEXEC.BAT File
The MS-LINK Operation
How Memory Is Divided

4-1
4-2

MS-DOS Advanced Commands
SORT Table . • • . • • .

1-1

2-1
2-2
6-1

1-3

• 2-3

• • • 2-6
• 6-3
• . • 6-4

TABLES

· 4-2

4-37

PREFACE

INTENDED READER
This guide is intended for the advanced user of the MS-DOS
operating system.
The purpose of this guide is to provide
detailed information about advanced MS-DOS concepts and
commands.
This guide assumes that you have:
o

Installed the Rainbow computer according to the
instructions in the Rainbow Installation Guide.

Read the Rainbow MS-DOS Version
Started contained in this kit.

Read the Rainbow MS-DOS Version ~
contained in this kit.

vii

User's

Getting
Guide

GUIDE ORGANIZATION
The Rainbow MS-DOS Version ~
organized as follows:

Advanced

User's

Guide

Chapter I

Discusses how to use directories
with the MS-DOS operating system

Chapter 2

Discusses batch processing

Chapter 3

Discusses input and output redirection

Chapter 4

Explains the advanced MS-DOS
are used by programmers

Chapter 5

Discusses the FILE COMPARISON (FC) utility

Chapter 6

Discusses the LINK utility

Appendix A

Tells you how to configure
the
MS-DOS
operating system for the Rainbow computer

vi i i

and

commands

paths

that

CHAPTER 1
DIRECTORIES AND PATHS

This chapter discusses the MS-DOS directory structure and
how to use file names and path names within this directory
structure.

1.1

DIRECTORIES

The names of your files are kept in a directory on each
disk.
The directory also contains information on the size
of the files, their locations on the disk, and the dates
that they were created and updated.
When there are multiple users on your computer, or when you
are working on several different projects, the number of
fi les in the directory can become large and unwieldy.
You
may want your own files kept separate from a co-worker's;
or, you may want to organize your programs into categories
that are convenient for you.
In an office, you can separate files by putting them in
different fil ing cabinets; in effect, creating different
directories of information. MS-DOS allows you to organize
the files on your disks into directories. Directories are a
way of dividing your files into convenient groups of files.
1-1

DIRECTORIES AND PATHS
For example, you may want all of your accounting programs in
one directory and text files in another. Anyone directory
can contain any reasonable number of files, and it may also
contain other directories (referred to as subdirectories).
This method of organizing your
files
is
called
a
hierarchical directory structure.
A hierarchical directory structure can be thought of as a
"tree" structure: directories are branches of the tree and
files are the leaves, except that the "tree" grows downward;
that is, the "root" is at the top. The root is the first
level in the directory structure. It is the directory that
is automatically created when you format a disk and start
putting files in it. You can create additional directories
and subdirectories with some of the commands discussed in
Chapter 4, "Advanced MS-DOS Commands."
The tree or file structure grows as you create
new
directories for groups of files or for other people on the
system. Within each new directory, files can be added, or
new subdirectories can be created.
It is possible for you to "travel" around this tree.
For
instance, it is possible to find any file in the system by
starting at the root and travel ing down any of the branches
to the desired file. Conversely, you can start where you
are within the file system and travel towards the root.
Unless you take special action when you create a file, new
files are created in the directory in which you are now
working. Users can have files of the same name that are
unrelated because each is in a different directory.
Figure 1-1
structure.

illustrates

typical

1-2

hierarchical

directory

DIRECTORIES AND PATHS

~R!~~~
GAMES

BIN

USERS

JOE

SUE

~I~

_______

CCOUNTS

ROGRAMS

MARY

/
\
')EXT . TXT
TEXT.TXT FORMS

Figure 1-1:

A Sample Hierarchical Directory Structure

The ROOT directory is the first level in the directory
structure.
You can create subdirectories from the ROOT by
using the MKDIR command (refer to Chapter 4, "Advanced
MS-DOS Commands ," for i nformat i on on MKD I R) •
In th i s
example, five subdirectories of ROOT have been created.
These include:
1.

A directory of gam~s, named GAMES

A directory of all external commands, named BIN

A USER directory containing separate subdirectories
for all users of the system

A directory containing
named ACCOUNTS

A directory of programs, named PROGRAMS

accounting

information,

Joe, Sue, and Mary each have their own directories that are
subdirectories
of
the
USER
directory.
Sue has a
subdirectory under the \USER\SUE directory named FORMS. Sue
and Mary have files in their directories, each named
TEXT.TXT. Notice that Maryls text file is unrelated to
Suels.

1-3

DIRECTORIES AND PATHS
This organization of files and directories is not important
if you only work with files in your own directory; but if
you work with someone else or on several projects at one
time, the hierarchical directory structure becomes extremely
useful. For example, you could get a 1 ist of the files in
Sue1s FORMS directory by typing:
DIR \USER\SUE\FORMS
Note that the backward slash mark (\) is used
directories from other directories and files.

separate

To find out what files Mary has in her directory, you
type:
DIR \USER\MARY

1-4

could

DIRECTORIES AND PATHS
1.2

FILENAMES AND PATHS

When you use hierarchical directories, you must tell MS-DOS
where the files are located in the directory structure.
Both Mary and Sue, for example, have fi les named TEXT.TXT.
Each will have to tell MS-DOS in which directory her file
resides if she wants to access it. This is done by giving a
pathname to the file.

1.2.1

Pathnames

A simple filename is a sequence of characters that can
optionally be preceded by a drive designation and followed
by an extension. A pathname is a sequence of directory
names followed by a simple filename, each separated from the
previous one by a backslash (\).
The syntax of pathnames is:
[<d>:] [<directory>]\[<directory ••• >]\[<fi lename>]
If a pathname begins with a slash, MS-DOS searches for the
file beginning at the root (or top) of the tree. Otherwise,
MS-DOS begins at the user's current directory, known as the
working directory, and searches downward from there. The
pathname of Sue1s TEXT.TXT file is \USER\SUE\TEXT.TXT.
When you are in your working directory, a filename and its
corresponding pathname may be used interchangeably. Some
sample names are:
Indicates the root directory.
\PROGRAMS

Sample directory
under
the
root
directory containing program files.

1-5

DIRECTORIES AND PATHS
\USER\MARY\FORMS\IA

A typical full pathname.
This one
happens to be a file named lA in the
directory named FORMS belonging to the
USER named MARY.

USER\SUE

A relative pathname; it names the file
or directory SUE in subdirectory USER
of the work i ng directory.
If the
working directory is the root (\).
(\). it names \USER\SUE.

TEXT.TXT

Name of a file or
working directory.

directory

the

MD-DOS provides special shorthand notations for the working
directory and the parent directory (one level up) of the
working directory:
MS-DOS uses this shorthand notation to indicate
the
name
of the working directory in all
hierarchical
directory
listings.
MS-DOS
automatically creates this entry when a directory
is made.
The shorthand name of the working
parent directory. If you type:

directory's

DI R ••

then MS-DOS will list the files in
directory of your working directory.

the

parent

If you type:
DIR •• \ ••
then MS-DOS will list the files in
PARENT directory.

1-6

the

parent's

DIRECTORIES AND PATHS
If you use a pathname in front of a command. (for example.
E:\DOS\PRINT). the MS-DOS operating system ignores the
command and returns to the operating system prompt. To use
a command not in the current directory. use the PATH
command.
You can use pathnames with the following MS-DOS commands:

1.2.2

BACKUP

FIND

CHOIR

LINK

COpy

MASM

DEBUG

MKDIR

DEL

PATH

DIR

RDCPM

EDLIN

RECOVER

ERASE

RMDIR

TYPE

Pathing and External Commands

External commands reside on disks as program files.
They
must be read from the disk before they execute. (For more
information on external commands. refer to the Rainbow
MS-DOS Version ~ User's Guide).
When you are working with more than one directory. it is
convenient to put all MS-DOS external commands into a
separate directory so they do not clutter your other
directories. When you issue an external command to MS-DOS.

1-7

DIRECTORIES AND PATHS
MS-DOS immediately checks your working directory to find
that command. You must tell MS-DOS in which directory these
external commands reside.
This is done with the PATH
command.
For example. if you are in a working directory named
\BIN\PROG. and all MS-DOS external commands are in \BIN. you
must tell MS-DOS to choose the \BIN path to find the FORMAT
command. The command
PATH \BIN
tells MS-DOS to search in your working directory and the
\BIN directory for all commands. You only have to specify
this path once to MS-DOS during your terminal session.
MS-DOS will now search in \BIN for the external commands.
If you want to know what the current path is. type the word
PATH and the current value of PATH will be printed.
For more information one the MS-DOS command PATH.
Chapter 4, II Advanced MS-DOS Commands."

1.2.3

refer

Pathing and Internal Commands

Internal commands are the simplest, most commonly used
execute immediately because they are
commands.
They
incorporated into the command
processor.
(For
more
information on internal commands, refer to the Rainbow
MS-DOS Version ~ User's Guide.)
Some internal commands can use paths.
The following four
commands. COPY, DIR. DEL. and TYPE have greater flexibility
when you specify a pathname after the command.

1-8

DIRECTORIES AND PATHS
The syntax of these four commands is shown below.
COpy <pathname pathname>
If the second pathname to COpy is a directory. all
files are copied into that directory.
DEL

<pathname>
If the pathname is a directory. all the files in
that directory are deleted.
Note: The prompt
"Are you sure (Y/N)?" will be displayed if you try
to delete a path. Type Y to complete the command.
or type N for the command to abort.

DIR

<pathname>
Displays the directory for a specific path.

TYPE <pathname>
You must specify a file in a path for this
command.
MS-DOS will display the file on your
screen in response to the TYPE pathname command.

1.2.4

Displaying Your Working rrirectory

All commands are executed while you are in your working
directory.
You can find out the name of the directory you
are in by issuing the MS-DOS command
CHD I R
(Change
Directory) with no options. For example. if your current
directory is \USER\JOE. when you type:
CHDIR<RETURN>
you wi 11 see:
A:\USER\JOE
This is your current drive
directory (\USER\JOE).

designation

1-9

plus

the

working

DIRECTORIES AND PATHS
If you now want to see what is in the \USER\JOE directory.
you can issue the MS-DOS command DIR. The following is an
example of the display you might receive from the DIR
command for a subdirectory:
Volume in drive A has no 10
Directory of A:\USER\JOE

TEXT
FILEI

<DIR>
<DIR>
<DIR>
COM
4 F i 1e (s)

8-06-84
8-06-84
8-06-84
5243
8-06-84
8376320 bytes free

10:09a
10:09a
10:09a
9:30a

A volume 10 for this disk was not assigned when the disk was
formatted.
Note
that
MS-DOS
lists both files and
directories in this output. As you can see, Joe has another
directory in this tree structure named TEXT.
The 1.1
indicates the working directory \USER\JOE, and the
is
the shorthand notation for the parent directory \USER.
FILEl.COM is a file in the \USER\JOE directory.
All of
these directories and files reside on the disk in drive A:.
Because files and directories are listed together (see
previous display), MS-DOS does not allow you to give a
subdirectory the same name as a file in that directory. For
example, if you have a path \BIN\USER\JOE where JOE is a
subdirectory, you cannot create a file in the USER directory
named JOE.

1.2.5

Creating a Directory

To create a subdirectory in your working directory, use the
MKDIR (Make Directory) command. For example, to create a
new directory named NEWDIR under your working directory,
simply type:
MKDIR NEWDJR
1-10

DIRECTORIES AND PATHS
After this command has been executed by MS-DOS, a new
directory will exist in your tree structure under your
working directory. You can also make directories anywhere
in the tree structure by specifying MKDIR and then a
pathname. MS-DOS will automatically create the
and
entries in the new directory.
To put files in the new directory, use the MS-DOS 1 ine
editor, EDLIN. The Rainbow MS-DOS Version ~ Userls Guide
describes how to use EDLIN to create and save files.

1.2.6

How to Change Your Working Directory

Changing from your working directory to another directory is
very easy in MS-DOS.
Simply issue the CHOIR (Change
Directory) command and supply a pathname. For example:
A>CHDIR \USER
changes the working directory from \USER\JOE to \USER.
You
can specify any pathname after the command to "travel" to
different branches and leaves of the directory tree.
The
command "CHDIR
II
will always put you in the parent
directory of your working directory.

1.2.7

How to Remove a Directory

To delete a directory in the tree structure, use the MS-DOS
RMDIR (Remove Directory) command. For example, to remove
the directory NEWDIR from the working directory, type:
RMDIR NEWDIR

1-11

DIRECTORIES AND PATHS
Note that the directory NEWDIR must be empty except for the
and
entries before it can be removed. This will
prevent
you
from
accidentally
deleting
files
and
directories. You can remove any directory by specifying its
pathname. To remove the \BIN\USER\JOE directory, make sure
that it has only the. and
entries, then type:
RMDIR \BIN\USER\JOE
To remove all the files in a directory (except for the
and
entries):--!ype DEL and then the pathname of the
directory.
For example, to delete all files in
the
\BIN\USER\SUE directory, type:
DEL \SIN\USER\SUE
You cannot delete the. and .• entries. They are created
by MS-DOS as part of the hierarchical directory structure.

1-12

CHAPTER 2
BATCH PROCESSING

This chapter tells you how you can put a sequence of
commands into a special file called a batch file. You can
then execute all the commands by typing the name of the
batch file.
Batch processing is useful when you must type
the same sequence of commands over and over again to perform
a commonly used task.

2.1

BATCH PROCESSING

Often you may find yourself typing the same sequence of
commands over and over to perform some commonly used task.
With MS-DOS, you can put the command sequence into a special
file called a batch file, and execute the entire sequence
simply by typing the name of the batch file.
IIBatches ll of
your commands in such files are processed as if they were
typed at a terminal. Each batch file must be named with the
.BAT extension, and is executed by typing the filename
without its extension.
You can create a batch file by using the Line Editor (EDLIN)
or by typing the COpy command. Refer to the IIHow to Create
an AUTOEXEC. BAT F i I ell sect i on later in th is chapter for more
information on using the COpy command to create a batch
f i Ie.
2-1

BATCH PROCESSING
Two MS-DOS commands are available for use expressly in batch
files:
REM and PAUSE. REM permits you to include remarks
and comments in your batch files without these remarks being
executed as commands.
PAUSE prompts you with an optional
message and permits you to either continue or abort the
batch process at a given point. REM and PAUSE are described
in deta iIi n Chapter 4.
Batch processing is useful if you want to execute several
MS-DOS commands with one batch command. such as when you
format and check a new disk. For example. a batch file for
this purpose might look like this:
I:

3:
4:

5:
6:

REM This is a file to check new disks
REM It is named NEWDISK.BAT
PAUSE Insert new disk in drive B:
FORMAT B:
DIR B:
CHKDSK B:

To execute this .BAT file. simply type the filename
the .BAT extension:

without

NEWDISK
The result is the same as if each of the lines in the .BAT
file was entered at the terminal as individual commands.
Figure 2-1 illustrates the three steps used to write.
and execute an MS-DOS batch file.

2-2

save.

BATCH PROCESSING

NEWDISK

1. Write a program.

,
Directory:
NEWDISK.BAT

2. Assign a filename extension of .BAT and
save on your directory.

Execute
NEWDISK
batch
process

3. Enter NEWDISK as a command to MS-DOS.

Figure 2-1:

MS-DOS Batch File Steps

The following list contains information that you should read
before you execute a batch process with MS-DOS:
1.

Do not enter the filename BATCH (unless the name of
the file you want to execute is BATCH.BAT).

Only the filename should be entered to execute the
batch file. Do not enter the filename extension.

The commands in the file named
executed.

2-3

<filename>.BAT

are

BATCH PROCESSING
4.

If you press <CTRL/C> while
prompt appears:

batch

mode,

this

Terminal batch job (YIN)?
If you press Y, the remainder of the commands in
the batch file are ignored and the system prompt
appears.
If you press N, only the current command ends and
batch processing continues with the next command in
the f i Ie.

If you remove the disk containing a batch file
being executed, MS-DOS prompts you to insert it
again before the next command can be read.

The last command in a batch file may be the name of
another batch file.
This allows you to call one
batch file from another when the first is finished.

2-4

BATCH PROCESSING
2.2

THE AUTOEXEC.BAT FILE

An AUTOEXEC.BAT file allows you to automatically execute
programs when you start MS-DOS. Automatic program execution
is useful when you want to run a specific package under
MS-DOS, or when you want MS-DOS to execute a batch program
automatically each time you start the system. You can avoid
loading two separate disks to perform either of these tasks
by using an AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
When you start MS-DOS, the command processor searches the
MS-DOS disk for a file named AUTOEXEC.BAT. The AUTOEXEC.BAT
file is a batch file that is automatically executed each
time you start the system.
If MS-DOS finds the AUTOEXEC.BAT file, the
file
is
immediately executed by the command processor and the date
and time prompts are bypassed.
If MS-DOS does not find an AUTOEXEC.BAT file when you first
load the MS-DOS disk, then the date and time prompts will be
issued.
Figure 2-2 illustrates
file.

how

MS-DOS

2-5

uses

the

AUTOEXEC.BAT

BATCH PROCESSING

You load
MS-DOS disk.

Command
processor is
Other system
~---------~-----------~
files are
automatically
loaded.
loaded.

Command
processor
looks for
AUTOEXEC.BAT

file.

Ti me and da te
prompts are
bypassed.

MS-DOS time
and date
prompts are
issued.

AUTOEXEC.BAT

file is
executed.

Figure 2-2:

How MS-DOS Uses the AUTOEXEC.BAT File

2-6

BATCH PROCESSING
2.2.1

How to Create an AUTOEXEC.BAT File

If. for example. you wanted to automatically load BASIC and
run a program called MENU each-time you started MS-DOS. you
could create an AUTOEXEC.BAT file as follows:
1.

Type:
COPY CON:

AUTOEXEC.BAT

This statement tells MS-DOS to copy the information
from the console (keyboard) into the AUTOEXEC.BAT
file. Note that the AUTOEXEC.BAT file ~ be
created in the root directory of your MS-DOS disk.
2.

Now type:
BASIC MENU
This statement goes into the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. It
tells MS-DOS to load BASIC and run the MENU program
whenever MS-DOS is started.

Press the <CTRL/Z> key; then press the <RETURN> key
to put the command BASIC MENU in the AUTOEXEC.BAT
f i 1e.

4. The MENU program will

now

run

automatically

whenever you start MS-DOS.
To run your own BASIC program. enter the name of your
program in place of MENU in the second line of the example.
You can enter any MS-DOS command or series of commands in
the AUTOEXEC.BAT file.

2-7

BATCH PROCESSING
NOTE
Remember that if you use an AUTOEXEC.BAT file,
MS-DOS will not prompt you for a current date and
time unless you include the DATE and TIME commands
in
the
AUTOEXEC.BAT
file.
It
is strongly
recommended that you include these two commands in
your AUTOEXEC.BAT file, since MS-DOS uses this
information to keep your directory current.

2-8

BATCH PROCESSING
2.3

CREATING A .BAT FILE WITH REPLACEMENT PARAMETERS

There may be times when you want to create an application
program and run it with different sets of data. These data
may be stored in various MS-DOS files.
When used in MS-DOS commands, a parameter is an option that
you define. With MS-DOS, you can create a batch (.BAT) file
with dummy (replaceable) parameters.
These parameters,
named %0-%9, can be replaced by values supplied when the
batch file executes.
For example, when you type the command line COpy CON
MYFILE.BAT, the next lines you type are copied from the
console to a fi Ie named MYFILE.BAT on the default drive:
A>COPY CON MYFILE.BAT
COPY %1.MAC %2.MAC
TYPE %2.PRN
TYPE %O.BAT
Now, press <CTRL/Z> and then
responds with this message:

press

<RETURN>.

MS-DOS

1 F i 1e (s) cop i ed
A>_
The file MYFILE.BAT, which consists of three
resides on the disk in the default drive.

commands,

now

The dummy parameters %1 and %2 are replaced sequentially by
the parameters you supply when you execute the file. The
dummy parameter %0 is always replaced by
the
drive
designator, if specified, and the filename of the batch file
(for example, MYF I LE) .

2-9

BATCH PROCESSING
NOTES
1.

Up to 10 dummy parameters (%0-%9) can
be
specified. Refer to the MS-DOS command SHIFT in
Chapter ~ if you wish to specify more than 10
parameters.

If you use the percent sign as part of a
filename within! batch file, you must type it
twice.
For example, to specify
the
file
ABC%.EXE, you must type it as ABC%%.EXE in the
batch file.

2.3.1

Executing a .BAT File

To execute the batch file MYFILE.BAT and to specify the
parameters that will replace the dummy parameters. you must
enter the batch filename (without its extension) followed by
the parameters you want MS-DOS to substitute for %1, %2,
etc.
Remember that the file MYFILE.BAT consists of 3 lines:
COPY %1.MAC %2.MAC
TYPE %2.PRN
TYPE %O.BAT
To execute the MYFILE batch process, type:
MYFILE A:PROGI B:PROG2
MYFILE is substituted for %0, A:PROGI for
for %2.

2-10

%1,

and

B:PROG2

BATCH PROCESSING
The result is the same as if you had typed each of
commands in MYFILE with their parameters, as follows:

the

COPY A:PROG1.MAC B:PROG2.MAC
TYPE B:PROG2.PRN
TYPE MYF I LE.BAT
The following table illustrates how MS-DOS replaces each
the above parameters:

BATCH
FILENAME

PARAMETER 1 (%0)
(MYFILE)

PARAMETER2 (%1)
(PROG 1)

PARAMETER3 (%2)
(PROG2)

MYFILE

MYFILE.BAT

PROG 1 .MAC

PROG2.MAC
PROG2.PRN

Remember that the dummy parameter %0 is always replaced by
the drive designator (if specified) and the filename of the
batch f i 1e.

2-11

CHAPTER 3
REDIRECTION OF INPUT AND OUTPUT

This chapter discusses input and output. It tells you how
you can redirect your input and output and IIfilter li data.
Command piping is also discussed.

3.1

INPUT AND OUTPUT

MS-DOS always assumes that input comes from the keyboard and
output goes to the terminal screen. However, the flow of
command input and output can be redirected. Input can come
from a file rather than a terminal keyboard, and output can
go to a file or to a line printer instead of to the
terminal.
In addition, IIpipes li can be created that allow
output from one command to become the input to another.
Redirection and pipes are discussed in the next sections.

3.1.1

Redirecting Your Output

Most commands produce output that is sent to your terminal.
You can send this information to a file by using a

3-1

REDIRECTION OF INPUT AND OUTPUT
greater-than sign (»
command

in your

command.

For

example.

the

DIR
displays a directory listing of
drive 2n the terminal screen.

the

disk

the

default

The same command can send this output to a file named
MYFILES by designating the output file on the command line:
DIR >MYFILES
If the file MYFILES does not already exist. MS-DOS creates
it and stores your directory list i ng in it. If MYF I LES
already exists. MS-DOS overwrites what is in the file with
the new data.
If you want to append your directory or a file to another
file
(instead
of
replacing
the
entire file). two'
greater-than signs (») can be used to tell MS-DOS to append
the output of the command (such as a directory listing) to
the end of a specified file. The command
DIR »MYFILES
appends your directory listing to a currently existing file
named MYFILES. If MYFILES does not exist. it is created.
If is often useful to have input for a command come from a
file rather than from a terminal.
This is possible in
MS-DOS by using a less-than sign «) in your command.
For
example. the command
SORT <NAMES >LISTI
sorts the file NAMES and sends the sorted output to
named L I STl .

3-2

file

REDIRECTION OF INPUT AND OUTPUT

3. 1 .2

F i Iter s

A filter is a command that reads your input, transforms it
in some way, and then outputs it, usually to your terminal
or to a file. In t~is way, the data is said to have been
IIfiltered" by the program.
Since filters can be put
together in many different ways, a few filters can take the
place of a large number of specific commands.
MS-DOS filters include FIND,
functions are described below:

MORE,

and

SORT.

Their

FIND

Searches for a constant string of text in a f i 1e

Takes standard terminal output and displays
one screen at a time

SORT

Sorts text

it,

You can see how these filters are used in the next section.

3.1.3

Command Piping

If you want to give more than one command to the system at a
time, you can IIpipe" commands to MS-DOS. For example, you
may occasionally need to have the output of one program sent
as the input to another program. A typical case would be a
It coul d be
program that produces output in co I umns.
desirable to have this columnar output sorted.

3-3

REDIRECTION OF INPUT AND OUTPUT
Piping is done by separating commands with the
pipe
(p . For!
separator, which is the vertical bar symbol
example, the command
DIR

I SORT

will give you an alphabetically sorted listing of your
directory.
The vertical bar causes all output generated by
the left side of the bar to be sent to the right side of the
bar for processing.
Piping can also be used when you want to output to a file.
If you want your directory sorted and sent to a new file
(for example, DIREC.FIL), you could type:
DIR

I SORT >DIREC.FIL

MS-DOS will create a file named DIREC.FIL on your default
drive. DIREC.FIL contains a sorted listing of the directory:
on the default drive, since no other drive was specified in
the command.
To specify a drive other than the default
drive, type:
DIR

I SORT >B:DIREC.FIL

This sends the sorted data to
drive B:.
A pipeline may consist
example,
DIR

file

named

than

two

DIREC.FIL
commands.

on
For

I SORT I MORE

will sort your directory, show it to you one screen at a
time, and put --MORE-- at the bottom of your screen when
there is more output to be seen.
You will find many uses for piping commands and filters.

3-4

CHAPTER 4
ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS

This chapter alphabetically lists the advanced
MS-DOS
commands. which include commands to use with directories and
paths. batch processing commands. and others.

4.1

COMMAND FORMATS

The following notation indicates how you should
advanced MS-DOS commands:

format

the

You must enter any words shown in capital letters.
These words are called keywords and must be entered
exactly as shown. You can enter these keywords in
any combination of upper/lowercase; MS-DOS will
convert all keywords to uppercase.

You supply the text for any items enclosed in angle
brackets « ». For example. you should enter the
name of your file when <filename> is shown in the
format.

Items in square brackets ([ ]) are opt i ona I •
If
you wish to include optional information. do not
include the square brackets. only the information
within the brackets.
4-1

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
4.

An ell ipsis ( ••• ) indicates that you may repeat
item as many times as you want.

5. You must include all punctuation'where shown

(with
the exception of square brackets). such as commas.
equal signs. question marks. colons. or slashes.

4.2

MS-DOS ADVANCED COMMANDS

Table 4-1 lists the advanced MS-DOS commands:
Table 4-1:

MS-DOS Advanced Commands

Command

Usage

BREAK

Sets CTRL/C check

CHOIR

Changes
(CD)

CTTY

Changes console TTY

ECHO

Turns batch file echo feature on/off

EXE2BIN

Converts executable files to binary format

EXIT

Exits command and returns to lower level

FIND

Searches for a constant string of text

FOR

Provides
files

GOTO

Provides logical flow control for batch files

directories;

prints

working directory

a logical looping capability for batch

4-2

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
Command

Usage

LDCOPY

Places
the
reserved system
diskette or hard disk partition

MEDIACHK

Improves diskette performance

MKDIR

Makes a directory (MD)

Displays output one screen at a time

PATH

Sets a command search path

PAUSE

Suspends execution of a batch file

PROMPT

Designates the command prompt

RECOVER

Recovers a bad file or disk

REM

Displays a comment in a batch file

RMDIR

Removes a directory (RD)

SHI FT

Increases number of
batch process

SORT

Sorts data alphabetically. forward or backward

4-3

replaceable

tracks

onto

parameters

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
TYPE

NAME

Internal

BREAK
PURPOSE
Sets CTRL-C check.
SYNTAX
BREAK [ONIOFF]
COMMENTS

If you are running an application program that uses
CTRL/C function keys, you will want to turn off the
MS-DOS CTRL/C function so that when you press <CTRL/C>
you affect your program and not the operating system.
Specify BREAK OFF to turn off CTRL/C and BREAK ON when
you have finished running your application program and
are using MS-DOS.
If you do not specify the ON or OFF
displays the current setting of BREAK.

4-4

switch,

MS-DOS

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
TYPE

NAME
CHOIR (CHANGE DIRECTORY)

Internal

SYNONYM
CD
PURPOSE
Changes directory to a different path; displays current
(working) directory.
SYNTAX
CHOIR [pathname]
COMMENTS
If your working directory is \BIN\USER\JOE and you want
to change your path to another directory (such as
\BIN\USER\JOE\FORMS). type:
CHOIR \BIN\USER\JOE\FORMS
and MS-DOS will put you in the new directory.
A
shorthand notation is also available with this command:
CHOIR .•
This command will always put you
directory of your working directory.

4-5

the

parent

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
CHOIR used without a pathname displays your working
directory.
If your working directory is \BIN\USER\JOE
on drive B:, and you type CHOIR <Return>, MS-DOS wi 11
display:
B:\BIN\USER\JOE

4-6

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
NAME

TYPE
CTTY

Internal

PURPOSE
Allows you to change the device from which
commands (TTY represents the console) •

you

issue

SYNTAX
CTTY <device>
COMMENTS
The <device> is the device from which you are giving
commands to MS-DOS. This command is useful if you want
to change the device on which you are working.
The
command
CTTY AUX
moves all command I/O (input/output) from the current
device (the console) to the AUX port, such as a
printer. The command
CTTY CON
moves I/O
conso I e) •

back

the

4-7

original

device

(here,

the

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
NAME

TYPE
ECHO

Internal

PURPOSE
Turns batch echo feature on and off.
SYNTAX
ECHO [ON IOFFI message]
COMMENTS
Normally. commands in a batch file are displayed
("echoed") on the console when they are seen by the
command processor. ECHO OFF turns off this feature.
ECHO ON turns the echo back on.
If ON or OFF are not specified. the current setting
displayed.

4-8

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
TYPE

NAME

External

EXE2BIN
PURPOSE

Converts .EXE (executable) files to binary format.
This results in a saving of disk space and faster
program loading.
SYNTAX
EXE2BIN <d:><filename><.ext> [d:][<filename>[<.ext>]]
COMMENTS
This command is useful only if you want to convert .EXE
files to binary format. The file named by filespec is
the input file.
If no extension is specified. it
defaults to .EXE. The input file is converted to .COM
file format (memory image of the program) and placed in
the output fi Ie.
If you do not specify a drive. the
drive of the input file will be used. If you do not
specify an output filename. the input filename will be
used. If you do not specify a filename extension in
the output filename. the new file will be given an
extension of .BIN.
The input file must be in valid .EXE format produced by
the linker. The resident, or actual code and data part
of the file must be less than 64K. There must be no
STACK segment.

4-9

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
Two kinds of conversions are possible, depending on
whether the initial CS:IP (Code Segment: Instruction
Pointer) is specified in the .EXE file:
1.

If CS:IP is not specified in the .EXE file, a pure
binary conversion is assumed. If segment fixups
are
necessary
(i.e.,
the
program
contains
instructions requiring segment relocation), you
will be prompted for the fixup value.
This value
is the absolute segment at which the program is to
be loaded. The resulting program will be usable
only when loaded at the absolute memory address
specified by a user application.
The command
processor will not be capable of properly loading
the program.

If CS:IP is specified as OOOO:IOOH, it is assumed
that the file is to be run as a .COM file with the
location pointer set at 100H by the assembler
statement ORG; the first 100H bytes of the file are
deleted. No segment fixups are allowed, as .COM
files
must be segment relocatable.
Once the
conversion is complete, you
may
rename
the
resulting file with a .COM extension. Then the
command processor will be able to load and execute
the program in the same way as the .COM programs
supplied on your MS-DOS disk.

If EXE2BIN finds an error, one or more of the following
error messages will be displayed:
File cannot be converted
CS:IP does not meet either of the
criteria
specified
above, or it meets the .COM file
criterion but has segment fixups. This message is
also
displayed if the file is not a valid
executable file.

4-10

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
'File not found
The file is not on the disk specified.
Insufficient memory
There is not enough memory to run EXE2BIN.
File creation error
EXE2BIN cannot create the output file. Run CHKDSK.
to determine if the directory is full. or if some
other condition caused the error.
Insufficient disk space
There is not enough disk space
f i Ie.

create

new

Fixups needed - base segment (hex):
The source (.EXE) file contained
information
indicating that a load segment is required for the
file. Specify the absolute segment address at
which the finished module is to be located.
File cannot be converted
The input file is not in the correct format.
WARNING - Read error on EXE file.
Amount read less than size in header
This is a warning message only.
4-11

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
NAME

TYPE
Internal

EXIT
PURPOSE

Exits the program COMMAND.COM (the command processor)
and returns to a previous level, if one exists.
SYNTAX
EXIT
COMMENTS
This command can be used when you are running an
application program and want to start the MS-DOS
command processor, then return to your program.
For
example, to look at a directory on drive B: while
running an application program, you must start the
command processor by typing COMMAND in response to the
default drive prompt:
A>COMMAND
You can now type the DIR command and MS-DOS will
display the directory for the default disk. When you
type EXIT, you return to the previous level (your
application program).

4-12

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
NAME

TYPE
FIND

External

PURPOSE
Searches for a specific string of text
files.

file

SYNTAX
FIND [IV IC IN] <string> [<filename .•• >]
COMMENTS
FIND is a filter that takes as options a string and a
series of filenames.
It will display all lines that
contain a specified string from the files specified in
the command line.
If no files are specified. FIND will take the input on
the screen and display all 1 ines that contain the
specified string.
Switches for FIND are:
IV

Causes FIND to display
all
containing the specified string.

Causes FIND to print only the count of lines
that contained a match in each of the files.

Causes each line to be preceded
relative line number in the file.

4-13

1 ines

not

its

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
The string should be enclosed in quotes.

Example:

FIND IIFool's Paradise ll BOOK1.TXT BOOK2.TXT
displays all lines from BOOK1.TXT and BOOK2.TXT (in
that order) that contain the string IIFool's Paradise. 1I
The command
DIR B:

I FIND IV IIDATII

causes MS-DOS to display all names of the files on the
disk in drive B: which do not contaln the string OAT.
Type double quotes around a string that already has
quotes in it.
When an error is detected, FIND responds
the following error messages:

with

one

FIND will only run on versions of MS-DOS that
2.0 or higher.

are

Incorrect DOS version

FIND:

Invalid number of parameters
You did not specify a string when issuing the FIND
command.

FIND:

Syntax error
You typed an illegal string when issuing the
command.

4-14

FIND

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
FIND:

File not found <filename>
The filename you have specified does not exist
FIND cannot find it.

FIND:

Read error in <filename>
An error occurred when FIND tried to read the file
specified in the command.

FIND:

Invalid parameter <option-name>
You specified an option that does not exist.

4-15

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
TYPE

NAME

Internal

FOR
PURPOSE
Command extension used in batch
processing.

and

interactive

file

SYNTAX
FOR %%<c> IN <set> DO <command> - for batch processing
FOR %<c> IN <set> DO <command>
for interactive
processing.
COMMENTS
<c> can be any character except 0.1.2.3, •.• 9
confusion with the %0-%9 batch parameters.

avoid

<set> is (#<item>*#)
The %%<c> variable is set sequentially to each member
of <set>. and then <command> is evaluated. If a member
of <set> is an expression involving * and/or ?
then
the variable is set to each matching pattern from disk.
In this case. only one such <item> may be in the set.
and any <item> besides the first is ignored.
NOTE
The words IN, FOR. and DO must be in uppercase.

4-16

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
Examples:
FOR %%f IN (*.ASM) DO MASM %%f;
FOR %%f IN (FOO BAR BLECH) DO REM %%f
The 1%%1 is needed so that after batch parameter
(%0-%9) processing is done, there is one 1%1 left. If
only I%f l were there, the batch parameter processor
would see the 1%1, look at If I , decide that I%f l was an
error (bad parameter reference) and throw out the I%f l ,
so that the command FOR would never see it. If the FOR
is not in a batch file, then only one 1%1 should be
used.

4-17

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
NAME

TYPE
GOTO

Internal

PURPOSE
Command extension used in batch file processing.
SYNTAX
GOTO <label>
COMMENTS
GOTO causes commands to be taken from the batch file
beginning with the line after the <label> definition.
If no label has been defined. the current batch file
will terminate.
Example:
:foo
REM looping •••
GOTO foo
will produce an infinite
looping •••

sequence

messages:

REM

Starting a line in a batch file with I : I causes the
line to be ignored by batch processing. The characters
following GOTO define a label. but this procedure may
also be used to put in comment lines.

4-18

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
TYPE

NAME

Internal

IF
PURPOSE

Command extension used in batch file processing.
SYNTAX
IF <condition> <command>
COMMENTS
The parameter <condition> is one of the following:
ERRORLEVEL <number>
True if and only if the previous program executed
by COMMAND had an exit code of <number> or higher.
<stringl> == <string2>
True if and only if <stringl> and <string2> are
identical after parameter substitution. Strings
may not have embedded separators.
EXIST <filename>
True if and only if <filename> exists.
NOT <condition>
True if and only if <condition> is false.
The IF statement allows conditional execution
of
commands.
When the <condition> is true, then the
<command> is executed.
Otherwise, the <command> is
ignored.

4-19

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
NOTE
The words ERRORLEVEL, EXIST, and
uppercase.

NOT must

Examples:
IF NOT EXIST FOO ECHO Can't find file
IF NOT ERRORLEVEL 3 LINK $1,,;

4-20

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
NAME

TYPE
LDCOPY

External

PURPOSE
The LDCOPY program is used to place the MS-DOS Version
2.11 operating system's loader on a diskette or hard
disk partition. The loader is a program. which is
found on the first tracks of the MS-DOS Version 2.11
operating system diskette. that places the MS-DOS
operating system into memory.
SYNTAX
LDCOPY <destination drv:>
COMMENTS
The destination drive is the diskette drive or
disk drive that you want to place the loader on.

hard

You can place the loader on a diskette or a hard disk
partition that contains MS-DOS files.
The LDCOPY
program copies the loader and leaves the MS-DOS files
intact.
The following example places the
loader on the hard disk drive E.
A>LDCOPY E:

4-21

MS-DOS

Version

2.11

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
NAME

TYPE
MEDIACHK

External

PURPOSE
Speeds access to Rainbow, MS-DOS formatted diskettes
SYNTAX
MEDIACHK [<ONIOFF>]
COMMENTS
The Rainbow computer can read a variety of MS-DOS
diskette formats.
The computer must first read the
diskette to determine the type of MS-DOS format.
If
you use only Rainbow. MS-DOS formatted diskettes. use
the MEDIACHK command to tell the Rainbow computer that
you always use this type of diskette.
When you type the MEDIACHK command with the OFF switch.
the Rainbow computer no longer checks to determine the
diskette1s type of MS-DOS format.
This speeds the
access to the diskette.
The default is MEDIACHK ON.

4-22

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
NAME

TYPE
Internal

MKDIR
SYNONYM
MD
PURPOSE
Makes a new directory.
SYNTAX
MKDIR <pathname>
COMMENTS

This command is used to create a hierarchical directory
structure.
When you are in your root directory, you
can create subdirectories by using the MKDIR command.
The command
MKDIR \USER
wi 11 create a
directory.
To
\USER, type:

sUbdirectory \USER
create a directory

MKDIR \USER\JOE

4-23

in
your
root
named JOE under

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
TYPE

NAME
MORE

External

PURPOSE
Sends output to console one screen at a time.
SYNTAX
MORE
COMMENTS
MORE is a filter that reads from standard input (such
as a command from your terminal) and displays one
screen of information at a time. The MORE command then
pauses and displays the --MORE-- message at the bottom
of your screen.
Pressing the <RETURN> key will display another screen
of information.
This process continues until all the
input data has been read.
The MORE command is useful for viewing a long file
screen at a time. If you type

one

TYPE MYFILES.COM I MORE
MS-DOS will display the file MYFILES.COM
default drive) one screen at a time.

4-24

(on

the

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
TYPE

NAME

Internal

PATH
PURPOSE
Sets a command path.
SYNTAX
PATH [<pathname>[;<pathname>] ..• ]
COMMENTS

This command allows you
to
tell
MS-DOS
which
directories should be searched for external commands
after MS-DOS searches your working directory.
The
default value is no path.
To tell MS-DOS to search your
for external commands, type:

\BIN\USER\JOE

directory

PATH \BIN\USER\JOE
MS-DOS will now search the \BIN\USER\JOE directory for
external commands until you set another path or shut
down MS-DOS.

4-25

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
You can tell MS-DOS to search more than one path by
specifying several pathnames separated by semicolons.
For example,
PATH \BIN\USER\JOE;\BIN\USER\SUE;\BIN\DEV
tells MS-DOS to search the directories specified by the
above pathnames to find external commands. MS-DOS
searches the pathnames in the order specified in the
PATH command.
The command PATH with no options will print the current
path.
If you specify PATH ;, MS-DOS will set the NUL
path, meaning that only the working directory will be
searched for external commands.

4-26

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
NAME

TYPE
Internal

PAUSE
PURPOSE

Suspends execution of the batch file.
SYNTAX
PAUSE [comment]
COMMENTS
During the execution of a batch file, you may need to
change disks or perform some other action. PAUSE
suspends execution until you press any key, except
<CTRL/C>.
When the command processor encounters PAUSE, it prints:
Strike a key when ready.
If you press
displayed:

<CTRL/C>,

another

prompt

wi 11

Abort batch job (Y/N)?
If you type Y in response to this prompt, execution of
the remainder of the batch command file will be aborted
and control will be returned to the operating system
command level. Therefore, PAUSE can be used to break a
batch file into pieces, allowing you to end the batch
command file at an intermediate point.

4-27

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
The comment is optional and may be entered on the same
line as PAUSE. You may also want to prompt the user of
the batch file with some meaningful message when the
batch file pauses. For example, you may want to change
disks in 'one of the drives. An optional prompt message
may be given in such cases. The comment prompt will be
displayed before the "Strike a key" message.

4-28

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
NAME

TYPE
PROMPT

Internal

PURPOSE
Changes the MS-DOS command prompt.
SYNTAX
PROMPT [<prompt-text>]
COMMENTS
This command allows you to change the MS-DOS system
prompt (for example, A».
I f no text is typed, the
promp't wi 11 be set to the def au 1t prompt, wh i ch is the
default drive designation. You can set the prompt to a
special prompt, such as the current time, by using the
characters indicated below.
When you use the PROMPT command with the $p option, be
sure that you specify an existing drive. If you use
this option with a non-existent drive. you could see
unexpected results.

4-29

ADVANCED KS-DOS COMMANDS
The following characters can be used in the prompt
command to specify special prompts. They must all be
preceded by a dollar sign ($) in the prompt command:
Specify
This
Character

$
t
d
p
v
n
g
I
b
s
h
e

To Get This Prompt:
The 1$1 character
The current time
The current date
The current directory of the default drive
The version number
The default drive
The 1>1 character
The 1<1 character
The I I I character
A CR LF sequence
A space (1 ead i ng on I y)
A backspace
ASCII code X118 I (escape)

Examples:
PROKPT $n
Sets the default drive letter prompt.
PROKPT Time = $t$_Date = $d
Sets a two-line prompt which prints:
Time = (current time)
Date = (current date)
PROKPT

$e[7m$n:$e[m
Sets the prompts in inverse video mode and(
returns to normal video mode for other
text.

4-30

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
NAME

TYPE
RECOVER

External

PURPOSE
Recovers a
sectors.

file

entire

disk

containing

bad

SYNTAX
RECOVER <filename

I d:>

COMMENTS
If a sector on a disk is bad, you can recover either
the file containing that sector (without the bad
sector) or the entire disk (if the bad sector was in
the directory).
To recover a particular file, type:
RECOVER <filename>
This will cause MS-DOS to read the file sector by
sector and to skip the bad sector(s). When MS-DOS
finds the bad sector(s), the sector(s) are marked and
MS-DOS will no longer allocate your data to that
sector.
To recover a disk, type:
RECOVER <d:>
where d: is the letter of
disk to be recovered.

4-31

the

drive

containing

the

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
If there is not enough room on the root directory,
RECOVER will print a message and store information
about the extra files in the File Allocation Table.
You can run RECOVER again to regain these files when
there is more room in the root directory.
NOTE
You should use RECOVER only as a last resort.
RECOVER could misinterpret data that may not be
corrupted. This could lead to unpredictable
results.

4-32

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
TYPE

NAME
REM (REMARK)

Internal

PURPOSE
Displays remarks which are on the same line as the REM
command in a batch file during execution of that batch
f i 1e.

SYNTAX
REM [comment]
COMMENTS
The only separators allowed
space, tab, and comma.

the

comment

Example:
1:
2:

3:
4:
5:
6:

REM This is a file to check new disks
REM It is named NEWDISK.BAT
PAUSE Insert new disk in drive B:
FORMAT B:
DIR B:
CHKDSK B:

4-33

are

the

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
NAME

TYPE
RMDIR (REMOVE DIRECTORY)

Internal

SYNONYM
RD
PURPOSE
Removes a
structure.

directory

from

hierarchical

directory

SYNTAX
RMDIR <pathname>
COMMENTS
This command removes a directory that l!
for the. and.. shorthand symbols.

except

To remove the \BIN\USER\JOE directory, first issue a
DIR command for that path to ensure that the directory
does not contain any important files that you do not
want deleted. Then type:
RMDIR \BIN\USER\JOE
The directory
structure.

has

been

deleted

from

the

directory
\

4-34

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
TYPE

NAME
SHIFT

Internal

PURPOSE
Allows access to more than 10 replaceable parameters in
batch file processing.
SYNTAX
SHIFT
COMMENTS
Usually, command files are limited to handling 10
parameters, %0 through %9.
To allow access to more
than ten parameters, use SHiFT to change the command
line parameters. For example:
if

%0 = IIfoOIl
%1 = IIbarll
%2 = II name ll
%3 ••• %9 are empty

then a SHIFT will result in the following:
%0 = IIbarll
%1 = II name ll
%2 ••. %9 are empty
If there are more than 10 parameters given on a command
line, those that appear after the 10th (%9) will be
shifted one at a time into %9 by successive shifts.

It-35

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
NAME

TYPE
SORT

External

PURPOSE
SORT reads input from your terminal, sorts the
then writes it to your terminal screen or files.

data,

SYNTAX
SORT [/R] [/+n]
COMMENTS
SORT can be used, for example, to alphabetize a file by
a certain column. There are two switches which allow
you to select options:
/R

reverse the sort; that is, sort from Z to A.

/+n

sort starting with column n where n is some
number.
If you do not specify this switch,
SORT will begin sorting from column 1.

SORT reads and sorts data in the order

4-2.

4-36

described

Table

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
Table 4-2:

SORT Table

Sort
Order

ASCII
Code

Sort
Character Order

ASCII
Code

000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060

NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
SP

061
062
063
064
065
097
192
224
193
225
194
226
195
227
196
228
066
098
067
099
199
231
068
100
069
101
200
232
201
233
202
234
203
235
070
102
071
103
072
104
073
105
204
236
205
237
206
238
207
239
074
106
075
107
076
108
077
109
078
110
209
241
215
247
079
111

$
0/0

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

061
062
063
064
065
065
066
066
067
067
068
068
069
069
070
070
071
071
072
072
073
073
074
074
075
075
076
076
077
077
078
078
079
079
080
080
081
081
082
082
083
083
084
084
085
085
086
086
087
087
088
088
089
089
090
090
091
091
092
092
093
093
094
094
095
095

Sort
Character Order

?
Cal

A
a
B
b

C
<
D
d
E

E
e
F
f

G
g

H
h

K
k
L
I
M
m

N
n

Ii
(E

096
096
097
097
098
098
099
099
100
100
101
101
102
102
103
103
104
104
105
106
106
107
107
108
108
109
109
110
110
111
111
112
112
113
113
114
114
115
115
116
116
117
117
118
118
119
119
120
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192

ASCII
Code
210
242
211
243
212
244
213
245
214
246
080
112
081
113
082
114
083
115
223
084
116
085
117
217
249
218
250
219
251
220
252
086
118
087
119
088
120
089
121
221
253
090
122
198
230
216
248
197
229
091
092
093
094
095
096
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133

Sort
Character Order

ASCII
Code

134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
208
222
240
254
255

6
6
()

0
()
6

6
0

P
p

Q
q

R
r

S
s

Ii
T
t
U
u
(]
U
(]
U

(]

U
U
u
V
v
W
w

X
x
Y
~

Y
~

Z
z
tE

'"0
•A

a
I
\
J

DEL

193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255

Character
SSA
ESA
HTS
HTJ
VTS
PLD
PLU
RI
SS2
SS3
DCS
PUI
PU2
STS
CCH
MW
SPA
EPA

CSI
ST
OSC
PM
APC

£
¥
§

l:{
©

"V.
1(,

IND
NEL
LJ·046Q

4-37

ADVANCED MS-DOS COMMANDS
Examples:
This command will read the file UNSORT.TXT, reverse the
sort, and then write the output to a file named
SORT.TXT:
SORT /R <UNSORT.TXT >SORT.TXT
The following command will pipe the output of the
directory command to the SORT filter. The SORT filter
will sort the directory listing starting with column 14
(this is the column in the directory listing that
contains the file size), then send the output to the
console.
Thus, the result of this command is a
directory sorted by file size:
DIR

I SORT /+14

The command
DIR

I SORT /+14 I MORE

will do the same thing as the command in the previous
example, except that the MORE filter will give you a
chance to read the sorted directory one screen at a
time.

4-38

CHAPTER 5
FILE COMPARISON UTILITY (FC)

This chapter
ut iIi ty •

5. 1

describes

how

use

the

File

Comparison

I NTRODUCT ION

It is sometimes useful to compare files on your disk.
If
you have copied a file and later want to compare copies to
see which one is current, you can use the MS-DOS File
Compar i son Ut iIi ty (FC).
The File Comparison Utility compares the contents of two
files.
The differences between the two files can be output
to the console or to a third file. The files being compared
may
be
either source files (files containing source
statements of a programming language); or binary (files
output
by the MACRO-86 assemb I er, the KS-L I.NK Linker
utility, or by a Microsoft high-level language compiler).
The comparisons are made in one of two ways:
on a
I ine-by-line or a byte-by-byte basis.
The line-by-line
comparison isolates blocks of lines that are different
between the two files and prints those blocks of I ines. The
byte-by-byte comparison displays the
bytes
that
are
different between the two files.

5-1

FILE COMPARISON UTILITY (FC)
5.1.1

Limitations on Source Comparisons

FC uses a large amount of memory as buffer (storage) space
to hold the source files. If the source files are larger
than available memory, FC will compare what can be loaded
into the buffer space.
If no lines match in the portions of the files in the buffer
space, FC will display only the message:

*** Files are different ***
For binary files larger than available memory, FC compares
both files completely, overlaying the portion in memory with
the next portion from disk. All differences are output in
the same manner as those files that fit completely in
memory.

5.2

FILE SPECIFICATIONS

All file specifications use the following syntax:
[d:]<filename>[<.ext>]
where:

is the letter designating a disk drive. If the
drive designation is omitted, FC defaults to the
operating system's (current) default drive.
filename is a one- to eight-character name
file .

the

• ext is a one- to three-character extension to
filename.

the

5-2

FILE COMPARISON UTILITY (FC)

5.3 HOW TO USE FC
The syntax of FC is as follows:
FC [/# IB IW IC] <filenamel> <filename2>
FC matches the first file (filenamel) against the second
(filename2) and reports any differences between them. Both
filenames can be pathnames. For example,
FC B:\FOO\BAR\FILEI.TXT \BAR\FILE2.TXT
FC takes FILEI.TXT in the \FOO\BAR directory of disk drive
B:
and compares it with FILE2.TXT in the \BAR directory.
Since no drive is specified for filename2, Fe assumes that
the \BAR directory is on the disk in the default drive.

5-3

FILE COMPARISON UTILITY (FC)
5.~

FC SWITCHES

There are four switches that
Comparison Utility:

you

can

use

with

the

File

Forces a binary comparison of both files.
The two
files are compared byte-to-byte, with no attempt to
re-synchronize after a mismatch. The mismatches are
printed as follows:
--AOORS----Fl----F2xxxxxxxx
yy
zz
(where xxxxxxxx is the relative address of the pair of
bytes from the beginning of the file). Addresses
start at 00000000; yy and zz are the mismatched bytes
from filel and file2, respectively. If one of the
files contains less data than the other, then a
message is printed out. For example, if filel ends
before file2, then FC displays:
***Oata left in Fl***

# stands for a number from
to 9.
This switch
specifies the number of lines required to match for
the files to be considered as matching again after a
difference has been found.
If this switch is not
specified, it defaults to 3. This switch is used only
in source comparisons.

Causes FC to compress whites (tabs and spaces) during
the comparison.
Thus, multiple contiguous whites in
any line will be considered as a single white space.
Note that although FC compresses whites. it does not
ignore them. The two exceptions are beginning and
ending whites in a line. which are ignored.

5-4

FILE COMPARISON UTILITY (FC)
For example (note
wh i te)

that

underscore

represents

will match with

and with
_____More____data to_be___ found ____
but will not match with

This switch is used only in source comparisons.

Causes the matching process to ignore the case of
letters.
All letters in the files are considered
uppercase letters. For example.

wi 11 match

if both the IW and IC options are specified. then Fe
will compress whites and ignore case. For example.

wi 11 match:
data was found
This switch is used only in source comparisons.

5-5

FILE COMPARISON UTILITY (FC)

5.5 DIFFERENCE REPORTING
The File Comparison Utility reports the differences between
the two files you specify by displaying the first filename,
followed by the lines that differ between the files,
followed by the first line to match in both files. FC then
displays the name of the second file followed by the lines
that are different, followed by the first line that matches.
The default for the number of lines to match between the
files is 3.
(If you want to change this default, specify
the number of lines with the II switch.) For example,

----------<filenamel>
<difference>
<1st line to match file2 in filel>
----------<filename2>
<difference>
<1st line to match filel in file2>

FC will continue to list each difference.
If there are too many differences (involving too many
lines). the program will simply report that the files are
different and stop.
If no matches are found after the first difference is found,
FC will display:

*** Files are different ***
and will return to the
example, A».

MS-DOS

5-6

default

drive

prompt

(for

FILE COMPARISON UTILITY (FC)

5.6 REDIRECTING FC OUTPUT TO A FILE
The differences and matches between the two files, you
specify will be displayed on your screen unless you redirect
the output to a file. This is accomplished in the same way
as MS-DOS command redirection.to
To compare Filel and File2 and then send the
DIFFER. TXT, type:

output

The differences and matches between Filel and File2 will
put into DIFFER.TXT on the default drive.

FC Filel File2 >DIFFER.TXT

5-7

FILE COMPARISON UTILITY (FC)

5.7 EXAMPLES
Example 1:
Assume these two ASCI I files are on disk:
ALPHA.ASM

BETA.ASM

FILE A

FILE B

A
B
C
G
H
I

C
D
E
F

G
H
I
M
N

R
S

T
U

2
p

V
4

U
V
W

w
X
Y

X
Y
Z

To compare the two files and display the differences on
terminal screeen, type:
Fe ALPHA.ASM BETA.ASM

5-8

the

FILE COMPARISON UTILITY (FC)
FC compares ALPHA.ASM with BETA.ASM and displays
the
differences on the terminal screen.
All other defaults
remain intact. (The defaults are: do not use tabs, spaces,
or comments for matches, and do a source comparison on the
two files.)
The output will appear as follows
(the Notes do not appear):

the

----------ALPHA.ASM

E
F

NOTE: ALPHA file
contains defg,
BETA contains g.

----------BETA.ASM
G

----------ALPHA.ASM
M
N

NOTE: ALPHA file
contains mno where
BETA contains j12.

P
----------BETA.ASM
J
I

----------ALPHA.ASM
W
----------BETA.ASM

NOTE: ALPHA file
contains w where
BETA contains 45w.

4
5

w
5-9

terminal

screen

FILE COMPARISON UTILITY (FC)
Example l:
You can print the differences on the 1 ine printer using the
same two source files.
In this example, four successive
lines must be the same to constitute a match.
Type:
Fe /4 ALPHA.ASM BETA.ASM >PRN
The following output will appear on the line printer:
----------ALPHA.ASM

E
F

G
H
I

M
N

NOTE: p is the 1st of
a string of 4 matches.

P
----------BETA.ASM
G

H
I
J

1
2
P

------------ALPHA.ASM
W
------------BETA.ASM
4

NOTE: w is the 1st of a
string of 4 matches.

w
5-10

FILE COMPARISON UTILITY (FC)
Example ,3.:
This example forces a binary comparison and then displays
the differences on the terminal screen using the same two
source files as were used in the previous examples.
Type:
FC /B ALPHA.ASM BETA.ASM
The /B switch in this example forces binary comparison.
This switch and any others must be typed before the
The followi ng display
filenames in the Fe command line.
should appear:
--ADORS----Fl---F2-44
00000009
47
OOOOOOOC
48
45
OOOOOOOF
46
49
4A
00000012
47
48
00000015
31
00000018
49
32
40
000000IB
50
4E
000000IE
51
00000021
4F
52
00000024
50
53
00000027
51
54
0000002A
52
55
00000020
56
53
00000030
54
34
00000033
55
35
00000036
56
57
00000039
58
57
0000003C
58
59
0000003F
5A
59
00000042
lA
5A

5-11

FILE COMPARISON UTILITY (FC)

5.8 ERROR MESSAGES
When the File Comparison Utility detects an error one
more of the following error messages will be displayed:

Invalid parameter:<option>
One of the switches that you have specified is invalid.
File not found:<filename>
FC could not read the filename you specified.
Read error in:<filename>
FC could not read the entire file.
Invalid number of parameters
You have specified the wrong number of options
FC command line.

the

Bad file
One of the files you specified is defective.
Data left in <filename>
After reaching the end of one of the files in a file
comparison, the other file still has uncompared data
left.
I
Internal error
This message indicates an internal logic error
FC program.
5-12

the

CHAPTER 6
THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)

6.1

INTRODUCTION

This chapter discusses MS-LINK. It is recommended that
read the entire chapter before you use MS-LINK.

you

NOTE
If you are not going to compile and link
you do not need to read this chapter.

programs.

The MS-DOS linker (called MS-LINK) is a program that:
Combines separately produced object modules into
relocatable load module--a program you can run
Searches I ibrary files for
external references

definitions

one

unresolved

Resolves external cross-references
Produces a listing that shows both the
external references and error messages

6-1

resblution

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)
6.2

OVERVIEW OF MS-LINK

When you write a program, you write it in source code. This
source code is passed through a compiler which produces
object modules. The object modules must be passed through
the link process to produce machine language that the
computer can understand directly. This machine language is
in the form required for running programs.
You may wish to link (combine) several programs and run them
together.
Each of your programs may refer to a symbol that
is defined in another object module.
This reference is
called an external reference.
MS-LINK combines several object modules into one relocatable
load module, or Run file (called an .EXE or Executable
file). As it combines modules, MS-LINK makes sure that all
external references between object modules are defined.
MS-LINK can search several library files for definitions of
any external references that are not defined in the object
modules.
MS-LINK also produces
references
resolved,
messages.

List file that shows external
and it also displays any error

MS-LINK uses available memory as much as possible.
When
available memory is exhausted, MS-LINK creates a temporary
disk file named VM.TMP.
Figure 6-1 illustrates the
operation.

various

6-2

parts

the

MS-LINK

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)

Non-Assembly
Source

Assembly Source

Compiler

Assembler

.OBJ

IMS-LINK

libraries
.LIB

listing
.LST

Up to 8 libraries
c an be searched

PUBLIC symbol s
cross-referenc ed

Us ed only i f
Ru n file is
la rger than
me mory

Run file

VM.TMP

Figure 6-1:

.EXE

The MS-LINK Operation

6-3

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)

6.3 DEFINITIONS YOU'LL NEED TO KNOW
Some of the terms used in this chapter are explained below
to help you understand how MS-LINK works. Generally. if you
are linking object modules compiled from BASIC. Pascal. or a
high-level language. you will not need to know these terms.
If you are writing and compiling programs in assembly
language. however. you will need to understand MS-LINK and
the definitions described below.
In MS-DOS memory can be divided into segments. classes.
groups. Figure 6-2 illustrates these concepts.

Segment
4

Segment 6

Segment 7

Segment 8

Segment 9

Segment
5

Segment 10

Memo

Segment
11

Segment 1

Segment
13
Segment 14

Segment
15

Segment

Segment 19

shaded area = a group (64K bytes addressable)
Figure 6-2:

How Memory Is Divided
6-4

Segment
16

and

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)
Example:
Segment Name
Segment 1
Segment 2
Segment 12

PROG.1
PROG.2
PROG.3

Segment Class
Name
CODE
CODE
DATA

Note that segments 1, 2, and 12 have different segment names
but mayor may not have the same segment class name.
Segments 1, 2, and 12 form a ~ with a group address of
the lowest address of segment 1 (i .e., the lowest address in
memory) .
MS-LINK
Each segment has a segment ~ and a c1ass~.
loads all segments into memory by class name from the first
segment encountered to the last. All segments assigned to
the same class are loaded into memory contiguously.
During processing, MS-LINK references segments by their
addresses in memory (where they are located). MS-LINK does
this by finding groups of segments.
A ~ is a collection of segments that fit within a 64K
byte area of memory.
The segments do not need to be
contiguous to form a group (see illustration). The address
of any group is the lowest addreSs of the segments in that
group. At link time, MS-LINK analyzes the groups, then
references the segments by the address in memory of that
group. A program may consist of one or more groups.
If you are writing in assembly language, you may assign the
group and class names in your program.
In high-level
languages (BASIC, COBOL, FORTRAN, Pascal), the naming is
done automatically by the compiler.

6-5

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)
6.4

FILES THAT MS-LINK USES

MS-LINK:
Works with one or more input files
Produces two output files
May be directed to search up to eight library files
For each type of file, the user may give a three-part file
specification.
The format for MS-LINK file specifications
is the same as-that of a disk file:
[d:]<filename>[<.ext>]
where:

d: is the drive designation.
Permissible drive
designations for MS-LINK are A: through 0:. The
colon is always required as part of the drive
designation.
filename is any
characters.

legal

filename

one

eight

is one- to three-character extension to the
filename.
The period is always required as part of
the extension.

6.4.1

Input File Extensions

If no filename extensions are given in the input (object)
file specifications, MS-LINK will recognize the following
extensions by default:
.OBJ
.LIB

Object
Library

6-6

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)

6.4.2

Output File Extensions

MS-LINK appends the following
output (Run and List) fi les:
.EXE
.MAP

6.4.3

default

extensions

the

Run (may not be overridden)
List (may be overridden)

VM.TMP (Temporary) File

MS-LINK uses available memory for the I ink session. If the
files to be linked create an output file that exceeds
available memory, MS-LINK will create a temporary file, name
it VM.TMP, and put it on the disk in the default drive. If
MS-LINK creates VM.TMP, it will display the message:
VM.TMP has been created.
Do not change diskette in drive, <d:>
Once this message has been displayed, you must not remove
the disk from the default drive until the link session ends.
If the disk is removed, the operation of MS-LINK wi 11 be
unpredictable, and MS-LINK might display the error message:
Unexpected end of file on VM.TMP
The contents of VM.TMP are written to the file named
following the Run File: prompt. VM.TMP is a working file
only and is deleted at the end of the linking session.
WARNING
Do not use VM.TMP as a filename for any file.
If
you have a file named VM.TMP on the default drive
and MS-LINK requires the VM.TMP file, MS-LINK wi 11
delete the VM.TMP already on disk and create a new
VM.TMP. Thus, the contents of the previous VM.TMP
f i lew i 11 be los t.

6-7

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)

6.5 HOW TO START MS-LINK
MS-LINK requires two types of input:
a command to start
MS-LINK and responses to command prompts. In addition.
seven switches control MS-LINK features. Usually. you will
type all the commands to MS-LINK on the terminal keyboard.
As an option. answers to the command prompts and any
switches may be contained in a response ~ile. Command
characters can be used to assist you while giving commands
to MS-LINK.
MS-LINK may be started in any of three ways.
The first
method is to type the commands in response to individual
prompts. In the second method. you type all commands on the
I ine used to start MS-LINK. To start MS-LINK by the third
method. you must create a response file that contains all
the necessary commands and tell MS-LINK where that file is
when you start MS-LINK.
Summary of Methods to Start MS-LINK

Method

LINK

Method 2

LINK <filenames>[/switches]

Method 3

LINK @<filespec>

6-8

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)
6.5.1

Method 1:

Prompts

To start MS-LINK with Method 1, type:
LINK
MS-LINK will be loaded into memory.
MS-LINK will then
display four text prompts that appear one at a time. You
answer the prompts to command MS-LINK to perform specific
tasks.
At the end of each line, you may type one or more switches,
preceded by the switch character, a forward slash.
The command prompts are summarized below and
more detail in the "Command Prompts" section.

described

PROMPT

RESPONSES

Object Modules [.OBJ]:

List .OBJ files to
be
linked.
They
must be
separated by blank spaces
or p I us signs (+). I f a
plus sign is the
last
character
typed,
the
prompt
will
reappear.
There is no default; a
response is required.

Run File [Object-file.EXE]:

Give
filename
for
executable
object code.
The
default
is
first-object-filename.EXE.
(You cannot change
the
output extension.)

6-9

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)
PROMPT

RESPONSES

List File [Run-file.MAP]:

Give filename for listing.
The
default
is
RUN
f i 1ename.

Libraries [ ]:

List
filenames
to
be
searched,
separated
by
blank spaces or plus signs
(+) •
I f a plus sign is
the last character typed,
the prompt will reappear.
The default is to search
for default libraries in
the
object
modules.
(Extensions will be change
to • LIB.)

6-10

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)

6.5.2

Method 2:

Command Line

To start MS-LINK using Method 2, type all commands on one
line.
The entries following LINK are responses to the
command prompts. The entry fields for the different prompts
must be separated by commas. Use the following syntax:
LINK (object-list>,<runfile>,<listfile>,<l ib-1ist>[/switch ••• ]
The entries following LINK are responses to the command
prompts. The entry fields for the different prompts must be
separated by commas.
where:

object-list is a I ist of object
by plus signs.
runfi1e is the name
executable output.

modules,

separated

the

file

receive

the

1istfi1e is the name of
1 i st i ng.

the

file

receive

the

lib-list is
searched.

list

library

modules

/switch refers to optional switches, which may be
placed following any of the response entries (just
before any of the commas or after the <lib-list>, as
shown) •
To select the default for a field, simply type
comma with no spaces between the two commas.
Example:
LINK
FUN+TEXT+TABLE+CARE/P/M"FUNLIST,COBLIB.LIB

6-11

second

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)
This command causes MS-LINK to be loaded, then the object
modules FUN.OBJ, TEXT.OBJ, TABLE.OBJ, and CARE.OBJ are
loaded. MS-LINK then pauses (as a result of using the IP
switch).
MS-LINK I inks the object modules when you press
any key, and produces a global symbol map (the 1M switch);
defaults to FUN.EXE Run file; creates a List file named
FUNLIST.MAP; and searches the Library file COBLIB.LIB.

6-12

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)

6.5.3

Method 3:

Response File

To start MS-LINK with Method 3. type:
LINK @<filespec>
where:

filespec is the name of a response file. A response
file contains answers to the MS-LINK prompts (shown
in Method I) and may also contain any of the
switches.
When naming a response file. the use of
filename extensions is optional. Method 3 permits
the command that starts MS-LINK to be entered from
the keyboard or within a batch
file
without
requiring you to take any further action.

To use this option. you must create a response file
containing several lines of text. each of which is the
response to an MS-LINK prompt. The responses must be in the
same order as the MS-LINK prompts discussed in Method 1. If
desired. a long response to the Object Modules:
or
Libraries:
prompt may be typed on several I ines by using a
plus sign (+) to continue the same response onto the next
1 i ne.
Use switches and command characters in the response file the
same way as they are used for responses typed on the
terminal keyboard.
When the MS-LINK session begins. each prompt will be
displayed in order with the responses from the response
file. If the response file does not contain answers for all
the prompts.
(i n the form of f i I enames. the sem i co Ion
command character or carriage returns). MS-LINK will display
the prompt which does not have a response. then wait for you
to type a legal response. When a legal response has been
typed. MS-LINK continues the link session.

6-13

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)
Example:
FUN TEXT TABLE CARE
/PAUSE/MAP
FUNllST
COBlIB.LIB
This response file tells MS-lINK to load the four object
modules name FUN, TEXT, TABLE, and CARE. MS-lINK pauses
before producing a public symbol map to permit you to swap
disk (see discussion under /PAUSE in the "Switches" section
before using this feature). When you press any key, the
output files will be named FUN.EXE and FUNlIST.MAP. MS-lINK
will search the library file COBlIB.LlB. and will use the
default settings for the switches.

6-1L.

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)

6.6 COMMAND CHARACTERS
MS-LINK provides three command characters.
Plus sign
Use the plus sign (+) to separate entries and to extend
the current line in response to the Object Modules:
and Libraries: prompts. (A blank space may be used to
separate object modules.) To type a large number of
responses (each may be very long), type a
plus
sign/<RETURN> at the end of the line to extend it. If
the plus sign/<RETURN> is the last entry following
these two prompts, MS-LINK will prompt you for more
module names. When the Object Modules: or Libraries:
prompt appears again, continue to type responses. When
all the modules to be linked and libraries to be
searched have been listed, be sure the response line
ends with a module name and a <RETURN> and n2! a plus
sign/<RETURN>.
Example:
Object Module [.OBJ]: FUN TEXT
TABLE CARE+<RETURN>
Object Modules [.OBJ]:
FOO+FLIPFLOP+JUNQUE+<RETURN>
Object Modules [.OBJ]:
CORSAIR<RETURN>
Semicolon
To select default responses to the remaining prompts,
use a single semicolon (;) followed immediately by a
carriage return at any time after the first prompt (Run
File:). This feature saves time and overrides the need
to press a series of <RETURN> keys.

6-15

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)
NOTE
Once the semicolon has been typed and entered
(by pressing the <RETURN> key), you can no
longer respond to any of the prompts for that
link
session.
Therefore, do not use the
semicolon to skip some prompts.
To
skip
prompts, use the <RETURN> key.
Example:
Object Modules
[.OBJ]: FUN TEXT TABLE CARE<RETURN>
Run Module [FUN.EXE]: ;<RETURN>
No other prompts will appear, and MS-LINK will use the
default values (including FUN.MAP for the List file).
<CTRL/C>
Use the <CTRL/C> key to abort the link session at any
time.
If you type an erroneous response, such as the
wrong filename or an incorrectly spelled filename, you
must press <CTRL/C> to exit MS-LINK then restart
MS-LINK. If the error has been typed but you have not
pressed the <RETURN> key, you may delete the erroneous
characters with the backspace key, but for that line
only.

6-16

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)

6.7

COMMAND PROMPTS

MS-LINK asks you for responses to four text prompts.
When
you have typed a response to a prompt and pressed <RETURN>.
the next prompt appears. When the last prompt has been
answered.
MS-LINK begins linking automatically without
further command. When the link session is finished, MS-LINK
exits to the operating system. When the operating system
prompt appears, MS-LINK has finished successfully.
If the
1 ink session is unsuccessful, MS-LINK will display the
appropriate error message.
MS-LINK prompts you for the names of Object, Run, and List
files. and for Libraries. The prompts are listed in order
of appearance. The default response is shown in square
brackets ([ ]) following the prompt, for prompts which can
default to preset responses. The Object Modules:
prompt
has no preset filename response and requires you to type a
filename.
Object Modules [.OBJ]:
Type a list of the object modules to be linked.
MS-LINK assumes by default that the filename extension
is .OBJ. If an object module has any other filename
extension, the extension must be given. Otherwise, the
extension may be omitted.
Modules must be separated by plus signs (+).
Remember that MS-LINK loads segments into classes in
the order encountered. You can use this information to
set the order in which the object modules will be read
by MS-LINK.
Run File [First-Object-filename.EXE]:
-----Typing a filename will create a file for storing the
Run (executable) file that results from the 1 ink
session. All Run files receive the filename extension
.EXE, even if you specify an extension other than .EXE.

6-17

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)
prompt,
If no response is typed to the Run File:
MS-LINK uses the first filename typed in response to
the Object Modules: prompt as the RUN filename.
Example:
Run File [FUN.EXE]:

B:PAYROLL/P

This response directs MS-LINK to create the Run file
PAYROLL.EXE on drive B:.
Also, MS-LINK will pause,
which allows you to insert a new disk to receive the
Run file.
List File [Run-Filename.MAP]:
The List file contains an entry for each segment in the
input (object) modules.
Each entry also shows the
addressing in the Run file.
The default response is the Run
default filename extension .MAP.

filename

with

the

Libraries [ ]:
The valid responses are up to eight library filenames
or simply a carriage return. (A carriage return means
default library search.) Library files must have been
created by a library utility.
Library filenames must be separated by blank spaces
plus signs (+).

MS-LINK searches I ibrary files in the order listed to
resolve external references. When it finds the module
that defines the external symbol. MS-LINK processes
that module as another object module.

6-18

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)
If MS-LINK cannot find a 1 ibrary file on the disks
the disk drives, it will display the message:

Cannot find library <library-name>
Type new drive letter:
Press the letter
examp 1e. B).

for

the

6-19

drive

designation

(for

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)

6.8 MS-LINK SWITCHES
The seven MS-LINK
switches
control
various
MS-LINK
functions.
Switches must be typed at the end of a prompt
response, regardless of which method is used to start
MS-LINK.
Switches may be grouped at the end of any
response, or may be scattered at the end of severa I.
If
more than one switch is typed at the end of one response,
each switch must be preceded by a forward slash (I).
All switches may be abbreviated. The only restriction is
that an abbreviation must be sequ~ntial from the first
letter through the last typed; no gaps or transpositions are
allowed. For example:
I I I ega I

/DS
/DSA
/DSALLOCA

/DSL
IDAl

IDlC
/DSALLOCT

IDSALLOCATE
Using the /OSALLOCATE switch tells MS-LINK to load all
data at the high end of the Data Segment. Otherwise,
MS-LINK loads all data at the low end of the Data
At runtime, the OS pointer is set to the
Segment.
lowest possible address to allow the entire OS segment
to
be
used.
Use of the /DSAllOCATE switch in
combination with the default load low (that is, the
/HIGH switch is not used) permits the user application
to dynamically allocate any available memory below the
area specifically allocated within DGroup, yet to
remain addressable by the same OS pointer.
This
dynamic allocation is needed for Pascal and FORTRAN
programs.

6-20

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)
NOTE
Your application
program
may
dynamically
allocate up to 64K bytes (or the actual amount
of memory available) less the amount allocated
within DGroup.
/HIGH
Use of the /HIGH switch causes MS-LINK to place the Run
file as high as possible in memory. Otherwise, MS-LINK
places the Run file as low as possible.
IMPORTANT
Do not use the /HIGH
FORTRAN programs.

switch

with

Pascal

/LINENUMBERS
The /LINENUMBERS switch tells MS-LINK to include in the
List file the line numbers and addresses of the source
statements in the input modules.
Otherwise, line
numbers are not included in the List file.
NOTE
Not all compilers produce object modules that
contain line number information.
In these
cases, of course, MS-LINK cannot include line
numbers.

6-21

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)
/MAP
/MAP directs MS-LINK to list all public (global)
symbols defined in the input modules. If /MAP is not
given, MS-LINK will list only
errors
(including
undefined globals).
The symbols are listed alphabetically.
For
each
symbol, MS-LINK lists its value and its segment:offset
location in the Run file. The symbols are listed at
the end of the List file.
/PAUSE
The /PAUSE switch causes MS-LINK to pause in the 1 ink
session when the switch is encountered. Normally,
MS-LINK performs the 1 inking session from beginning to
end without stopping. This switch allows the user to
swap the disks before MS-LINK outputs the Run (.EXE)
file.
When MS-LINK encounters the /PAUSE switch, it
the message:

displays

About to generate .EXE file
Change disks <hit any key>
MS-LINK resumes processing when the
key.

user

presses

CAUTION
Do hot remove the disk which will receive the
List file, or the disk used for the VM.TMP
file, if one has been created.

6-22

any

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)
ISTACK:<number>
number represents any positive numeric value
(in
hexadecimal radix) up to 65536 bytes. If a value from
1 to 511 is typed, MS-LINK will use 512. If the ISTACK
switch is not used for a link session. MS-LINK will
calculate the necessary stack size automatically.
All compilers and assemblers should provide information
in the object modules that allow the I inker to compute
the required stack size.
At least one object (input) module must contain a stack
allocation statement. If not. MS-LINK will display the
following error message:
WARNING:

NO STACK STATEMENT

INO
INO is short for NODEFAULTLIBRARYSEARCH.
This switch
tells MS-LINK to n2! search the default (product)
libraries in the object modules. For example. if you
are linking object modules in Pascal. specifying the
INO switch tells MS-LINK to not automatically search
the
library named PASCAL.LIB to resolve external
references.

6-23

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)

6.9

SAMPLE MS-LINK SESSION

This sample shows you the type of
displayed during an MS-LINK session.

information

that

In response to the MS-DOS prompt, type:
LINK
The system displays the following messages and prompts (your
answers are underlined):
Microsoft Object Linker V2.00
(C) Copyright 1982 by Microsoft Inc.
Object Modules [.OBJ]: !Q SYSINIT
Run File [IO.EXE]:
List File [NUL.MAP]: LQ /MAP
Libraries [.LIB]: 1

By specifying /MAP, you get both an alphabetic
listing and a chronological listing of public
symbols.

By responding PRN to the List File: prompt, you
can redirect your output to the printer.

By specifying the L1!NI switch, MS-LINK gives
you a listing of all line numbers for all
modules.
(Note that the /LINE switch
can
generate a large volume of output).

By pressing <RETURN> in
response
to
the
Libraries:
prompt, an automatic library search
is performed.

6-24

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)
Once MS-LINK locates all libraries. the linker map displays
a list of segments in the order of their appearance within
the load module. The 1 ist might look 1 ike this:
Start
OOOOOH
009FOH

Stop
009ECH
o1166H

Length
09EDH
0777H

Name
CODE
SYSINITSEG

The information in the Start and Stop columns shows the
20-bit hex address of each segment relative to location
zero. Location zero is the beginning of the load module.
The addresses displayed are not the absolute addresses where
these segments are loaded.
Because the /MAP switch was used. MS-LINK displays
public symbols by name and value. For example:
ADDRESS
009F:0012
009F:0005
009F : 00 11
009F:000B
009F:0013
009F:0009
009F:000F
009F:0000

PUBLICS BY NAME
BUFFERS
CURRENT_DOS_LOCATION
DEFAULT_DRIVE
DEV I CE_L I ST
FILES
FINAL_DOS_LOCATION
MEMORY_SIZE
SYSINIT

ADDRESS
009FtOOOO
009F:0005
009F:0009
009F:OOOB
009F:000F
009F:OOll
009F:OOI2
009F:0013

PUBLICS BY VALUE
SYSINIT
CURRENT DOS LOCATION
FINAL_DOS_LOCATION
DEVICE_LIST
MEMORY_SIZE
DEF AUL T_DR IVE
BUFFERS
FILES

6-25

the

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)
6.10

ERROR MESSAGES

All errors cause the link session to abort. After the cause
has been found and corrected. MS-LINK must be rerun. The
following error messages are displayed by MS-LINK:
ATTEMPT TO ACCESS DATA OUTSIDE SEGMENT BOUNDS. POSSIBLY
OBJECT MODULE

BAD

There is probably a bad Object file.
BAD NUMERIC PARAMETER
Numeric value is not in digits.
CANNOT OPEN TEMPORARY FILE
MS-LINK is unable to create the file VM.TMP because the
disk directory is full.
Insert a new disk. Do not
remove the disk that will receive the List.MAP fi1e.
ERROR:

DUP RECORD TOO COMPLEX

DUP record in assembly language module is too complex.
Simplify DUP record in assembly language program.
ERROR:

FIXUP OFFSET EXCEEDS FIELD WIDTH

An assembly language instruction refers to an address
with a short instruction instead of a long instruction.
Edit assembly language source and reassemble.
INPUT FILE READ ERROR
There is probably a bad Object file.
6-26

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)
INVALID OBJECT MODULE
An object modu1e(s) is incorrectly formed or incomplete
(as when assembly is stopped in the middle).
SYMBOL DEFINED MORE THAN ONCE
MS-LINK found two or more modules that define a
symbol name.
PROGRAM SIZE OR
LINKER

NUMBER

SEGMENTS

EXCEEDS

single

CAPACITY

The total size may not exceed 384k bytes and the number
of segments may not exceed 255.
REQUESTED STACK SIZE EXCEEDS 64K
Specify a size greater than or equal to 64K bytes
the /STACK switch.

with

SEGMENT SIZE EXCEEDS 64K
64K bytes is the addressing system limit.
SYMBOL TABLE CAPACITY EXCEEDED
Very many and/or very long names were typed,
the limit of approximately 25K bytes.
TOO MANY EXTERNAL SYMBOLS IN ONE MODULE
The 1 imit is 256 external symbols per module.

6-27

exceeding

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)
TOO MANY GROUPS
The limit is 10 groups.
TOO MANY LIBRARIES SPECIFIED
The limit is 8 libraries.
TOO MANY PUBLIC SYMBOLS
The limit is 1024 public symbols.
TOO MANY SEGMENTS OR CLASSES
The limit is 256 (segments and classes taken together).
UNRESOLVED EXTERNALS:

<list>

The external symbols listed have no defining
among the modules or library files specified.

module

VM READ ERROR
This is a disk error; it is not caused by MS-LINK
WARNING:

NO STACK SEGMENT

None of the object
statement allocating
/STACK switch.

modules specified contains
a
stack space, but you typed the

6-28

THE LINKER PROGRAM (MS-LINK)
WARNING:

SEGMENT OF ABSOLUTE OR UNKNOWN TYPE

There is a bad object module or an attempt has been
made to link modules that MS-LINK cannot handle (e.g.,
an absolute object module) •
WRITE ERROR IN TMP FILE
No more disk space remains to expand the VM.TMP file.
WRITE ERROR ON RUN FILE
Usually, there is not enough disk
file.

6-29

space

for

the

Run

APPENDIX A
HOW TO CONFIGURE YOUR SYSTEM

This appendix tells you how to specify MS-DOS settings that
need to be configured at start-up time. An example of this
is a standard device driver. such as an online printer.
In
many cases. there are installation-specific settings for
MS-DOS that need to be configured at system star~up.
An
example of this is a standard device driver. such as an
online printer.
The MS-DOS configuration file (CONFIG.SYS) allows you to
configure your system with a minimum of effort. With this
file. you can add device drivers to your system at startup.
The configuration file is simply an ASCI I file that has
certain commands for MS-DOS startup (boot).
The· boot
process is as follows:
1.

The disk boot sector is read. This contains enough
code to read MS-DOS code and the BIOS.

The MS-DOS code and BIOS are read.

A variety of BIOS initializations are done.

A-I

HOW TO CONFIGURE YOUR SYSTEM

A system
initialization
routine
reads
the
configuration file (CONFIG.SYS). if it exists.- to
perform device installat10n and other user options.
Its
final
task
is
to execute the command
interpreter. which finishes
the
MS-DOS
boot
process.

A-2

HOW TO CONFIGURE YOUR SYSTEM
A.l

CHANGING THE CONFIG.SYS FILE

If there is not a CONFIG.SYS file on the MS-DOS disk, you
can use the MS-DOS editor, EDLIN. to create a file; then
save it on the MS-DOS disk in your I2E! directory.
The following is a list of commands
file CONFIG.SYS:

for

the

configuration

BUFFERS = <number>
This is the number of sector buffers that will comprise
the system lis~.
If not set. 10 is a reasonable
number.
FILES • <number>
This is the number of open files that the system calls
2FH through 57H can access.
If not set. 10 is a
reasonable number.
DEVICE = <filename>
This installs the device driver in <filename> into
system list. (See below.)

the

BREAK = <ON or OFF>
If ON is specified (the default is OFF), a check for
CTRL/C as input will be made every time the system is
called. ON improves the ability to abort programs over
previous versions of the MS-DOS.
SHELL = <filename>
This begins execution of the shell
processor) from <filename>.

A-3

(top-level

command

HOW TO CONFIGURE YOUR SYSTEM
COUNTRY = <number>
This number is set·to allow for international date,
time, currency, and case conversion. Acceptable values
are:
United States = 1 (default value)
France = 33
Spain = 34
Portugal

= 35

Italy = 39
United Kingdom = 44
Germany = 49
Japan = 81
Israel

= 97

A typical configuration file might look 1 ike this:
Buffers
F i 1es
Device
·Break
She 11

=
=
=
=
=

10
\BIN\NETWORK.SYS
ON
A:\BIN\COMMAND.COM A:\BIN /P

Note here that the Buffers and Files parameters are set to
10.
The system initial ization routine will search for the
filename \BIN\NETWORK.SYS to find the device that is being
added to the system. This file is usually supplied on disk /
with your device. Make sure that you save the device file l
in the pathname that you specify in the Device parameter.

A-4

HOW TO CONFIGURE YOUR SYSTEM
This configuration file also sets the MS-DOS command EXEC to
the
COMMAND.COM file located on disk A: in the \BIN
directory. The A:\BIN tells COMMAND.COM where to look for
itself when it needs to re-read from disk. The /P tells
COMMAND.COM that it is the first program running on the
system so that it can process the MS-DOS EXIT command.

A-5

INDEX

+ (MS-LINK command character) ,

6-15
(MS-LINK command character),
6-15
AUTOEXE.BAT file, 2-5
.BAT files, 2-9
Batch commands, 4-18
ECHO. 4-8
FOR, 4-16
IF, 4-19
PAUSE, 4-27
REM, 4-33
SH 1FT, 4-35
Batch f i 1es, 2-1
Batch processing, 2-1
Binary files (FC) , 5-2
Buffer space. 5-2
Change device. 4-7
Change directory. 4-5
Changing directories, 1-11
CHOIR. 1-9. 1-11,4-5
Classes, 6-4
Command piping, 3-3
Command prompts
for MS-LINK. 6-17
Commands
CHD IR. 1-9, 1-11, 4-5
COPY, 1-9
CTTY. 4-7
DEL. 1-9
DIR, 1-9
ECHO. 4-8
EXE2BIN. 4-9

Commands (Cont.)
EX IT, 4-12
FIND, 3-3, 4-13
FOR, 4-16
GOTO, 4-18
how to format. 4-1
IF, 4-19
LDCOPY. 4-21
MEDIACHK. 4-22
MK 0 I R, 1- 3 • 1- 10 , 4- 23
MORE, 3-3, 4-24
PATH. 1-8, 4-25
PAUSE, 2-2, 4-27
PROMPT, 4-29
RECOVER, 4-31
REM, 2-2, 4-33
RMDIR, 1-11, 4-34
SH 1FT, 4-35
SORT, 3-3, 4-36
TYPE, 1-9, 4-4
CONFIG.SYS file, A-1
COpy, 1-9
Ctr1/C, 4-4
Ctr1/C (MS-LINK command
character), 6-16
CTTY, 4-7
DEL, 1-9
Difference reporting (FC), 5-6
DI R, 1-9
Directories, 1-1
changing, 1-11
c r ea t i ng , 1-10
hierarchical, 1-2
making, 4-23
remove, 4-34
Index-l

Directories (Cont.)
removing, I-II
root, 1-2
working, 1-2, 1-9
ECHO, 4-8
.EXE fi les, 6-7
EXE2BIN, 4-9
EXIT, 4-12
External reference, 6-2
File comparison utility, 5-1
Filenames, 1-5
Files
batch, 2-1
binary (FC). 5-2
source (FC). 5-2
Files that MS-LINK uses, 6-6
Filter commands
FIND, 4-13
MORE, 4-24
SORT, 4-36
Filters. 3-3
F I NO, 3- 3, 4-13
FOR, 4-16
GOTO. 4-18
Group (MS-LINK). 6-5
IF, 4-19
Input, 3-1
LDCOPY, 4-21
• LIB f i I es, 6-6
Loader. 4-21
Loops. 6-4

MKDIR. 1-3, 1-10. 4-23
MORE, 3-3. 4-24
MS-LINK
defined, 6-1
sample session. 6-24
starting. 6-8
.OBJ f i I es, 6-6
Output, 3-1
Output redirection (FC). 5-7
PATH, 1-8. 4-25
Pathnames. 1-5, 4-25
used with external commands.
1-7
used with internal commands.
1-8
PAUSE, 2-2, 4-27
Piping, 3-3
PROMPT, 4-29
RECOVER. 4-31
Redirecting output. 3-1
Redirection of output (Fe). 5·
Relative address. 5-4
REM. 2-2, 4-33
Removing a directory, I-II. 4RMDIR. I-II, 4-34
Root directory, 1-2
Segments. 6-4
SH 1FT, 4-35
SORT, 3-3, 4-36
Source files (FC). 5-2
Subdirectory, 1-3
Switches
for FC

Make a directory, 4-23
.MAP files. 6-7
MEDIACHK. 4-22

1#. 5-4
lB. 5-4
IC, 5-5
Index-2

Switches
for FC (Cont.)
/W. 5-4
for MS-LINK
/DSALLOCATE. 6-20
/HIGH. 6-21
/LINENUMBERS. 6-21
/MAP. 6-22
/ND. 6-23

Switches
for MS-LINK (Cont.)
/PAUSE. 6-22
/STACK. 6-23
TYPE. 1-9. 4-4
VM.TMP files. 6-7
Working directories. 1-9

Index-3

Rainbow™

MSTM-OOS
Version 2.11
Advanced User's Guide
AA-EAOBA-XV
READER'S COMMENTS

Did you find this manual understandable, usable, and well-organized? Please
make suggestions for improvement.

Did you find errors in this manual? If so, specify the error and the page number.

Please indicate the type of reader that you most nearly represent.

o First-time computer user
o Experienced computer user
o Application package user
Programmer
oo Other
(please specify) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Name___________________________________________
Date,______________________________________________
Organization,_______________________________________
Street'-____________________________________
City______________________________________
State___________________________________
Zip Code
or Country____________________________________

---'D~~'DTeaD'-';"a-··
~

T.- - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - -- -

Tfl-111------ --~~;~~ --

oi,

if Mailed in the
United States

I
I
I
I

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 33 MAYNARD MASS.
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

SOFTWARE PUBLICATIONS
200 FOREST STREET MR01-2/L12
MARLBOROUGH, MA 01752

- - - - -

Do Not Tear - Fold Here and Tape

-- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I

I
I
I

I
I

I
I
I
I

I
I·
I'

,:
: I
I
I.
I'
I

I'
I
I
I
I
I

AA-DYS1A-XV
Printed in U.S.A.